Home

Visual Supervisor Handbook - Eurotherm by Schneider Electric

1. 3 13 TIME 3 13 3 5 1 Alarin page 3 13 TWO DISPLAY cete be tto P Ret RS 3 14 FILTER KEY terno tert 3 14 ACK KEY eo eee OH SRM 3 15 ARCHIVE eos reif ite cte ete es Ee 3 15 3 5 2 Alarm Message Acknowledgement 22 025 3 15 ALARMS D HRS 3 15 MESSAGES dett rete cova Dee beri Fouts tek 3 15 3 5 3 Adding notes to alarm history sss 3 15 3 5 4 Alarm history archive 3 16 3 5 5 Alarm summary page 2 em 3 16 35 6 Event Log inc te ERE 3 17 TWOXLINE DISPEAY erroe exe ttn 3 17 3 6 AREA AND GROUP DISPLAYS teet rede repeti eec 3 18 3 6 OVERVIEW cii ner be nun 3 18 TRENID DISPEAYS oce Pati 3 18 ALARM INDICATION octo e he eto et eene 3 18 HA029280 Contents Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 3 6 2 Function block faceplates 3 20 RAMP FAGEPLATES et 3 20 PID FACEPLATES etc ee ote ner oie 3 21 3 6 3 Display modes e tton erem ere eta ep pe 3 21 FACEPLATE DISPLAY re rr ERR Re 3 22 NUMERIC DISPLAY ete
2. 4 9 NAME dE Pane 2 ES 2 2 2 12 Home page declaration 5 45 Logic states 8 7 HOME USER SCREENS LL 26 sse Horizontal display with faceplates 3 25 M Hot starts snc ue beret Gee D 4 40 sot aceto T Oi 4 40 Main 2 2 2 2 5 Hourly MAINT Key irs 6 6 err 4 16 MAINT Key tcu teet eit aec 4 34 PISS tas MT S 3 11 Maintenance security 6 6 Master Slave Gorifiectior ihe E 1 7 Selection 1 7 i Calibration inerte reines 8 10 6 5 3 2 A f Mechanical installation 1 3 11 1 i Anette ele eee 6 4 Profibus Master units 10 2 Importing application BAT GS Vua VEU EID ey HA029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK M Cont P Cont Menu K6y E ee enemies 2 3 8 14 Message Power requirements 1 6 Active Cleared Ack ed 6 2 PRE BEQT cody e hehe didi eed 2 8 Display Acknowledge
3. 4 13 4 1 8 Changing setpoint names 4 13 4 1 9 Segment timing display 4 14 Contents HAO29280 Page 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 4 2 LOGGING GROUPS OF DATA 4 15 4 2 T Log initidtion e RE 4 15 LOG CONFIGURATION d ratu e erede tte eere 4 16 4 22 FTP Traristerz m e er te den Ree t ctis 4 18 MULTIPLE COPY MODE aea ehe e Pers 4 18 SINGIE COPY MODE etre tende oe gite 4 18 CONFIGURATION rotten etr Re tede tere a 4 18 4 3 MANAGING AN 4 19 4 3 1 Application summary page ee 4 20 4 3 2 Application manager page 4 20 4 3 3 Stopping an application 4 21 4 3 4 Saving application data 4 22 4 3 5 Unloading an application 2 4 22 4 3 6 Loading or loading and running an application 4 23 APPLICATION SELECTION 2 2 4 23 APPLICATION LOADING 2 2 4 23 4 3 7 Deleting an application 4 23 4 3 8 Function Block Manager 4 24 ALPHA NUMERIC BLOCK 4 26 FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS 4 27 4 4 CONTROLLING 55 4 27 4 4 Firskfime dcCess oir e ie
4. 4 25 Running more than one 3 2 Setup 8 9 Scheduling 3 4 Status 2 7 Specification aede ae A 3 4 33 6 5 2 5 No tntiimatieris 6 11 Programmer ia a 2 6 Node number 6 8 e E EE s idi d 225 Text dictionaty 5 5 34 2 8 Programs Recipes 4 47 deese ache 8 16 PROPERTIES 04000 4 33 Operator Protocols communications 4 36 Access level 4 28 HCM rM Mec 6 2 Q OptiOn Key hrec 2 3 Options menu fields sess 8 6 Question mark eeeeenneene 2 10 OVGIVIeW IUe 2 6 R Data field entry eese 8 5 Ramp HERE uei ea 4 4 P Ramp at ote elei 4 4 Pan control 0 3 24 3 26 Ramp to 4 4 Panel dee i tette 4 4 Agent 5 43 Rate mS sees 8 5 Customisation 5 24 Rate units selection 44 2 4 12 Driver declaration 2200 5 44 Recipe T EE 2 5
5. CO QOO O0 C O S This page gives general information about the Modbus Table configuration Table This is the Table number which is not editable Highlight and lt Enter gt a Table number field to display the information related to the selected Table number For a table with a Type other than Unused the table menu for that table is displayed see Table Menu Type This field defaults to Unused allows the Table Type to be created or edited Enter a Type field to see a menu of four options Select one and press lt Enter gt to create a new table or convert an existing one to a new type Note Other fields in the Tables List associated with the selection automatically adopt default values The Type options are Unused Register Digital Diagnostic The table does not exist This type of table maps LIN Database parameters to standard 16 bit Modbus registers This type of table maps LIN digital boolean or alarm values to bits in the Modbus address space This is a special table similar to a Register Table but the values in the table have pre defined values that are used to control the Modbus operation or present diagnostic information to the LIN Database 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 8 Page 8 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 5 TABLES Cont Offset Count
6. Figure 9 1a Figure 9 1b Battery location small frame unit Access cover Profibus enclosure location large frame unit Access cover Profibus option removed 29280 Chapter 9 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 9 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 9 2 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION This procedure ensures that the instrument responds to the exact point that has been touched by the user At switch on continuously hold a finger in contact with the display screen until the calibration display appears ap proximately 60 seconds after switch on as depicted in figure 9 2 Using a soft small diameter item e g a pencil point which will not damage the touch screen touch the intersection of the upper set of crosshairs as requested by the display Once the top left target has been accepted continue as requested by the display Once all the targets have been ac cepted initialisation continues as normal Touch Target Figure 9 2 Initial calibration display screen Chapter 9 HA029280 Page 9 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 10 PROFIBUS MASTER OPTION 10 1 INTRODUCTION This option provides GW Profibus Master functionality The option circuit board and associated 9 way D type con nector are housed in a rectangular enclosure located at the rear of the instrument This chapter provides electrical and mechanical details for the option and also describes how to access the Profib
7. 3 15 Preventive maintenance 1 2 IndiCatOrs RUE 2 10 PREVIEW 2 8 Minimum Profibus Master option 10 1 Alarm event priority 2 6 2 Connector 22 2 10 4 ID ien reete eve 6 5 GWProfM 10 4 Password length 6 5 Program 8 19 da cce ertt e eto tte eerte ne 3 8 Modbus Changing the name 4 11 Configuration eese 8 12 Creation niet eder 4 1 Connection secede see eO RAD 1 7 Duration 4 8 som 8 12 Sects 4 1 MONITO APTENT 2 8 Editor ACCESS 10 7 ioo nte ree 4 3 Monitoring a program 3 9 3 10 erem etu 3 8 Multiple Copy ntt 4 18 Iterations e eee eet 3 6 Monitoring yee nets 3 9 N Pares siint m dr TID 2 2 2 7 Name type 4 16 Properties 4 11 Navigation keys 2 3 Running Network i tette is 8 9 From a 4 4 4 12 4400 3 3 dit Trail 6 1 From date 00 02 3 5 FB Manager
8. 288 0 mm Profibus connector E E E E js o ES Fixing Clip 90 one each side RES RESI ES f RS rt Re a 2 E Fc exc ps Es Fas rac fran fes Fig F20 F21 2 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 rotective conductor s terminal M4 Som ess E Panel thickness Max 22 mm Min 2 mm Serial E Ethernet Comms Power Bw Flash card L3 Lp Eo Juss Profibus ba ED 281 4 mm 298 4 gt 3144 gt Panel cutout 282 mm x 282 mm both 0 1 3mm PANEL MOUNTING DETAILS Installed panel angle Vertical panels only Minimum inter unit spacing 50 mm vertical or horizontal Note where multiple units are mounted in close proximity with one another steps must be taken to ensure that the resulting ambient temperature does not exceed the speci fied maximum operating temperature of 50 degrees Celsius Figure 10 2 1b Mechanical installation large frame unit 029280 Chapter 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 10 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 10 2 INSTALLATION Cont e 5 OV 5 0 Volts Not connected Rx Tx ve B Not connected Not connected Rx Tx ve 9 pin 2 9 Rx Tx ve 5V pin I B pin 3 6 Ol 5V for pull up Rx Tx ve A Not connected
9. The pick list disappears and the File Name field shows the name of File Name SAMPLE the selected program Start Date 22192199 Start Time The program is now ready for scheduling Iterations Note If the program is to run immediately after the currently running ACCEPT program ends the Start Date and Start Time can be left undefined as shown here Chapter 3 HAO29820 Page 3 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 1 3 SCHEDULING A PROGRAM Cont 3 1 3 1 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START DATE 7 Press the Start Date field The left side of the screen shows a numeric keyboard with a cursor flashing under the first number space in the black confirmation bar at the top 8 Key in the required date in the format set for your instrument ask your Engineer After the first digit has been keyed in the cursor moves under the space for the next one and so on The last entered character can be deleted by pressing the key abort the whole date entry process and return to the full Schedule Program page press the red cross key 9 When you ve finished and the confirmation bar shows the date in the correct format press the Return key The keyboard disappears and the Schedule Program page now shows the specified date in the Start Date field 3 1 3 2 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START TIME 10 Press the Start Time field The numeric keyboard reappears 11 Key in the time
10. 8 10 Inserting a 0 4 8 Header 3 ni DEREN 5 55 5 61 Inspect blocks cites emen 8 9 Management 3 12 Installation deter qe ie pen dde dee sedg 4 50 Electrical eei neheeteseunecerteede 1 6 Systems st mete 7 1 Profibus Master 10 4 t e ceret ente 4 16 Mechanical sse 1 3 11 1 Text Hourly 3 11 Profibus Master 10 2 Ed 8 11 Instr NO 8 14 8 16 Files with Capture Variables 5 57 Instrument Files with Monitor Variables 5 58 Data cloning e E 4 48 Flush mounting option 11 1 11 4 Setting ede educit 4 35 OP MUGS C 5 50 Intellectual Property Right Protection 4 55 0 8 11 8 18 5 eene 8 13 4 47 NUM eh tes 4 55 4 32 Iterations LOGON age heat aes ed 7 1 Changing default 4 13 WUC OU 5i doncc emendat 7 1 Number of 3 6 Trhanster ren ee cde eed 4 18 L Function
11. 5 7 4 Agent types ener eS 5 8 DATABASE NAMES 5 8 1 Function block names me 5 8 2 Alarm names 9 9 FORM FILES sostenere m ette e ut 5 91 Report i Rete P E UYF FILE ENTRIES 8 5 9 2 Alarm forms ttti ete tite eda EXAMPLE eser der enn 5 10 RECIPE FILES rente te ene 5 10 1 Basic Recipe File FILE HEADERS i rte eere tcr VARIABLE FINES cure ase conte eet s 5 10 2 More complex MULTEUINEEIIES 2 ddnde tret FILES WITH OPTIONAL CAPTURE VARIABLES FILES WITH OPTIONAL MONITOR VARIABLES 5 11 WRITABLE DICTIONARY 2 000000 5 12 THE RECIPE DICTIONARY 20242 5 13 THE BATCH DICTIONARY 5113 1 E o a E di eed ettet 52 ASBAT CH FILES tee Eg 5 T4 File Header i iir 5 14 2 Batch Phases nh eee cens 5 15 DATABASE CHANGE AUDIT TRAILING 5 315 Header Line cai tee Yea echt ia 51 522 Weim lines co ede ac see s eT Chapter 6 ADMINISTRATIVE 65 6 1 6 1 NETWORK AUDIT TRAIL 2 0 Modes ince t rg
12. 1 1 2 GETTING ee EU EE 2 1 3 OPERATION e i he te a ee 3 1 4 MANAGEMENT 2 eene tob d ee 4 1 5 GUSTOMISIINIG vi ect eee ei 5 1 6 ADMINISTATIVE FUNCTIONS 6 1 7 7 1 8 THE CONTROL 2 2 8 1 9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE eee 9 1 TO OPTION ide eee e Meee eese RS 10 1 11 FLUSH MOUNTING OPTION 11 1 A SPECIFICATION ead sie ee eee 1 OPTIONS UPDATE e e Rte PERS 1 25 55 eec ete 1 EFFECTIVITY This manual refers to instruments fitted with software version number V2 1 RELATED MANUALS The Setpoint Program Editor Handbook HA261134U005 The UserScreen Editor HA260749U005 The LIN Blocks Reference Manual sssse HA082375U003 LINtools On line user guide RM263001U055 The LIN ALIN Installation and User Guide HA082429U005 The T2550 DIN rail con
13. Figure 3 6 3e Vertical trend with faceplates Figure 3 6 3f Vertical trend with scroll bars 029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont VERTICAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE Cont Review mode Itis possible to enter review trace history mode by a Touching the screen in either the Standard or the scroll bar displays described above or the full width display described below b Using the slider or push button controls in the scroll bar display c Touching the slide area between the slider and a push button Although data is still read and stored in trace history by the instrument the traces remain static on the screen unless the zoom or pan controls are used The Option Live keys or the Back Live key are used to return to the standard scroll bar display CURSOR On entry to review mode a cursor is located at the top of the screen The cursor is repositioned either by touching it and dragging it to the position required or by touching the screen at the desired point or a combination of both The exact temporal position of the cursor is shown at the bottom of the screen and the values shown in the faceplates are those at the cursor time and date ZOOM These controls allow the amount of data displayed on the screen to be varied either continuously using the slider or in steps using the keys The expansion contraction of the trends is ce
14. 3 22 7 eere rire cree ds Ags 3 22 HORIZONTAL BARGRAPEH 3 ederet tnter eere pa 3 23 VERTICAL TREND WITH 3 23 VERTICAL TREND FULL WIDTH 22 3 25 HORIZONTAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE 3 25 HORIZONTAL TREND FULL WIDTH 3 26 3 7 DOWNLOADING RECIPES sss eee 3 27 RECIPE SET SELECTION Perte tener tena 3 28 3 7 1 Download procedure sss 3 28 LOADING THE 3 28 SELECTING A RECIPE LNE 3 29 SELECTING A RECIP E crie mune hes ieee EH 3 29 3 7 2 Monitoring the recipe 3 29 RECIPE STATUS PAGE 12 riot emeret edo 3 29 RECIPE MONITOR PAGE 3 30 3 8 BATCHES nee er Pes qox ERO Ales ene 3 31 3 8 l loadings itr e e mitte et eene 3 31 3 8 2 Recipe selection t Texte T d 3 31 3 83 B tchic stomising zd e 3 31 3 8 4 Batch initiations 3 32 3 8 5 Batch monitoring 3 32 3 8 6 i etes qeu d 3 32 3 817 Bah 3 32 3 8 8 Batch Create op 3 33 Chapter 4 MANAGEMENT
15. Select APP MGR Press APPLN Application 2 APP SUM APP MGR MGR Press APP MGR The Appl n Manager page appears displaying the name of the cur i rent application and its state i e RUNNING IDLE or STOPPED File RISE State RUNNING STOP Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 20 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 3 Stopping an application File RISE State RUNNING With an application running the Appl n Manager page appears except for the actual file name as shown in the figure STOP File RISE State STOPPED To stop the application press STOP The display confirms that the application has STOPPED UNLOAD SAVE SAVEAS START Note While an application is STOPPED the Logging and Programmer facilities will be suspended The duration of the current segment will be extended by the length of time the application stays STOPPED Stopping an application during a critical operation is not recommended The keys at the bottom of the display offer four options UNLOAD the application without first saving the application data typically prior to selecting a new application or cloning a new one SAVE the application data typically because the Cold Start values have changed usually from the Terminal Configurator
16. 2 10 4 V Serial COMMS eats 1 7 etie 8 19 Supply voltage ct iin 1 6 Variable lines Recipe files 5 56 1 9 VDU package 8 3 Writable dictionary 2 5 58 Vertical display mode Z Full Width eet ee eterne 3 25 With faceplate 2 3 23 Zoom control 3 24 3 26 ML Red mm 4 32 Voltage 1 6 VTA00 mode ui ean 8 2 Index 029280 i 6 Issue 5 08 Inter Company sales and service locations AUSTRALIA Sydney Eurotherm Pty Ltd Telephone 61 2 9838 0099 Fax 61 2 9838 9288 E mail info au eurotherm com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH Telephone 43 1 7987601 Fax 43 1 7987605 E mail info at eurotherm com BELGIUM amp LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm S A N V Telephone 32 85 274080 Fax 32 85 274081 E mail info be eurotherm com BRAZIL Campinas SP Eurotherm Ltda Telephone 5519 3707 5333 Fax 5519 3707 5345 E mail info br eurotherm com DENMARK Copenhagen Eurotherm Danmark AS Telephone 45 70 234670 Fax 445 70 234660 E mail info dk 9 eurotherm com FINLAND Abo Eurotherm Finland Telephone 358 22506030 Fax 358 22503201 E mail info fi eurotherm com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone 33 478 664500 Fax 33 478 352490 E mail info fr eurotherm com
17. 5 4 28 Systemqtext cos auod 5 2 5 63 4 35 User text ees 5 34 Communications sss 4 35 8 15 8 17 Available protocols 4 36 Disable User ID ss cont eec 4 32 6 4 Parameter setting 4 35 Display Brightness 4 44 5 iiti mete fechas retis 4 47 Display mode Setup ect E tin cete eed iere 8 13 Bargraph Specification eeepc rn A 3 Horizontal ono bet heated 3 23 COMPOUNG eet cet bee et ere ue eda 8 4 Vertical 3 22 COMPOUING ss 2 prine dine 8 5 Faceplate 4 Ra Lee 3 22 Configuration Horizontal with faceplate 3 25 Database nme ubere Ug 8 3 nc tee cep 3 22 irist innen 8 12 Vertical fullwidth eeeeeeeese 3 25 Configurator Vertical with faceplate 3 23 CE 8 1 Down key iere metet 2 3 Mode selecting 8 1 Downloading a configuration 8 1 RUNNING ree eee erre i line creeds 8 2 estia xe eas 8 18 Confirm only 6 11 Dwell sort nd aetna eue 4 4 1 8 8 Connections 8 6 8 8
18. bite SAVE CANCEL HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 39 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 2 SETTING THE START UP STRATEGY Cont Hot start Cold Start Hot start time Brown out time A Hot start uses data about the current application that the instrument automatically saves in case of power variation or failure Using this information which is preserved through any power loss the instrument can automatically restart the process at any time after normal power returns In the fields on the Start up Strategy page the following items need to be configured 1 Whether the process is to start automatically after a power loss 2 A maximum time period time out after the expiry of which a hot start is inappropriate Cold Start data is application data not just program data so its scope is much wider This depends upon the process under control If the process can tolerate only a short time without normal power before either the plant or the load requires manual attention then a short time out needs to be set If however the process is robust enough to regain normal processing conditions even after a lengthy power outage then a longer Hot Start time out may be set Actual times are process dependent but the general rule is that the process must not restart automatically beyond the time when it requires manual attention This sets an alarm when a power variation has pers
19. xu M Figure 4 5 1a Comms setup page HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 35 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 1 EDITING COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS Cont Cells with a yellow background are edited by pressing them Others with a white background are fixed not editable A blank cell shows that the parameter does not apply for the protocol selected for that port On 1 4VGA instruments a horizontal slide bar can be used to reveal the other ports The Option key must be used one or more times to display the SAVE CANCEL ETHERNET etc keys temporarily in place of the slidebar XGA instruments always display these keys SOFTWARE PARAMETER EDITING 1 Select the required parameter 2 Select or enter the new value from a pop up list or keyboard 3 Press the green Return key at the bottom of the pop up The new value is displayed 4 Either press the SAVE button to save the change or press the CANCEL key to abort the change PROTOCOLS AVAILABLE Notes 1 Ports in parentheses are not recommended for the associated protocol 2 COM1 COM2 ports are always EIA485 3 protocols use 8 data bits 4 The Node Number where presented must be non zero to enable the port PROTOCOL PORT NOTES ELIN ENET1 Used to connect a Local Instrument network LIN across Ethernet FTP ENET2 Used to provide an FTP server 1 COM2 COM COM2 COM1
20. pnl diag elindiAg loop5 1 mod5 04 alh diag Spp tri To display further Function Blocks touch and drag slider or press arrow key amc diag Spppig db diag 2401 4 5 1 SPP RAMP y ResetSP 17715 00 degc HL_SP 950000 degc LL SP 0 000 degC Track FALSE x If the list is too long E FALSE to fit the page a PV 15 23 degC vertical slider and aater x pair of arrow keys Iu ew A appear at the right 5 eg NewTGCSP hand edge of the NewRate degC screen Sync Complete Active NotActiv Holdback Hold HB_Mode Use Up arrow to return to FB Manager page o o Ss RB onun Figure 4 3 8b Function Block Manager Pages Chapter 4 029280 4 24 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 8 FUNCTION BLOCK MANAGER Cont With the data base stopped the options bar at the bottom of the display contains the keys CREATE SAVE and NETWORK Note For small frame units the option key toggles the option bar and the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen 10 lin_dext 2500 5 mod5 01 ise diag edb diag ramp5 1 mod5 02 R Option key ddr diag edbtable ramp5 2 mod5 03 pnl_diag elin
21. SLIPS Password ees Directory eM SAVE Fi 5 Fe F F11 F2 15 F16 17 18 F9 F20 F21 F22 F23 24 F25 F26 F27 Figure 4 2 2 Archive FTP servers configuration page Revision Information appears only if the Auditor Option is enabled Single Copy If TRUE then single copy mode is used otherwise multiple copy mode is used For each remote computer server Host Address of the remote computer which is running the FTP server Enabled If set FALSE then this server is not in use User Name user name to be used when logging in to the remote computer Password The password to be used when logging in to the remote computer this value is not displayed for security reasons Directory This is the directory folder on the remote computer where the files are to be stored For security reasons FTP servers normally only permit access to a limited area of their host computer by re mapping the directo ries It is the re mapped name that must be entered here NOTE if the name is longer than 40 characters then it must be spread across multiple lines The instrument must be power cycled to effect the changes Chapter 4 HA029280 4 18 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 MANAGING AN APPLICATION This section describes the stopping saving starting unloading loading running and deleting of applications us
22. 8 3 8 3 3 Quitting the VDU package amp CPU configuration mode 8 3 8 4 DATABASE CONFIGURATION 8 3 8AT MAKE itte et er nd ep oi m be HR e petet ette un 8 4 BLOCK OVERV EW ee tee teste pe t cere te ee eene dieci eventa 8 4 CONNECTION TYPES IN A CPU DATABASE 8 8 8 4 2 EN 8 8 9 4 3 DELETE md eI e 8 8 BAA INSPECT rt etre e Det ee aiu nu Rok rue deed 8 9 8 4 5 NETWORK Oen e E DRM 8 9 8 4 6 Utilities eR EDI RU es PEN 8 10 START STOP UTILITIES ert ee etii 8 10 A 8 10 tor Dr curet etes 8 10 FILE UTILITY reete ine ren emeret 8 11 8 47 ALARMS iet oe edt e n Hee Saepe sheen secede 8 11 8 4 8 ALARM LOG etti e n pire tte dt o ed Pe 8 11 8 4 8 EVENT LOG 5e b dee Debe a p ete elated ah 8 11 8 5 MODBUS CONFIGURATION 8 12 8 5 1 GW indek 8 12 8 5 2 eda 8 12 8 53 IINTERFAGE 8 13 829 4 SEIUP oet terret te eee tempe tei 8 13 SERIAL MASTER eee 8 13 SERIAL SLAVE iro iol RO A ee OBI a api ty 8 13 TOP MASTER ero 8 1
23. ADD RECIPE LINE If a spare line is available a new line can be added by pressing the ADD LINE button The Option key may need pressing one or more times in order to display this key Once added the RCP Recipe cell at the top left of the dis play can be pressed to change the name of the selected line Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 52 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 8 2 RECIPE EDITING Cont ADD A VARIABLE A new variable can be added by touching that cell in the left most RCP column which is immediately above the cell where the new variable is to appear A Properties Menu appears which allows the variable name and tag references to be entered Note variables are executed in top down order so the order in which variables appear can be important To add the first variable press the RCP cell then the INSERT key on the pop up menu The name and tag references of the variable can now be entered If applicable Capture and Monitor values can also be edited The verify field allows the user to define Verify as Yes No If set to No the variable is not checked during download to en sure that the value is correctly written No is used for example where a variable may reset itself or change Figure 4 8 2a shows a typical properties dialogue box
24. 5 R The Program Editor page appears showing the new duration for the seg Co Lc 2 to mamme to mesmo o S In 3 to meemo to meemO meum ment Note Neither an individual segment duration nor the total program duration may exceed 49 days 4 1 5 Inserting deleting segment INSERTING A NULL SEGMENT Notes 1 A null segment consists of a dwell of zero duration 2 Inserting or deleting segments can have a knock on effect on subsequent ramp to or ramp at rate segments because the setpoint value at the point when these segments start could change This could affect the duration of ramp at rate segments In the segment preceding the new segment s location press the segment name cell at the top of the column In the dialogue box in section 4 1 4 press the INS SEG key The New Segment window appears requesting an identifier for the new segment Press the Segment field yellowed SAMPLE A qwerty keyboard appears The procedure for entering the identifier for new segment is the same as that described in section 4 1 4 A When the required segment name for example 1a has been entered the Retu key operated qu up x fe Chapter 4 029280 Page 4 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 5 INSERTING DELETING SEGM
25. The Add Note window appears To enter the note press the yellowed field then key in a string of max 16 characters at the pop up keyboard followed by Enter Add Note This will add a note to the Alarm History List To abandon the note before completion press CANCEL Your note XN OK CANCEL When the message is compete press OK The note is added to the alarm history where it is displayed along with its time of entry HA029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 3 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 5 4 Alarm history archive The ARCHIVE facility permits the current alarm history to be saved in ASCII format to the USB memory stick Note In order to avoid the possibility of loss of logging data it is strongly recommended that archiving is performed with normal logging turned off ACK ALL 1 Inthe Alarms menu press ARCHIVE HISTORY SUMMARY LOG NOTE The Alarm Archive window appears ARCHIVE MESSAGES The File Name field shows the default of YYMMDDHH ALH which the instrument supplies automatically To change this name Alarm Archive press the field to get the keyboard display and enter a new name Archive to disk the alarm history The file extension is always ALH not editable File Name 99072009 ALH Date Format 2 To abandon the name before completion press CANCEL 3 When the correct name has been entere
26. Ramp name NNN L alie HH HB value Node Loop Working setpoint BS Ramp rate unit time _ RUNNING Pa 12 45 23 45 Seconds HOLD BACK Holdback 1 500 Timeunits Status indicators Holdback value Figure 3 6 2a Ramp faceplate Node Loop Shows the system address node number of the I O unit and the ramp number Process value Shows the last known process value associated with the ramp Working setpoint Shows the last known working setpoint value associated with the ramp Status indicators RUNNING Shows that the associated I O channel is being ramped Filled green when active otherwise unfilled with no text HELD When filled yellow this shows that the ramp demand is held to allow the process to catch up otherwise unfilled with no text HOLDBACK When filled yellow this shows that the holdback value has been exceeded otherwise unfilled with no text Ramp to value Shows the value to which the process variable is to ramp Ramp rate per unit time Shows how quickly the ramping is to take place in the time units defined seconds in this case Time units Shows the time units set for the ramp rate Holdback value The safe band associated with this ramp within which the process value may fall without triggering a holdback Chapter 3 029820 3 20 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 2 FUNCTION BLOCK FACEPLATES Cont PID FACEPLAT
27. Vertical bargraph Horizontal bargraph Down arrow Option key Vertical trend with point faceplates key Vertical trend full width without faceplates Horizontal trend with point faceplates Horizontal trend full width without faceplates v ONDARWNE Each of the above mentioned displays supplies a real time display of point data By using the option key then VIEW trend displays become trace history displays In such displays real time trending stops although it is still held in the database for later display and using various control sliders the history of the traces can be displayed at a selectable magnification 029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 21 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont FACEPLATE DISPLAY This display shows the contents of the group as what are called faceplates This particular display is fully described in the Overview section 3 6 1 above To scroll to the next display mode touch the down arrow key Ramp name Ramp name a Ramp name Ramp name Ramp name NUMERIC DISPLAY 4 PVi i 101 1 1 143 93 Figure 3 6 3b Numeric display mode VERTICAL BARGRAPH This mode shows the current point values as vertical bars with faceplates The height of each bar is proportional to the current value of its associated point Zero and full scale values appear to the left of th
28. across pins 7 and 8 ON left OFF right 4 3 2 1 Port 1 Port 2 pins 7 and 8 Serial communications Ethernet E 120 Ohm terminating ports connector 5 resistor fitted across Me terminating resistor pins 1 and 2 across pins 1 and 2 Figure 1 3 2 Table 1 3 2b Communications DIP switch settings Serial communications hardware configuration LED INDICATORS There are two LED indicators associated with the Serial Communications RJ45 connectors The yellow LED indicates when the unit is transmitting The green LED illuminates when 5 wire full duplex communications is selected see above HA029280 Chapter 1 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 1 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 3 3 ETHERNET 100 10 Base T Connector The pinout for the Ethernet RJ45 connector is as shown in figure 1 3 3 below The connector is located on the under side of the unit as shown in figure 1 2a and figure 1 2b above Note The LED indicators integral with the connector socket are not used in this application TxD TxD RxD Not used Not used RxD Not used RJ 45 plug View on underside D O N Not used Plug shroud wired to cable screen Figure 1 3 3 Ethernet ELIN connector pinout 1 3 4 USB Connector This connector may be used only for the connection of USB Bulk storage devices memory sticks The connector pinout is shown in figure 1 3 4 The connector is locate
29. eee 3 Fun tion Blocks supported 4 Appendix B OPTIONS UPDATE 2 2 B T Bal INTRODUCTION face othe case cfs e Re 1 B2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS UTILITY ACCESS 1 Appendix REFERENCE 2 0 T LET 1 C2 GLOSSARY eue eet ene id etn ds 2 24 m 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Contents Page 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left blank Contents 029280 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK SAFETY NOTES WARNING This unit is intended for use with low voltage dc supplies Connection of mains line supply voltages will not only damage the unit but may also cause an electrical shock hazard to be present at operator accessible surfaces WARNING The supply voltage connector has two OV pins commoned together by the circuit board backplane and two 24V nom pins which are also shorted together internally This allows easy daisy chaining of multiple units Two separate power supply units may not be connected as to do so may result in damage to the unit and or a potential fire or explosion hazard CAUTION Local lightning protection must be fitte
30. seem 3 7 FROM RAMP TO END STARTING 3 7 FROM RAMP TO COMPLETE INFINITE 3 7 TO RAMP FROM ANY OTHER TYPE 3 7 3 2 HOLDING AND ABORTING A PROGRAM 3 8 3 27 Holdinga program oen ee de 3 8 3 2 2 Aborting a program eee 3 8 3 3 MONITORING A PROGRAM 3 9 3 3 1 The monitor dert ope LER chews 3 9 3 3 2 The preplot ivan ges 3 10 STANDARD DISPLAY MODE ot Errores 3 10 REVIEW er egets tes tad verte Ree tee du eats eee seo 3 10 3 4 LOGGING DATA preteen teed ee puer adeo baee xg ete D 3 11 32421 Types OF files uit Meter a ode ee 3 11 3 11 Sate tees 3 11 3 4 2 e E Cx 3 11 TEXT ieri eH exte x 3 1 a ev IE 3 11 DAILY ge 3 1 SEQUENCE ngs ro re ee Dot et eer eaten e Tae 3 11 3 4 3 The Manage facility sss 3 12 ARCHIVE EXPORT 2 rcp tare orld eerte Mage quiere ote 3 12 3 44 Data Integrity i ecu e citt IR RUE 3 12 3 5 ALARMS MESSAGE RESPONSE
31. 1570 COMMS ITEM 16 Undefined 1571 COMMS ITEM 16 Fixed 1572 COMMS ITEM 16 DHCP 1573 COMMS ITEM 16 BootP 1574 COMMS ITEM 16 DHCP LL 1575 COMMS ITEM 16 BootP LL 1576 COMMS ITEM 16 Link Local 1580 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 IP Address 1581 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Subnet Mask 1582 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Default Gateway 1583 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Number of Nodes 1584 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Node 1585 COMMS SEPARATOR 2 1586 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 MAC Address 1587 COMMS DIALOG_TITLE 28 WARNING 1588 COMMS DIALOG_TEXT 80 The specified IP address mask combination may be invalid 1590 COMMS ITEM 16 None 1591 COMMS ITEM 16 RO 1592 COMMS ITEM 16 RW 1593 COMMS ITEM 16 All Chapter 5 029280 5 22 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1600 COMMS LEGEND 8 MODBUS_ 1601 COMMS LEGEND 8 TCP 1602 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 MODBUS_ 1603 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 TCP 1604 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 INSTRUMENT 1605 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 SLAVE ADDRESS 1606 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 HOST 1607 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 TCP PORT 1608 COMMS LEGEND 11 NEW 1609 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 New Slave 1610 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Instrument No 1611 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Slave Address 1612 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Host IP 1613 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 TCP Port No 1614 COMMS LEGEND 11 ADD 1615 COMMS LEGEND 11 TUNING 1616 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 Tuning Parameters 1617 COMMS LEGEND 11 DEFAULTS 1
32. 5 28 gt tae Dua dena 5 2 5 48 Text dictionary 5 27 5 63 Date format selection 4 42 Ethernet unisce eg ESSEN unu 4 37 Daylight saving iere s 4 41 Gorinectiorn desee tetas 1 8 DB Write ente e cR RETE 8 18 LED interpretation 2 2 A 3 Decimal 8 6 Event DP 4 19 4 23 EPE UEM 3 17 8 11 ede bien 8 8 Message Deleting Editing ar a 5 33 Files from 3 12 5 33 4 9 Priorities nido Ree 5 33 User DS uin cm ttd ceris 4 32 dauerte 5 29 Exporting application 4 47 Index 29280 Page 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK F Cont a es 2 3 Information 1 2 5 Faceplate display mode 3 22 ee ite dete 8 2 Field sets 8 17 Initial page declaration 5 45 RR e 8 6 Copy and delete 4 51 InrusTi current inc oe teile De EU teen 1 6 Filename specification
33. 5 9 1 REPORT FORMS Cont UYF FILE ENTRIES Cont Lin database variables Total number of characters Number of decimal places New Line Limit values Limit text System variables These variables consist of the block name the field name and if appropriate the sub field name When included in the UYF file these variables must be enclosed within square brack ets e g pid2 PV and must be followed by a colon then size information giving the number of characters to be displayed This gives the total number of characters including any decimal point to be displayed with leading zeros suppressed Values are right justified unless otherwise specified as described below in Formatting attributes If the total number of characters figure is followed by a full stop and a second number then this second number will be the number of decimal places For example and entry of 6 1 means that the number format is or an entry of 6 5 results in a format of xxxxx Causes the following items to appear on a new line For some types of printer a carriage return R may also be needed As shown in figure 5 9 1a it is possible for a status line to be printed out according to the value of the variable In the example given the entry PID1 pv gt 30 0 lt 90 0 Cold OK Hot means that if the value of PID1 is 30 0 or more but less than or equal to 90 0 the word OK is printed If the value is belo
34. SAVE the data as a different file SAVE AS START the application again SAVE SAVE AS and START are covered in the next section Note Any application data saved will not include the current setpoint program HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 21 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 4 Saving application data File RISE The application must be stopped before application data can be saved State STOPPED UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START Select SAVE File RISE Saving Saving starts confirmed by a Saving window File RISE DBF Please wait UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START To save the current application data under a different name select SAVE AS File RISE File RISE A SAVE AS window appears with a yellowed field into which another cANCEL file name can be entered if required not shown UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START To re start the application select START File RISE State RUNNING The Manager page reverts to its opening display reporting the cur rent application running You can also use START to start another application that you might have STOP loaded 4 3 5 Unloading an application File RISE The application must be stopped before it can be unloaded Ste SALIS Select UNLOAD UNLOAD
35. 296 INTERNAT BUTTON TEXT 12 CHANGE 300 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 English 301 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 French 302 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 German 303 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Italian 304 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Spanish 305 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 5 306 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 6 307 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 7 308 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 8 309 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 16 Portuguese 29280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 310 PANEL PAGE_TITLE 20 Panel Setup 311 PANEL LEGEND 11 PANEL 312 PANEL PARA 24 BACK LIGHT 313 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Brightness 314 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Saver brightness 315 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Timeout 316 PANEL PARA 24 PAGE TIMEOUTS 317 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Home 318 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Pop up 319 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Data Entry 320 PANEL ITEM_UNITS 9 minutes 321 PANEL ITEM_UNITS 9 seconds 322 PANEL ITEM 16 100 323 PANEL ITEM 16 90 324 PANEL ITEM 16 80 325 PANEL ITEM 16 70 326 PANEL ITEM 16 60 327 PANEL ITEM 16 50 328 PANEL ITEM 16 40 329 PANEL ITEM 16 30 330 PANEL ITEM 16 20 331 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 20 This item allows an access level timeout to be entered Section 4 5 5 3 If a non zero value is entered then the Access level will return to Locked whenever the time between screen presses is greater than the timeout period 332 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 16 SIZES 333 PANEL ITEM 16 St
36. 5 The unit will have to be power cycled before the changes are effective Bs F Software Option Chan Modbus Master YES Software Optl L2 Batch Manager Edit options as required Auditor No 3 Press CHANGE mp conc CANCEL Software Option Chan Contact your representative and a2 supply the information below Enter Phone in with the validation code you are given and MAC address and press VALIDATE Change code MAC Address 00 0A 8D 00 00 00 a3 Change Code 3154131968 Enter Validation Validation Code 0000000000 Code and press VALIDATE VALIDATE CANCEL Figure B2b Software Options Change pages Appendix B 029280 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK APPENDIX C REFERENCE C1 ASCII CODES The following table contains representations of the characters set UNICODE Latin 1 available on the unit Character Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Space 20 P 50 DO 21 Q 51 Al N DI 22 R 52 A2 D2 23 S 53 A3 D3 24 T 54 A4 D4 25 U 55 AS D5 amp 26 V 56 A6 D6 i 27 W 57 AT x D7 28 X 58 2 D8 29 Y 59 A9 U D9 2A Z 5A a AA U DA 2B 5B AB U DB 2C 5 U DC 2 5D AD Y DD 2 5 DE 2F E SF 2 AF B DF 0 30 60 BO a 0 1 31 a 61 Bl a El 2 32 b 62 2 B2 2 3 33 63 3 B3
37. Figure 6 2 2a shows the Signature Configuration page The administrator IDs in Revision Level are initially the IDs of the administrators who enabled the Electronic Signature feature Subsequently the IDs are those of the administra tors who signed authorized the previous Configuration Save Signature configuration Revision 1 10 04 06 10 31 25 ADMIN ADMIN2 Function SecumitysACcess SAVE Account Properties Account Maintenance User Password Change RETIRE DISABLE ENABLE REINSTATE DEPLOY SAVE CANCEL DEFAULTS Figure 6 2 2a Signature Configuration page ACCESS LEVELS As can be seen from figure 6 2 2a above a number of instrument features can have an access level assigned to them The possible access level definitions are as follows No Confirmation The instrument behaves as if electronic signatures are turned off Confirm only A dialogue box with OK and CANCEL buttons appears before the action is undertaken Signature A password entry by a user with Signature Permissions is required before the action is per formed Sign amp Authorise A password entry by a user with Signature Permission and a further entry by a user with authorization permission are required before the instrument will respond to the requested action Action Disabled This causes the relevant button caption to be greyed out thus becoming inaccessible to the user Thus the action may not be undert
38. Normal format means that the data is a simple 16 bit integer In BCD format the value is first limited to the range 0 to 9999 and then stored as four 4 bit nibbles in the register The units are stored in the low order nibble the tens in the second nibble the hundreds in the third and the thousands in the high order nibble BCD format allows the data to be used with certain devices such as displays NOTE Format is ignored in 32 bit registers Digital tables only This column indicates the number of bits contained in the associated field The default Width is 16 but it automatically updates when a parameter is allocated to the field Allocated field widths are read only but the width of an unallocated field can be specified by highlighting its Width value and entering a valid number in the range 1 to 16 normally 1 8 or 16 Note Width values cannot be edited if to do so would force an entry lower down the table to change its address Digital value This column allows selected values in the LIN database to be protected against being overwritten by values received across the serial link Highlight the required DB Write field and press lt Enter gt to see a menu of options Enable and Protect Select Protect to write protect the LIN database parameter or Enable to allow overwriting NOTE For a 32 bit register pair DB Write applies only to the first register The DB Write value of t
39. Not connected Figure 10 2 2 Profibus option pinout 10 3 FUNCTION BLOCKS 10 3 1 GWProfM CON Notes 1 field names except File Name and Alarms are unavailable in Configuration mode 2 More information is to be found in the Lin Blocks reference manual HA082375U003 Page 10 4 File Name An eight character string field containing the base file name of the GWF file to be loaded by this block The following rules must be adhered to or an alarm will be generated 1 The GWF file referenced by this field must have been created using the Comms configura tion tool 2 The GWF file must contain a reference to the currently loaded database file 3 No path is specified as it is assumed that the file exists on the default drive Reload A writable field that when set true forces the GW instance to be suspended whilst it is reloaded from the specified FileName The field auto resets to False once the reload is complete This can be used to effect a crude form of reconfiguration by replacing an entire GW instance GWIndex A read only 8 bit unsigned integer field that shows the current GW instance number between 1 and 3 MaxIndex A read only 8 bit field showing the maximum instance number for this instrument type 1 for Profibus Master TableCnt The number of GW tables being used by this block Port A representation of the port being used by this instance Address The node address of the Profibus Maste
40. RCP Amarillo Qs EkoFisk Methane 90 6724 90 6724 Nitrogen Properties 3 1284 Variable Name Carbon Dioxide 0 4676 Ethane Verify YES 4 5279 Propane 0 8280 Maier Tag references 0 0000 HydrogenSulphide Line 0 0000 PIETER CEEC 0 0000 Carbon Monoxide 0 0000 Oxygen 0 0000 i Butane DELETE INSERT 0 1037 n Butane 0 1563 i Pentane 0 0321 0 0321 0 0321 n Pentane 0 0443 0 0443 0 0443 n Hexane 0 0393 0 0393 0 0393 n Heptane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 n Octane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 n Nonane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 n Decane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 Helium 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 SAVE caPTu CAPTURE AS T jejeje 6 ep ej n gt e ria 5 em 53 EE E59 Figure 4 8 2a Properties dialogue box TAG REFERENCES Touching a variable in the RCP column calls the Properties menu This menu allows the variable name tag refer ences and verification setting to be edited RECIPE VALUE Touching a value in a recipe column allows a new value to be entered ADDING A RECIPE To add a new recipe select an existing recipe to act as a model and touch that recipe s name Select NEW from the dialogue box which appears The new recipe takes the values of the model and can be edited as required DELETING RECIPES Touch the recipe name at the top of the column then select DELETE from the pop up dialogue box HAO29280 Chap
41. SAVE SAVEAS START The screen might go blank for a few seconds while the application unloads When the unloading is complete the Appl n Manager page should look like this with three keys offering LOAD LD RUN and DELETE This is File RISE referred to as the bare panel A new LIN database can be cloned only when in this state At this point the choice must be made to load or load and run another ap a LOAD LD RUN DELETE plication or to delete an application Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 22 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 6 Loading or loading and running an application Before an application can be loaded any previously loaded application must have been stopped and unloaded APPLICATION SELECTION Press the File field Select the required application from the pick list and press the Return key The name is displayed in the File field APPLICATION LOADING If you select LOAD there is a short delay before the page shows the name of the application and its state IDLE If LD RUN is selected there is a short delay before the page shows the name of the application and its state RUNNING The same state can be achieved using LOAD then START 4 3 7 Deleting an application The application must be stopped and unloaded before it is deleted App n Manager File RISE State IDLE UNLOAD SAVE SA
42. TIME Current time string USER NAME Name of user curently logged on string Table 5 9 1b System variables Chapter 5 Page 5 52 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 9 1 REPORT FORMS Cont UYF FILE ENTRIES Cont FORMATTING ATTRIBUTES Any one letter from each of the following groups of formatting codes that are applicable to a particular variable can be appended 1 Enter C Lor R to format the associated value as centred left justified or right justified respectively Text defaults to Left justified L Numeric values default to right justified R Enter Z to include leading or trailing zeros For REAL variables enter S to display the value in scientific notation e g 1 23E 3 4 For INTEGER variables one of the following may be chosen X Display values in hexadecimal format using capital A to F pu ES x Display values in hexadecimal format using lower case a to f Y Display values in binary format For examples If the value of the block PID1 options is 42 then Pidl options 8YZ prints 42 as an 8 bit binary value with leading zeros 00101010 Pidl options 8XZ prints 42 as 00000024 and Pidl options 4xL prints 42 as 2a00 where 9 represents a space If the value of the block PID1 options is 42 0 then Pid1 options 8S prints 42 as 0004 2E1 where represents a space BARGRAPHS Simple bargraphs consisting of a horizontal line of asterisks can be in
43. VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 2 Program Editor Page access ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 1 Press the Menu key then PROGRAMMER OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING y e Programmer pus D Press Programmer key Eodem dg Press menu key Programmer menu appears 2 Press PROGRAMS File Name The Load Save Program page appears prompting you for the name of a file to Load or Save To edit a program it must first be loaded 3 Press the File Name field the question marks m Bue cuu On the left of the screen a pick list appears containing the programs Load Save program held by the instrument 22222299 4 Press the name of the program to be edited 5 Press the green Return key SAVEAS DELETE The Load Save program page displays the name of the selected pro 6 Press LOAD File Name SAMPLE If the program has components parameters which are not in the LIN database then an error message will appear and the program will not 1 LOAD SAVE SAVEAS DELETE load After a successful load the Programmer menu reappears 7 Press EDIT Programmer PROGRAMS SCHEDULE The Program Editor page appears showing the values of the setpoints
44. VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 6 2 ALARM HISTORY PAGE Cont The Alarm History page displays a list of alarm conditions and Events showing when they occurred and if appropri ate when they were cleared or acknowledged large frame XGA versions only Events and other items which are not clearable or which cannot be acknowledged display in the Clear and ACK columns The Alarm History record starts in the first instance from when the instrument is powered up for the first time There after it is preserved through any automatic restarts called hot starts see section 4 5 2 Setting the Start up strategy but the record is lost and a new one started whenever a new application database is loaded The instrument can retain and display a total of 500 alarms or Events Once these limits are exceeded the oldest item in each case is deleted when a new addition is made to the list TWO LINE DISPLAY Operation of the down arrow key toggles between single line and double line working Single line working is a de scribed above and as shown in figures 2 6 2a b When in two line working each alarm has a second line showing one or two User IDs For units without the Auditor option one ID is displayed in parenthesis and this ID is that of the user who was logged on at Event time figure 2 6 2c Alarm History TYPE ACTIVE Restart 04 04 12 Resumed Eycon 10 BrownOu Database Started Database Loaded Fred Figure 2 6
45. VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont Deploy Access Number of slave nodes 5 Slave nodes 3 9 14 17 103 Confirm Action DEPLOY Reason 07 Signed by Ident ADMIN Password eee Authorised by Ident Password xxix CANCEL Figure 6 1 31 Deploy confirmation page 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 6 Page 6 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 2 ELECTRONIC SIGNATURES 6 2 1 Enabling electronic signatures Note Once Electronic signatures have been enabled they can not subsequently be disabled As shipped electronic signatures are disabled The Enable signatures Signature Configuration page figure 6 2 1 appears on the first operation of the SIGN CONFIG key in the Administration menu The only choices are to quit the page by selecting another page using the menu key or Enable electronic signatures Administration NET AUDIT SIGN CONFIG e The ENABLE button may be used to turn on electronic signatures Once signatures have been turned on and saved they cannot be turned off again ENABLE Figure 6 2 1 Enable Signatures page When Enable is operated a dialogue box appears requiring two separate ADMIN passwords before the Signature Configuration page figure 6 2 2 appears Chapter 6 029280 Page 6 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 2 2 Signature Configuration
46. 3 Alarms and events recorded in log files 4 Printer if configured No Prefixes Notes 580 Original value in a block field change event 581 New value in a block field change event 582 Message acknowledge reason 583 Signature reason Auditor Option Only 584 Logged in user s name 585 Signature Auditor Option Only 586 Authorisation Auditor Option Only Chapter 5 29280 5 26 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 3 THE ERROR TEXT DICTIONARY The contents of the Error text dictionary on delivery are as follows No CODE TEXT El 8301 Bad template E2 8302 Bad block number E3 8303 No free blocks 4 8304 No free database memory 5 8305 Not allowed by block create E6 8306 In use E7 8307 Max length E8 8308 No spare databases E9 8309 Not enough memory E10 8320 Bad library file Ell 8321 Bad template in library E12 8322 Bad server E13 8323 Cannot create EDB entry E14 8324 Bad file version E15 8325 Bad template spec E16 8326 Unable to make block remote E17 8327 Bad parent E18 8328 Corrupt data in DBF file E19 8329 Corrupt block spec E20 832A Corrupt block data E21 832B Corrupt pool data E22 832C No free resources E23 832D Template not found E24 832E Template resource fault E25 8330 Cannot start E26 8331 Cannot stop E27 8332 Empty database E28 8333 Configurator in use E29 8340 DBF file write failed E30 8341 More than one RUN file found E31 8342 RUN fil
47. 7 in tabular form E toj E Each row represents one setpoint along a horizontal timebase marked RUN FROM B in segments Some of the rows are for analog setpoints and some are for digital ones Each column represents a segment and each segment is identified by a name or number shown at the top of the column Under the seg ment identifier is the time duration of the segment All the yellowed fields yield further information when pressed 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 4 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 3 Changing a setpoint CHANGING RAMP TYPE Generally there are up to six ways in which you can program the Visual Supervisor to control the value of a setpoint some may not be available on your instrument These methods are called Step sometimes called Set Dwell Ramp at Ramp to Servo to setpoint and Servo to process variable Step Value changes instantaneously Can be used in any segment Also called Set Dwell Value remains constant May be used in all segments except the first Ramp at Value increases at a constant specified rate May be used in all segments except the first Ramp to Value increases linearly to a specified value Notes 1 Ramp at and Ramp to cannot be mixed within the same segment If an attempt is made to change one of the SPs from one type to the other a message appears warning that all the other similar
48. No active alarm Black There was an active alarm which returned to its non active state before it was acknowledged Steady red There is an active alarm that has been acknowledged Flashing red There is an active alarm that has not been acknowledged For more details of alarms including acknowledgement see Section 3 5 Chapter 3 029820 3 18 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 1 OVERVIEW Cont Touch a faceplate to call its group display below Fill colour red black white defines alarm status for point Remote enabled green I O currently Ramp name being ramped w 8 888 Pp QO 8 82 Working setpoint Ramp hold Yellow ramp held Z P Out of range holdback Yellow heldback This group Group name Show last faceplates if any That group As Slide to show required faceplates 4 y ta Qe z Show next faceplates if any Ramp name Ramp name Figure 3 6 1b Typical area and group displays Note The vertical sliders push buttons appear only for 1 4VGA unit displays 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 3 3 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 2 Function block faceplates The following section shows typical function block faceplates called to the display by touching the relevant faceplate in the group display figure 3 6 1b above RAMP FACEPLATES
49. RFI SCADA Sequences Setpoint program SP Standard Interface Start up strategy USB User screen Radio frequency interference Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Sequences are programs that users may have written to deal with any particular events circumstances or requirements in the process under control A setpoint program is a strategy to control a number of process variables such as temperature pressure and valve apertures over a period that can range with the Visual Supervisor from less than a minute to more than seven weeks The Visual Supervisor Standard Interface is the name for the non customised version of the user interface for the instrument It s the default factory set interface with no customised features This defines the way in which the process under control recovers from a partial or total power loss The Engineer may select one of several start up strategies Universal Serial Bus High speed serial communications bus A user screen is a page or a set of linked pages for display on the Visual Supervisor created by a user 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Appendix C Page VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left blank Appendix C HA029280 Page C 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK INDEX Symbols A Cont 32 bit tegistet ode 8 18 APRON zi tinto tee fenem tes 4 20 Archiving A Alarm 3 16 Interva
50. Select a recipe line only if multiple lines are supported Select a recipe only if the file contains multiple recipes Select a recipe set ID only if multiple recipe sets are supported ACCESS OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER SYSTEM ALARMS RECIPE LOGGING HOME Figure 3 7 1a Main menu RECIPES EDIT Recipe STATUS MONITOR DOWNLOAD Figure 3 7 1b Recipe menu Load Save Recipe Id 22222292 File name 22222222 LOAD SAVE AS DELETE CREATE Once the required file has been selected operation of the load button will call the recipe menu figure 3 7 1b The recipe can now be loaded by operation of the DOWNLOAD key If however it is necessary to select a particular recipe line or if it is necessary to select one recipe from a number in the file the STATUS button should be operated to display the Recipe Status page Note The contents of the status page is context dependent so it is unlikely that it will contain exactly the same fields as shown in the figures below Chapter 3 Page 3 28 029820 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 7 DOWNLOADING RECIPES Cont Recipe Status SELECTING A RECIPE LINE Id SET 1 If more than one line is present in a recipe set it is possible File name RECIPES to select which is to be the current line to which the recipe is to be down loaded With the Recipe Status page dis Li
51. and displays the following data 1 The name of the program 2 program status e g Running 3 The estimated time or date of completion of the program 4 Thename of the segment currently running The pane is similar with the program in Hold state except that the Program pane is yellow and has the word HELD instead of RUNNING The program pane for the Held Back state is similar to the pane except that HELD BACK appears instead of HELD In Idle state the Program pane is white and displays the word IDLE and the time is displayed as 27 29 22 There is no current segment In Complete state the Program pane is pale blue with the word COMPLETE displayed In Error state the Program pane is red with the word ERROR for example provoked by a COMMS breakdown displayed 2 4 2 Programmer menu access With access granted the Programmer menu is called either by touching the Program Pane or by pressing the printed Menu key below the screen and then the PROGRAMMER key in the resulting Pop up menu HA029280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 2 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 5 THE PROGRAMMER MENU Broadly the Programmer menu combines the programming functions for the Engineer of editing programs with the operational functions for the Operator of loading scheduling running monitoring pausing and aborting programs With the display locked or with it unlocked but no p
52. 0 0000 Helium 0 0000 0 0000 SAVE CAPTURE CAPTURE AS pownoao E pen pe Fio er ea ria 5 rie e 218 Fig 20 222 rs F24 fas ee Figure 3 7 2 Recipe monitor page XGA version Note For 1 4VGA units the capture column is initially hidden the scroll bar below the table allowing it to be viewed This scroll bar and the SAVE CAPTURE keys shown above are toggled between by means of the options key Chapter 3 29820 3 30 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 8 BATCHES E ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 3 8 1 Batch loading 1 From the main menu select BATCH then select BATCHES OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER RECIPE BATCH LOGGING HOME Batch 2 Touch the ID or filename area Load Batch 3 Select the required item from the picklist which appears File Name 22222222 4 Operate the LOAD button Note For the Create function see section 3 8 8 below LOAD CREATE Batch Start File Name BATCH Batch Id 50462977 Order No KOrdercnumber Customer 2 cc Contact K ontact name SAVE AS START RESET 3 8 2 Recipe selection If applicable a specific recipe can be selected for loading from a pick list which appears if the Recipe field area is touched 3 8 3 Batch customising The Batch
53. 06 11 57 12 04 04 06 11 57 12 04 04 06 11 57 12 04 04 06 11 44 52 04 04 06 11 44 51 04 04 06 11 44 50 04 04 06 11 44 50 04 04 06 11 44 50 04 04 06 11 40 02 04 04 06 11 40 02 04 04 06 11 40 02 Er je TWO LINE DISPLAY ejej ejede ee cra en va me rs e Pe Figure 3 5 1b Alarm history display with option bar As described in section 2 6 2 above operating the down arrow key toggles between single line working e g as shown in figure 3 5 1 above and two line working where the second line is used to display the operator ID of the user who was logged on at the time of the alarm See figure 2 6 2c for an example FILTER KEYS ALL Displays all Alarms and Events ALARMS Displays only Alarms EVENTS Displays only Events AREA If an Alarm name is touched highlights yellow then pressing AREA causes only those alarms configured to be in the same Area as the highlighted alarm to be displayed GROUP As for ZAREA but for Group BLOCK As for AREA but for function block MSGS Displays only messages Chapter 3 3 14 029820 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 5 1 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Cont ACK KEY Pressing this key acknowledges after confirmation all current unacknowledged i e flashing alarms Touching an alarm name highlights yellow before pressing ACK causes just that alarm to be acknowledged ARCHIVE Allows the alarm history to be
54. 1172 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Verify 1173 RECIPE PARA 24 Tag References 1174 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 SP 1175 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Monitor 1176 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Capture 1180 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 New Recipe 1181 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 Capture New Recipe 1182 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 Delete Recipe 1183 RECIPE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Deleting 1184 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE 1185 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE AS 1186 RECIPE ITEM TITLE 16 File Name 1187 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Load Recipe File 1188 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 Recipe already loaded 1189 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 UNSAVED EDITS 1190 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 This operation will result in the loss of recipe edits which have not yet been saved 1191 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 Overwriting 1192 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Delete Variable 1193 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Properties 1194 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Insert Variable 1195 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 RECIPE FILE DELETE 1196 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 CREATE AS 1197 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 SELECT LINE 1198 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Capture Recipe 1199 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 Capturing 1200 BATCH LEGEND 11 BATCH 1201 BATCH MENU TITLE 16 Batch 1202 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 RESET 1203 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 IDLE 1204 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 STARTING 1205 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 RUNNING 1206 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 COMPLETE 1207 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 HOLDING 1208 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 HELD 1209 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 RESTARTING 1210 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 PAUSING 1211 BATCH BATCH STATE 12
55. 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 228 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 Ethernet 240 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 PORT 241 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Hardware 242 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Protocol 243 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Node No 244 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Baud 245 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Parity 246 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Data Bits 247 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Stop Bits 248 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Timeout 249 COMMS COMMS_ATTR 9 Talk Thru 251 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 None 253 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 TermCfg 254 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 Modbus S 255 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 Modbus M 261 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 NONE 262 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 EVEN 263 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 ODD 266 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 RS422 267 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 RS485 270 CLOCK PAGE_TITLE 20 Clock Setup 271 CLOCK LEGEND 11 CLOCK 272 CLOCK ITEM_TITLE 16 Date 273 CLOCK ITEM_TITLE 16 Time 274 CLOCK BUTTON_TEXT 12 SET 275 CLOCK BUTTON_TEXT 12 Hr 1 276 CLOCK BUTTON_TEXT 12 Hr 1 277 CLOCK INTRO 64 Clock configured as master 278 CLOCK INTRO 64 Clock configured as slave 280 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 SPP SFC 281 SYSSUM ITEM 8 SPP 282 SYSSUM ITEM 8 SFC 283 SYSSUM ITEM 8 DB 288 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 21 IPR Protection 289 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 Auditor 290 INTERNAT PAGE_TITLE 20 Internationalise 291 INTERNAT LEGEND 11 INTERNAT 292 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Language 293 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Date Format 294 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Time Format 295 INTERNAT ITEM TITLE 14 Duration Fmt
56. 2 6 Navigation tete trees 5 2 5 935 itin di ea ott pii eee 4 53 lle OMNE UAE 5 35 oe Parameter Dictionary 5 59 ied eset eerie ties 8 5 Downloading I M eer ap 3 27 e att ote Mees ac RM 8 6 5 55 MEI 8 6 Management 4 4 52 Parle cand ee ME M IN IUD M 8 14 0 1 44 3 29 Password Palio bd bu RE NEFAS 2 2 NR T 4 27 Reference 4 4444 4 32 S4 MES 6 5 rate 202 12 egistet ied eel 15 8 mienne 2 6 Remote Access 7 1 Index 29280 4 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK R Cont S Cont Remote device 2 8 11 System 2 5 2 6 4 20 4 35 Report Orms enano 5 50 Data Retire 6 4 CIONO 4 48 ISSUED 6 7 Importing exporting 4 48 Right K6y 2 3 A 6 2 Root page declaration 5 45 Summary Page G2 tees pex eee 2 4 RUN toss tent ees 2 8 Text FROM peice aie ev ied 2 8 Edig oh 5 3 Running multiple programs 3 2 New languag
57. 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 Select and enter the required baud rate Entering this item displays a menu of options None Odd and Even Select and enter the required parity Enter this item type in the required number of stop bits and press lt Enter gt to update the SETUP menu Only I or 2 stop bits are permitted Shown only if both Serial Interface is selected and the instrument supports software selection of 3 wire 5 wire operation Note This is not currently supported Enter a Time out value in the range 0 to 65 5 seconds In slave mode this parameter specifies a watchdog period for all tables That is if a table has not been accessed for Time out seconds the Online bit in the slave mode diagnostic register for that particular table resets to zero In master mode Time out specifies a maximum period between the end of a master s request for data to the start of the slave s response If this time is exceeded the Online bit in the master mode diagnostic register for the particular table concerned resets to zero Slave Operating Mode only Input an instrument number i e the address on the Modbus Serial link of the slave device being configured Slave addresses are in the range 01 to FF hexadecimal but note that for some equipment FF is invalid Chapter 8 Page 8 14 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 5 TABLES Shows the Tables List dependant on the MODE configuration To view the ta
58. 2c history display 1 4 VGA screen For units with the Auditor option a If the event did not need signing then one ID is displayed in parenthesis and this ID is that of the user who was logged on at Event time figure 2 6 2c b If the event was signed one ID is displayed and this ID is that of the user who signed for the action c Ifthe event was authorised two IDs are displayed the first left most ID is that of the user who signed for the action the second is that of the authoriser d Ifa text reason for the event is given when signing then this max 16 character text string also appears E G Database Loaded 04 04 12 35 New database Fred ADMIN ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Unacknowledged alarms are made evident by the flashing of the alarm pane and a flashing background in the alarm history page It is recommended that an alarm is acknowledged before any attempt is made to rectify the cause of the alarm Alarms are acknowledged by calling the Alarms menu box either by touching the alarm pane or by touching the menu key then the ALARMS key and operating the ACK key HA029280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 2 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 7 LOGGING PANE This area is displayed only on XGA versions of the instrument Touching this area calls the logging menu shown below The logging function allows data to be saved to internal archive as described in section 3 4 of this manual
59. 4 4 1 A EDITING A PROGRAM neret terret 4 1 4 12 T INTRODUCTION 4 1 CREATING A 4 1 EDITING A PROGRAM 4 1 4 1 2 Program Editor Page 4 3 4 1 3 Changing a 20 202 2 204 000 4 4 CHANGING RAMP 4 4 TERMINOLOGY 4 4 TO CHANGE THE TYPE OF RAMP 4 5 CHANGING SETPOINT VALUE 4 6 4 1 4 Changing a segment eere ee 4 7 CHANGING SEGMENT IDENTIFIER s 4 7 CHANGING SEGMENT DURATION eee 4 8 4 1 5 Inserting deleting segment 4 8 INSERTING NULL SEGMENT 2 4 8 DELETING A SEGMENT 4 9 4 1 6 Changing hold back properties 4 9 CHOOSING THE SETPOINT esse 4 10 CHANGING HOLD BACK MODE 4 10 CHANGING HOLDBACK VALUES 4 10 4 1 7 Changing program properties 4 11 CHANGING PROGRAM 4 11 CHANGING RATE 5 4 12 CHOOSING END OF RUN ACTION 4 12 CHANGING DEFAULT ITERATIONS
60. 5 defines the batch log interface as lt LOGROUP gt lt Filename gt lt Report gt e g BAT_LOG BATCH1 Id BAT REPT Where BAT LOG is the optional name of a LGROUP block for the batch log BATCH1 Id is an optional LIN database field whose text value is used as the first two characters of the filename is the optional name of a DR_REPRT block to be used to generate batch reports If batch report is to be generated then 3 reports are required in the UYF file 1 start 2 stop 3 abort The UYF must be the same name as the UYB e g if using SAMPLE UYB then the corre sponding UYF is SAMPLE UYF Line 6 Line 6 defines the recipe interface e g LINEI Where LINE is the name of BAT LINE block used to parameterise the batch If SAMPLE UYB is used then the corresponding recipe file will be SAMPLE UYR 5 14 2 Batch Phases For each phase of the batch a line is required of the form Name where Name is the name of the phase Chapter 5 HA029280 5 62 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 15 DATABASE CHANGE AUDIT TRAILING This facility allows for audit trailing of changes of values in the application This is independent of the other facilities which audit trail values in response to user interaction This facility is aimed at values that change without user inter action In order to configure this facility a file of lt database name gt UYA must be creat
61. 6 ADMINISTRATIVE FUNCTIONS Notes 1 Access to all functions described in his chapter require ADMIN privileges 2 The functions described in this chapter apply only to instruments fitted with the Auditor option The Administration menu is accessed by operating the menu key at the bottom right of the screen followed by opera tions of SYSTEM and ADMIN keys Administration NET AUDIT SIGN CONFIG 6 1 NETWORK AUDIT TRAIL This function allows the Audit trail i e alarm and event logs to be transmitted from the instrument the Provider to up to three E suite systems the Consumers Network Audit Trail is accessed from the Administration menu by op eration of the NET AUDIT key as depicted in figure 6 1 below Administration A SIGN CONFIG 3 5 20 Network Audit Trail Mode PROVIDER Destination node 1 LIN Node B NT Alarm active YES Alarm cleared pgg Alarm ack ed YES Cached alarms INO System event Block event YES Operator note YES Block value change YES Message active YES Message cleared YES Message ack ed YES Min alarm priority i Min event priority Destination node 2 LIN Node Disabled Destination node 3 LIN Node XJ Disabled SAVE CANCEL mj e ej epe e m n n ee en ma me f ne ns me e ne Figure 6 1 Network Audit trail access 029280 6 Iss
62. 6 Alarm event customisation using the dictionary 5 26 5 3 THE ERROR TEXT DICTIONARY 5 27 5 3 1 Editing error messages 5 28 5 3 2 Creating new language error 5 28 PROCEDURE ti LU bee MEESE 5 28 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY 5 29 5 4 1 Editing Event Messages 5 33 5 4 2 Creating new language event 2 4224 4 5 33 PROCEDURE eee dere E EE cuban 5 33 2 4 3 Event Priorities rede ne e Ce A E n 5 33 5 5 THE USER TEXT DICTIONARY 5 34 5 6 THE PROGRAMMER TEXT 5 34 9 7 PANEL NAVIGATION 5 35 5 7 1 The Panel Navigation 5 35 THEWERSIONIS Den EU 5 35 AUDITOR OPTION 5 2 ee 5 39 5 7 2 Editing the default pnl file 5 42 Contents HAO29280 Page 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section 5 733 REDE lala PANEL AGENT PANEL DRIVER DECLARATION HOME PAGE DECLARATION ROOT PAGE INITIAL PAGE DECLARATION
63. 7 1 3 Archive File Transfer If Review software or any other FTP client is used to transfer files from the internal archive to a PC then it is recom mended a That the user account attribute configuration includes FTP Yes and View Only Yes and b The access level for this account be set to Operator c The account is used only for this purpose 29280 Chapter 7 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 7 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 7 HA029280 7 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 8 THE CONTROL CONFIGURATOR This chapter describes the control configurator resident in the unit The main topics covered are Overview of the configurator Getting ready to run the configurator Running the configurator Database configuration Modbus Slave Gateway configuration OVERVIEW The resident control configurator allows a control strategy to be set up directly within a CPU as an alternative to downloading a configuration created in the LINtools package The configurator can also be used to load start stop and monitor databases and to perform various filing operations Note that with heavily loaded running databases the configurator may be significantly slowed down Configurations employ the standard LIN block structured approach The LIN Product Manual Part number HA082375U999 gives full details of the software function blocks available for st
64. 727 LOGGRP Column Titles Enable disable column titles in ASCII files 728 LOGGRP Date Format Format of date time in ASCII files 732 LOGGRP LOG NOW Log an ASCII sample now 777 EXPORT ALL Export from internal archive to removable medium 796 LOGAMAN EXPORT Export from internal archive to removable medium 805 CLONING EXPORT Export files from instrument 806 CLONING IMPORT Import files into instrument 940 FILE MGR COPY Copy a file 941 FILE MGR DELETE Delete a file Chapter 5 29280 5 24 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 5 PANEL CUSTOMISATION USING THE DICTIONARY Cont NO CONTEXT TEXT FUNCTION 1018 ACCESS USERS Change to multi user access 1108 RCP CAPTURE AS Capture live value to a new recipe 1102 RECIPE DOWNLOAD Download the recipe 1103 RECIPE ABORT Abort recipe download 1104 RECIPE LOAD Load a recipe file 1105 RECIPE SAVE Save as recipe file 1106 RECIPE SAVE AS Save recipe to new file 1107 RECIPE CAPTURE Capture live values to current recipe 1109 RECIPE NEW Create a new recipe 1110 RECIPE DELETE Delete a recipe or recipe file 1111 RCP ADD LINE Add a production line to a recipe file 1112 RECIPE DELETE Delete a recipe variable 1113 RECIPE INSERT Insert a recipe variable 1114 RCP CREATE Create a new recipe file 1115 RCP LINES Display list of production lines 1120 RECIPE RECIPES Menu button to call Recipes page 1122 RECIPE STATUS Menu button to call Status page 115
65. ACCESS With a valid password this pane is the gateway to the functions sets below that are needed to do the job SYSTEM is the gateway to the system functions of the instrument that is the instrument specific and application specific functions as opposed to the program specific functions ALARMS is the gateway to the alarm functions PROGRAMMER If configured this is the gateway to the programming Engineer functions of editing setpoint programs This key is also the gateway to the operational Operator functions of loading running pausing and aborting setpoint programs RECIPE If configured this allows access to the recipe monitoring and editing functions BATCH If configured this provides a means by which batches can be loaded started and monitored LOGGING If configured this is the gateway to the data logging functions OVERVIEW If configured this provides an overview of the function blocks in the database with informa tion about each HOME USER SCREENS If configured this returns you to the Home page The Home page may be a single page or it may be the root page of a user written hierarchy of pages If HOME USER SCREENS is not configured the System Summary page acts as a default Home page displayed after a timeout Of the two or three further levels in the hierarchy all are available to Engineers but only some are available to Opera tors and Commissioning Engineers This helps to improve usability by hiding those facil
66. AND THE OPENING DISPLAY 2 1 2 1 SSWUtCh ON ate 2 1 2 1 2 The standard interfaces nenoaie hte 2 1 MAIIN PAINE eter dett eere re ee te ege ete 2 2 PROGRAM PANE sti ees cease eate tage 2 2 ALARM PANE tetra tee ee eb e rr eret go 2 2 LOGGING tite e ra Cerita te ns 2 2 ACCESS PANE Sys nette rape dap eee teer tras 2 2 nno ou ctore eec ro aa 2 2 NAVIGATION KE YS eerte ted ET e Rte tant 2 3 USER DEFINED KEYS cde e tet tei e rompere tes 2 3 2 1 3 The opening display s 2 4 2 2 THE MAIN PANE es tet Ht ee t 2 5 2 2 1 Information display 2 5 2 2 2 I nformation entry rre pete p P EG bn EP ges 2 5 2 3 THE PORUP MENU REP ER 2 6 2 4 THE PROGRAM PANE 2 7 2 4 1 Displaying program status 2 7 WITH NO PROGRAM LOADED 22 2 7 WITH A PROGRAM IOADED ote bit rri tH E oun 2 7 2 4 2 Programmer menu access ssssss eee 2 7 2 5 THE PROGRAMMER MENU 2 8 2 6 TAE ALARM PANE s eto M eee tbe rer ere 2 9 2 6 1 Alarm state indication 2 9 ACTIVE MESSAGE DISPLAY Pt renes 2 10 2 6 2 Responding to
67. DELETE results in a warning and no action Stopping the database is described in the UTILITIES option described in section 8 4 6 Also a block cannot be deleted unless its input connections have been cleared Select DELETE from the main menu to display all the blocks in the control strategy in the same format as for the COPY option described in section 8 4 2 Select a block and press Enter The block and any connections from it are deleted and the main menu returns to the screen Chapter 8 HA029280 Page 8 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 4 INSPECT Allows blocks in the control strategy to be inspected and updated Select INSPECT from the main menu to display all the blocks in the control strategy in the same format as for the COPY and DELETE options already described Select a block and press lt Enter gt to display its overview page ready for monitoring updating Pressing lt Escape gt returns the INSPECT display where other blocks can be selected for inspection Press lt Escape gt again to return to the top level menu 8 4 5 NETWORK Allows block databases to be assigned names and node addresses on the LIN Local Instrument Network so that they can be configured as cached blocks and run in a remote instrument The cached block s Compound field in its overview page specifies the remote database name Note It is good practice when using cached blocks always to cache at leas
68. DR et eer s 4 28 4 4 2 Editing the 4 28 4 4 3 User ID system oiris nonet tete tora 4 30 CHANGING TO THE USER ID SYSTEM 4 30 USER ID MANAGEMENT 2 4 31 4 5 SETTING UP AND RE SETTING THE INSTRUMENT 4 35 4 5 1 Editing communications parameters 2 1 4 35 SOFTWARE PARAMETER EDITING sss 4 36 PROTOCOLS AVAILABLE en xr 4 36 TAIK TARU etuer e teret ees 4 36 ort eto Ete her eter ertt 4 37 MODBUS TCR vey sites tasche etre 4 38 4 5 2 Setting the start up strategy 4 39 HOT COLD START 222 4 39 START UP STRATEGY PAGE 4 39 CHANGING START UP VALUES 2 0 4 40 4 5 3 Resetting the Clock tette epe lie stable oes Pene es 4 4 CLOCK SETUP PAGE ACCESS oriec uiae tte 4 41 CHANGING DATE AND TIME 4 41 TIME CHANGING tbt ttp tcn ert iege 4 42 4 5 4 Changing language and date time formats 4 42 LANGUAGE ben T Ore tud i aee tee rusa 4 43 DATE FORMAT etico tpe HU E bt er P DARE Te nde 4 43 TIME FORMAT duane RE cascades 4 43 4 5 5 Setting up the panel display ss 4 44 ACCE
69. Error Text dictionary and Event messages are held in the Event Text dictionary These three dictionaries make up the system uyl file User screen and Programmer text dictionaries are initially empty for users to fill as required These two dictionaries make up the _user uyl file 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 1 1 THE DICTIONARIES Cont DICTIONARY NAME FILE NAME RECORD SYNTAX System text system uyl S lt N gt lt text gt Error text _system uyl E lt N gt lt text gt Event text _system uyl V lt N gt lt text gt User text _user uyl U lt N gt lt text gt Programmer text _user uyl P lt N gt lt text gt Writeable text _user uyl W lt N gt lt initial text gt Recipe texts Not applicable Not applicable Batch texts Not applicable Not applicable where lt N gt is the index number of the record section 5 2 2 File structure Customising an existing uyl or building a new one is done by editing the files on a PC using a standard text editor for example Windows Notepad and then cloning them into the Visual Supervisor by USB device 5 1 2 Panel navigation and database names Panel navigation section 5 7 describes how to change the layout the architecture of the Standard Interface A com pletely new architecture can be created if required Database names section 5 8 describes how to change the names of function blocks alarms and of items called enu merations w
70. Figure 1 3 1b Supply voltage connection examples Chapter 1 HA029280 1 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 3 2 EIA485 connections This pair of adjacent RJ45 connectors are located on the underside of the instrument as shown in figures 1 2a and 1 2b These connectors can be configured by means of a 4 gang DIP switch each as Master or Slave Further sec tions of the switches allow 120Q terminating resistors to be switched in and out of circuit The DIP switches are ac cessible by removing the access cover at the rear of the unit Table 1 3 2a shows the pinout for master and slave connections Figure 1 3 2 and table 1 3 2b show the switch details for the small frame unit large frame unit similar Note When using a EIA485 port to communicate with a printer the master or slave connection should be chosen according to the type of cable being used 5 wire 5 wire 3 Wire Master Slave _ Master Slave RxB TxB B RxA TxA A Common Common Common NC NC NC NC NC NC RJ 45 plug View on underside NC NC Table 1 3 2a Serial communication port pinout Caution BR2330 The user must be at the same electrical potential 7 as the instrument housing when accessing internal items such as batteries and switches Cover retaining e screw location Slave Master 5 wire 3 wire 120 Ohm terminating resistor fitted across No terminating resistor
71. Full Description page for the parameter Figure 8 4 1d shows an example FULL DESCRIPTION Field PV Block PID_1 Type PID Value 80 1 Real32 Input SIM 1 0P Figure 8 4 1d FULL DESCRIPTION page for parameter example Field Block Type Read only fields Value Read write Parameter value editable as for the Overview Real32 Read only Value type Real32 floating point number Input Read write Defines the source of any connection to the parameter from another block as Block Tagname Output Mnemonic A blank field means no connection To make or edit a connection type in the source block tagname and output mnemonic e g SIM 1 OP or SEQ DIGOUT BIT3 then press Enter Invalid data is beeped and is not accepted field is not case sensitive To delete a connection type space then press lt Enter gt NOTE See below for information and advice on types of database connections Parameter units Options menu fields Type in a value and press Enter All other related units in the database automatically copy the edited unit Pressing lt Enter gt with the field selected before starting to type accesses the parameter Full Description page as for the value field Press Enter to display a pop up menu of options for the field Figure 8 4 1e shows an example PID Mode in part of an overview page OVERVIEW Block PID 1 Type P
72. Functions Scan count Instr No Tick Rate This field selects the start address of the table on the Modbus network These values are the actual values used in the address field of the Modbus messages i e the protocol addresses Note PLCs differ in the correspondence between their register or bit addresses and the protocol addresses This field shows the number of registers or bits in a table It allows the size of register and digital tables to be changed from their default values of 64 registers or bits respectively to optimise the use of memory Diagnostic tables are fixed at 32 registers Master mode only This field allows the default Modbus function codes that can be used with a particular Modbus table type to be enabled or disabled Modbus function codes define the type of data exchange permitted between Master and Slave instruments via a particular table To disable a default function code highlight it with the mouse and press Enter to see a menu of and the default code number Selecting and entering disables that code for the table concerned Select the code number again to re enable it 1f required Master mode only This sets the maximum number of registers register table or bits digital table that can be read or written in a single Modbus transmission Scan count defaults to the same value as Count i e as the table size which results in the whole table being updated each polling cycle If Sca
73. GERMANY Limburg Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone 49 6431 2980 Fax 449 6431 298119 E mail info de eurotherm com HONG KONG amp CHINA Eurotherm Limited North Point Telephone 85 2 28733826 Fax 85 2 28700148 E mail info hk eurotherm com Guangzhou Office Telephone 86 20 8755 5099 Fax 86 20 8755 5831 E mail info cn eurotherm com Beijing Office Telephone 86 10 6567 8506 Fax 86 10 6567 8509 E mail info cn eurotherm com Shanghai Office Telephone 86 21 6145 1188 Fax 86 21 6145 1187 E mail info cn eurotherm com INDIA Chennai Eurotherm India Limited Telephone 9144 2496 1129 Fax 9144 2496 1831 E mail info in eurotherm com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone 353 1 4691800 Fax 353 1 4691300 E mail info ie eurotherm com ITALY Como Eurotherm S r l Telephone 39 031 975111 Fax 39 031 977512 E mail info it eurotherm com KOREA Seoul Eurotherm Korea Limited Telephone 82 31 2738507 Fax 82 31 2738508 E mail info kr eurotherm com NETHERLANDS Alphen a d Rijn Eurotherm B V Telephone 31 172 411752 Fax 31 172 417260 E mail info nl 9 eurotherm com NORWAY Oslo Eurotherm A S Telephone 47 67 592170 Fax 47 67 118301 E mail info no Q eurotherm com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z 0 0 Telephone 48 32 218 5100 Fax 48 32 217 7171 E mail eurotherm com SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm SA Tel
74. GROUP block to be associated with the batch or blank if none lt Message Filter gt is the optional name of block to be used to give the context for message to be associated with this batch this may the name of the BAT_CTRL block itself or a GROUP block containing the BAT_CTRL plus other blocks of interest lt User Item gt specifies a title and value to be displayed on the BATCH start screen The value may be edited prior to starting the batch Each user item is of the form lt Title gt lt Value gt lt Width gt lt Initial value gt lt Attributes gt where lt Title gt is a dictionary reference of the lt Dict gt lt Index gt e g U12 lt Value gt is either a writeable dictionary value e g W12 or else a LIN dB value e g PID SL lt Width gt is the number of characters wide to display the value lt Initial value gt optional is the text value to be used to initialise a writeable dictionary entry value For example U13 user dictionary entry 13 The value may only be another dictionary reference and must be applied at load lt Attributes gt optional Can have one of the following W Value must be written This implies that data entry must occur after load If the batch is not unloaded it may be run without re writing this value M Value must be modified from its initial value for W dictionary items only after load If the batch is not unloaded it may be run without re writing this value Line 5 Line
75. Green Green Recipe hH Recipe Recipe Recipe Brown Brown Brown H Brown Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe Purple Purple Purple Purple Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe Orange Orange Orange Orange Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe 52 54 52 FE 5 55 55 55 Oo Oo Oo Oo Red Pigment Yellow Pigment Blue Pigment Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Mixer 4 Orange Purple Brown Green paint paint paint paint Figure 3 7a Four paintmixer set Recipe set file name Recipe names red pigment d l blue pigment 0 0 50 0 35 0 yellow pigment 50 0 0 0 30 0 Variable Variable names values lll Mr Figure 3 7b Sample recipe edit page 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 3 Page 3 27 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 7 1 Download procedure Load a recipe file Qv Be 09 Download the recipe RECIPE SET SELECTION 1 From the main menu select RECIPE 2 From the resulting pop up menu select RECIPES 3 The Recipe Load Save page appears with the recipe set ID and name of any currently loaded recipe file or if none lines of question marks To select a new set or recipe file touch the ID or Filename area and select the required item from the picklist which then appears Alternatively the various available selections can be scrolled through using the left right arrow keys at the bottom of the display LOADING THE RECIPE
76. HA029820 Page 3 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 1 4 Segment skip Skipping a program segment causes the program to stop running its current segment and start running the next seg ment immediately Skip is initiated from the Programmer menu Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT HOLD ABORT SKIP Press SKIP key 3 1 4 1 SEGMENT TRANSITION CONSEQUENCES From dwell set or servo SP or PV to any other type These transitions are safe and provide a bumpless transition of SP from one segment to the next The program fin ishes early From ramp to set Not Bumpless The ramp is terminated early The resulting bump is larger or smaller than that programmed depend ing on the direction of the ramp compared with the SET From ramp to dwell Almost bumpless with the SP being servoed to the current working SP at time of Skip Usually results in a slight bump in the opposite sense to that of the preceding ramp From ramp to ramp 1 Same direction Same Rate The ramp continues to the new target SP at the same rate Combined duration is the same as if unskipped 2 Same direction Second Rate higher than the first At Skip the SP starts ramping at the new rate Overall duration is less 3 Same direction Second Rate lower than the first At Skip the SP starts ramping at the new rate Overall duration might be greater 4 Opposite directions At Skip the SP i
77. ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment duration 576 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment finish 577 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Start Time 578 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Finish Time 590 Audit ITEM 16 DYNAMIC 591 Audit ITEM 16 BURST 592 Audit ITEM 16 INITIAL 598 SIGN BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 599 SIGN BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 600 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Signature 601 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirmation 602 SIGN PARA 24 Authorised by 603 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Reason 604 SIGN PARA 24 Signed by 605 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Old Value 606 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 New Value 607 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Confirm Action 608 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Signature Rejected 609 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Action Result 700 LOGGING MENU_TITLE 16 Logging 701 LOGGING LEGEND 11 LOGGING 702 LOGGING LEGEND 11 MONITOR 704 LOGGING LEGEND 11 MANAGE 705 LOGGING LEGEND 11 GROUPS 706 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Logging Monitor 707 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Logging Groups 709 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Archive Manage 711 LOGGING ITEM TITLE 17 File Name 712 LOGGING ITEM TITLE 17 File Type 715 LOGGING BUTTON TEXT 12 MONITOR 717 LOGGING BUTTON TEXT 12 MANAGE 718 LOGGING BUTTON TEXT 12 GROUPS 720 LOGGRP MESSAGE 128 No logging groups configured 721 LOGGRP ITEM TITLE 17 Group Name 722 LOGGRP ITEM TITLE 17 Logging 723 LOGGRP ITEM TITLE 17 Archive Int Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 12 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 725 L
78. ITEM_TITLE 18 Mode 1451 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 ISOLATED 1452 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 PROVIDER 1453 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 CONSUMER 1459 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Revision 1460 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 DEPLOY 1461 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Deploy Access 1462 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Number of Slave Nodes 1463 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Slave Nodes 1464 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 CONFIG 1465 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Deploy Access Config 1466 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 CLEAR 1467 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 FILL 1468 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 SORT 1469 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Deploying 1470 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Node 1471 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Aborting 1480 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 REVISION 1481 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Revision Information 1482 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Revision 1483 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Revised On 1484 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Revised By 1485 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Authorised By 1486 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Reason 1487 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Bound to 1488 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Operational Changes 1500 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Signature Configuration 1501 SIGN LEGEND 11 SIG CONFIG 1502 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 18 Function 1503 SIGN BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 1504 SIGN BUTTON_TEXT 12 DEFAULTS 1505 SIGN MESSAGE 128 The ENABLE button may be used to turn on elec tronic signatures Once signatures have been turned on and saved they cannot be turned off again 1506 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 15 Revision 1510 SIGN SIG_LEVEL 16 No Confirmation 1511 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Confirm O
79. LED indicators Green Yellow 10 100 base T IEEE802 3 TCP IP FTP DHCP BootP ICMP CAT5 100 metres RJ45 IEEE802 3 Indicates a 100MB link Indicates Ethernet activity Modbus Jbus EIA422 485 Connectors Protocol Data rate Data format MODBUS data tables Table length max Memory allocated to tables Isolation Shielded RJ45 connectors MODBUS JBUS RTU master and slave Selectable between 1200 and 38 400 Baud 8 bits 1 or 2 stop bits selectable parity 64 configurable as registers or bits 200 registers or 999 bits 2000 bytes Functional Universal Serial Bus USB Version Devices supported Isolation 1 1 2 0 devices are compatible USB Bulk storage devices Memory Stick No signal isolation Profibus Safety Isolation BS EN61010 Number of slave devices Number of tables supported Baud rates supported Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 Any terminal to earth 50 Vdc or RMS 124 Max 83 with extended diagnostics Maximum 250 see table for maximum number per type 9 6kBaud 19 2kBaud 93 75kBaud 187 5kBaud 500kBaud 1 5MBaud 3 0MBaud 6 0MBaud 12 0MBaud Table No required Max per Max no of Type per slave master data items Cyclic input 124 Unlimited Cyclic output 124 Unlimited Extended diagnostics 124 Unlimited Acyclic 256 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Appendix 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK FUNCTION BLOCKS
80. Large frame unit mechanical installation 29280 Chapter 1 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 1 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Note Before carrying out any wiring please read the Safety Notes and warnings preceding this chapter 1 3 1 Supply voltage wiring The 24V dc supply voltage wiring is terminated at a four way connector located on the underside of the unit as shown in figure 1 2a or 1 2b The supply wiring should be terminated as shown in figures 1 3 1a and 1 3 1b below Note Pins 1 and 2 are internally connected together as are pins 3 and 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Voltage range 19 2 to 28 8 V dc 24V dc 20 Permissible ripple 1 V max Maximum power requirements at 24 V Small frame 20 Watts Large frame 24 Watts Inrush current 10A Internal fusing Not user replaceable Front of instrument Figure 1 3 1 a Supply voltage wiring view on underside of instrument 1 1 Process supervisor 1 1 Rear view Process supervisor 2 Rear view Process supervisor Rear view Disconnect device 24V 19 2 to 28 8V dc power supply unit 24V OV 19 2 to 28 8V dc power supply unit 24V OV 19 2 to 28 8V dc power supply unit supply Daisy chain unit wiring Disconnect Disconnect device device 1 Line Line supply supply Redundant supplies
81. No files have been transferred 1071 FB_MGR BUTTON TEXT 12 CREATE 1072 FB_MGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1073 FB_MGR BUTTON TEXT 12 SAVE 1074 FB_MGR ITEM 16 Unused 1080 FB_MGR DIALOGUE TITLE 28 Block Create 1081 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Category 1082 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Block Type 1083 FB_MGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Confirm Block Delete 1084 FB_MGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 NETWORK 1085 FB_MGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Network Set Up 1086 FB_MGR LEGEND 11 ADD EDB 1087 FB_MGR PAGE _TITLE 20 Add External Database 1088 FB_MGR ITEM 16 Page 1089 FB_MGR ITEM 16 lt local gt 1090 MSG PAGE_TITLE 20 Messages 1091 MSG LEGEND 11 MSG LIST Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 16 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1092 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 MESSAGES 1093 MSG MESSAGE 16 lt None gt 1100 RECIPE LEGEND 11 RECIPE 1101 RECIPE MENU_TITLE 16 Recipe 1102 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 DOWNLOAD 1103 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 1104 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 1105 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 1106 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 1107 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CAPTURE 1108 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CAPTURE AS 1109 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 NEW 1110 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1111 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 ADD LINE 1112 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1113 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 INSERT 1114 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CREATE 1115 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 LINES 1120 RECIPE LEGEND 11 RECIPES 1121 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Load
82. Page 2 14 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 8 1 GAINING ACCESS Cont USER ID ACCESS METHOD In order to gain access using this system a User Identity is entered instead of an access level before the password is entered User ID access level and password are all entered as described in section 4 4 3 To access the Security Access page either touch the logging pane XGA units only or touch the menu key then the ACCESS key as described above User ID and password then LOG ON Access Identity Password LOG ON Figure 2 8 1 Security access page XGA The user identity and password can now be entered by touching each yellow area in turn and using the resulting key board to enter the relevant character strings Once this has been completed the LOG ON key is operated If the instrument fails to respond with the relevant access level either the Identity or the Password has been incor rectly entered Note The character strings are case sensitive e g Identity Fred is different from identity FRED HAO29280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 2 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 2 HA029280 Page 2 16 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 3 OPERATION The tasks in this chapter all require at least the Operator level of access to the instrument The chapter consists of the
83. Select UTILITIES from the main menu to display the Utilities options shown in Figure 8 4 6 UTILITIES Select option gt START Start runtime system STOP Stop runtime system SAVE Save database LOAD Load database FILE File page CALIBRATE Calibrate IO Sites Figure 8 4 6 UTILITIES options menu START STOP UTILITIES Select START or STOP from the UTILITIES options menu and press lt Enter gt to start or stop the control program running in the local Controller Supervisor Note When a database is started in RAM it is automatically saved to the file in FLASH called filename DBF where filename is indicated in the filename RUN file It is then reloaded from FLASH to RAM and started SAVE UTILITY Names and saves a control program to a specified memory area Select SAVE from the UTILITIES options menu the default filename specification 10 0 is displayed The prefix E directs the save to the CPU s FLASH area this is the only available memory area To save a database to a remote instrument prefix the filename specification by the node address of the instrument separated by a double colon e g FC E Eycon 10 DBF Type in a new specification if needed then press Enter to execute the save After a short pause the CPU signals completion with the message Type a key to continue Typing any key returns the UTILITIES menu An invalid filename specification aborts the
84. Start to YES so that should power return before the end of the time out the instrument will attempt a Hot Start If the time out has expired the instrument makes a Cold Start Hot Start only A power loss or a brown out lasting long enough to trigger an automatic restart which returns to normal before the Hot Start time out causes the instrument to attempt a Hot Start If the power does not return to normal within the time out period a manual restart will be required as described in section 3 1 1 Running a program now Cold start only If a power loss or a brown out lasting long enough to trigger an automatic restart occurs then provided that power returns before the Hot start time out interval the instrument will do a Cold Start on power up Neither Hot start nor Cold start If both Hot start and Cold start are set to No the instrument will not re Press SYSTEM start automatically under any circumstances START UP STRATEGY PAGE eens Press menu key 3 1 Press the Menu key APPLN 2 SYSTEM from the pop up menu CLONING 3 Select SETUP 4 STARTUP 5 CLOCK Press STARTUP INTERNAT PANEL 4 Select STARTUP RESET Startup Strategy Hot Start YES Cold Start YES Hot start time 0 00 00 00 05 00 The Start up Strategy page appears
85. System text dictionary is held in the _system uyl file In the print out of this file in section 5 2 4 1 Find the text to be replaced first find its Context then its Class then the Text itself 2 Note its reference number 3 Key in the reference number and then the new text related by the following syntax S lt N gt lt text gt where lt N gt is the reference number of the record you want to change lt text gt is the replacement text For example 12 Display error For any text item not replaced in the uyl file the version in the ROM file will be used 5 2 3 New language versions For each language a file called a _system lt n gt uyl file must be built using the same syntax as above The variable n in each file name specifies the particular national language by taking integer values from 0 up to a maximum of 9 one value for each language which is to be available The correspondence mapping between language and integer is decided by the user For example the file holding terms in English might be the file named systemO uyl with a typical record S2 FILE UPDATE 5 2 4 The dictionary On delivery of the Visual Supervisor the contents of the System text dictionary abridged are as set out below Notes 1 Items where is the final character always have a space after the for formatting purposes 2 Leading space characters are significant 3 Any printable character of the Unicode Latin 1 s
86. TIME POOR CHAR 1 120 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 121 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK ALL 122 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 123 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 124 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 SKIP 125 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 126 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 ERROR 127 GLOBAL SYSSUM_ITEM 8 lt NONE gt 128 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 NO 129 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 YES 130 SYSMENU MENU_TITLE 16 System 131 SYSMENU LEGEND 11 SYSTEM 132 SYSSUM PAGE_TITLE 20 System Summary 133 SYSSUM LEGEND 11 SUMMARY 134 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Instrument type 136 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Touch keypad 137 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Firmware HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 138 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Media 139 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Option cards 140 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 Eycon 10 or Eycon 20 according to model 141 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 Standard 145 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 kBytes 146 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 DRAM 147 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 SRAM 150 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 TOUCH 151 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 KEYPAD 154 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 MBytes 157 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 8 Internal Archive 158 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 IDE 159 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 USB Bulk 160 SYSSUM PARA 20 Software options 163 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 ETHERNET 166 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 Report 167 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 Recipe 168 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Reader 169 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Batc
87. That section also shows how to access the logging menu from the menu key MONITOR Figure 2 7 Logging menu 2 8 ACCESS PANE This area is displayed only on XGA versions of the instrument Touching this area calls the first of the access pages described in Gaining access below This is an alternative to using the menu key followed by ACCESS as described below 2 8 1 Gaining access There are two methods of gaining access to the instrument configuration the standard system and the User ID method The instrument is supplied with the standard access system in operation but it can be converted irrevers ibly to the User ID version as described in section 4 4 of this manual For units fitted with the Auditor option see also section 6 STANDARD ACCESS For the Visual Supervisor there are nominally three types of users Operators Commissioning Engineers and Engi neers Each of these three types has what is known as a level of access to the facilities of the instrument based upon the needs of the job and they gain access to that level by typing in a password The level of access is fixed for each type of user That is to say all Operators share the same password to their level of access all Commissioning Engineers share the same password to their level of access and all Engineers share the same password to their level of access The Engineer level password gives access to every facility in the instrument Only fro
88. alarms 2 10 DO NOTHING artt reset ene 2 10 ALARM HISTORY PAGE ete 2 10 TWO LINE DISPLAY rete ono Pe eet pe nd 2 11 ALARM 02 2 11 2 7 LOGGING PANE pe qo 2 12 2 8 ACCESS Mawes 2 12 2 8 Gaining d6cess ele OR eli tene HE OR 2 12 STANDARD ACCES Sorian ioe en br pen b ee eee eene 2 12 Contents HAO29280 Page 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page Chapter 3 OPERATION cccccsccccccccccscccccccccccccccccccscccccscccscccscee D 1 3 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM 3 1 2 11 R nning amp program ras 3 1 3 1 2 Running from a eee 3 3 3 1 3 Scheduling a program 3 4 3 1 3 1 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START DATE 3 5 3 1 3 2 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START 3 5 3 1 3 3 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF ITERATIONS RUNS 3 6 Segment sklp t tei teet rhe EP Dg eere Rund 3 7 3 1 4 1 SEGMENT TRANSITION CONSEQUENCES 3 7 FROM DWELL SET OR SERVO SP OR PV TO ANY OTHER TYPE 3 7 FROM RAMP TO SET ertet rte ee erede red de ener eae 3 7 FROM RAMP TO DWEL
89. and Signature Setup are also presented Dictionaries Dictionaries are items within Customisation see Chapter 5 of this manual User pages User pages also form part of Customisation Note If Access is selected the exported data must be imported into the destination unit within 60 minutes of export time IMPORTING SYSTEM DATA Imported config options apply on next power up dictionaries apply on next power up or on next change of prefer ences From the Cloning page select IMPORT The same page appears as for exporting shown above and the same expla nations apply Note An instrument may import access data only if it has been exported by the source unit within the previous 60 minutes Chapter 4 Page 4 48 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 6 4 Cloning both application and system data ALL From the Cloning page select ALL Thereafter the procedures are similar to those in sections 4 6 2 and 4 6 3 HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 49 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 7 FILE MANAGER The File Manager allows the copying of files between the internal Flash memory and a USB drive or another net worked instrument It also allows files to be deleted from the internal memory except from the H drive the inter nal archive As shown in the figures below any application must be stopped and unloaded before File Manager can be accessed 4 7 1 Sto
90. and display The Pop up menu The Program pane The Programmer menu The Alarm pane The Logging pane The Access pane 2 1 SWITCH ON AND THE OPENING DISPLAY 2 1 1 Switch on The Instrument is not fitted with a power switch so the switch on arrangements depend upon the particular installa tion After switch on the screen will remain blank for a few seconds before brightening then after approximately 15 seconds an opening display appears that fills most or all of the screen area Note The user interface is open to customisation either before operation or with the instrument taken out of service For example the opening page called the Home page can differ other pages can be changed and User pages User screens can be added The size of the panes can differ the legends on the buttons can differ and indeed the buttons need not exist at all In the extreme the entire architecture of the interface can differ Chapters 2 to 4 of this manual describe the system of menus and pages supplied by the manufacturer before any customisation by the user This menu system is called the Standard Interface Chapter 5 describes how to customise this Standard Interface if required 2 1 2 The standard interface The Standard Interface consists of a number of display panes and a group of Navigation keys as described below Figure 2 1 2a shows a small frame 1 4 VGA unit figure 2 1 2b a large frame XGA unit Th
91. and press DELETE in the resulting dialogue box To complete the process press OK in the confirmation dialogue box Notes 1 For units fitted with the Auditor option the DELETE key is named RETIRE See Chapter 6 for more details 2 Itis not possible to delete the current user Disabling user IDs To disable a user touch the required name in the Identity column and press DISABLE in the resulting dialogue box The Identity and name of the disabled user appear in red and the user will not be able to log on until the login has been re enabled To re enable the login touch the required name in the Identity column then re enter the password and confirm it The Identity and Name return to their previous blue colour Itis not possible to disable the current user Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 32 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 3 USER ID SYSTEM Cont New Users New users are entered using the NEW key at the bottom of the page first using the Option key to display it if nec essary The new identity and the password are entered as described in the example above The new information appears in green until the SAVE key is operated If necessary use the Option key to display the SAVE key Notes 1 For instruments fitted with the Auditor option it is not possible to create a new user with a previously retired ID See Section 6 for more details 2 Forinstruments fitted with the Aud
92. battery is approximately five years It is recommended that the BadBatt flag is set in the database header block to trigger an instrument alarm when the battery needs to be replaced The battery should be replaced as soon as possible after the appearance of this alarm Chapter 1 HA029280 Page 1 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION Note See also chapter 10 for installation details for units fitted with the Profibus option and chapter 11 for details of the Flush mounting option This chapter is intended for use by those responsible for the installation and commissioning of the instrument and consists of the following sections 1 1 Unpacking 1 2 Mechanical installation 1 3 Electrical installation 1 1 UNPACKING The unit is despatched in a special pack designed to protect it during transit If the outer box of the pack shows signs of damage please open it immediately and examine the instrument If there is evidence of damage contact the manufacturer s local representative for instructions Do not operate the instrument in the meantime If the outer box is not damaged remove the instrument from its packing with all accessories and documentation Once the unit has been installed store any internal packing with the external packing in case of future despatch 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 1 Check that the mounting panel is no thicker than 22mm typically for wood or plastic
93. been configured with an overview screen then the opening display will be that overview screen refer to section 3 6 The opening display of the Standard Interface is the System Summary page depicted in figure 2 1 3 below xxx No application loaded System Summary Touch keypad TOUCH Firmware V1 0 DRAM 64 MBytes SRAM 256 kBytes Internal Archive 45 MBytes Figure 2 1 3 System Summary page The System Summary page confirms the order options that were specified for this instrument Initially the opening display is Locked In this state the only interactive items are the Menu key and for the XGA version of the instrument only the ACCESS pane Operation of the menu key causes the opening Pop up menu of the Standard Interface to appear section 2 3 Operation of the ACCESS pane calls the Security access page as de scribed in section 2 8 of this manual This allows the display to be unlocked using an appropriate password or an ident Chapter 2 HA029280 Page 2 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 2 THE MAIN PANE The Main pane is the display area for collecting information from the user by means of keys menus pick lists dia logue boxes and windows and for displaying information to the user by means of dialogue boxes windows panes and pages 2 2 1 Information display The Standard Interface is a menu system whose structure is hierarchical like a family tree At the top is t
94. block Database configuration 8 4 Labelling symbols 1 1 Detail displays cde durent 4 27 Language selection 4 42 Display order eere Eee 4 26 EIS BUND eestor 4 19 4 23 2 1 iP ipe 3 20 LED indicators RJ45 ees 1 7 MM M DU M IAE 3 21 eft MORIR EO 2 3 Ramp cade eem 3 20 LIN Local Instrument 8 9 tenete ete tee ee 4 24 ee 6 2 4 1 9 4 00 0 5 48 8 14 8 16 BIST 8 3 iones 3 31 4 19 4 23 Utility eene erede eios 8 10 C 2 Load Save program Id 3 2 Group display Stet s e REL 3 18 Lockdown eee 4 28 GW 8 12 LOG ON zu bie ele a E 2 12 10 1 Logging 2 6 3 11 GWProfM CON 10 4 Configuration sss 4 16 Data groups nace er 4 15 H File type cite eden taki step etin o 4 16 BAS CHAI atem uut em orum es 8 7 Initiation 4 15 NUUAM 2 8 M C 215 Holdback
95. by the Master InSlvRes slave s response was not DP compatible ParamFlt The slave reported a parameter error MstLock slave is already communicating with another master stdDiag2 Byte 2 of the standard Profibus diagnostics for the slave defned in SlaveAdd above ParamReq Slave requires configuration StatDiag X Slave is signalling that the static diagnosis DPV1 slave application is not ready for data exchange DPSlave Profibus DP slave WdogOn Watchdog on FrzeMode slave is in Freeze mode SyncMode DP slave is Synchronising Reserve6 Not used at this release Deactive slave has been deactivated stdDiag3 Byte 3 of the standard Profibus diagnostics for the slave defned in SlaveAdd above ReserveO to Not used at this release Reserve6 ExDiagOv Too much extended diagnostic data MastAddr Byte 4 of the standard Profibus diagnostics for the slave defned in SlaveAdd above IdentNum Bytes 5 and 6 of the standard Profibus diagnostics for the slave defned in SlaveAdd above giving the Slave identification number 029280 Chapter 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 10 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 10 3 1 GWPROFM CON Cont Note In the following Slave Comms Error subfields if a bit is set true then the Slave is off line in an error condition When false a bit indicates that the relevant slave is on line and communicating ComsErr1 Slave comms error bits for slave address
96. could be an lt gt for each application If lt gt cannot be found the instrument searches for default pnl This is a generic version that works for all applications If default pnl cannot be found the instrument loads a firmware copy that can always be found in ROM The instru ment is shipped with these files and they are loss proof With no application loaded the system looks for a file called _system pnl known as the bare panel version see also Chapter 4 section 4 3 Managing an Application If this file cannot be found the corresponding version in ROM is used HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 35 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 1 THE PANEL NAVIGATION FILE Cont THE VERSIONS Cont Coding The Bare Panel version system pnl Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home Agent set up for user page 1 if this does not exist then it will default to the System Summary which has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the same Root Agent R1000 A1000 MENU 3 2010 4000 2210 2300 2130 2400 9012 1 A2010 SYS_SUM A2210 APP_MGR 4 0 SETUP submenu A2300 MENU 3 S398 S399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 A2040 COMMS 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 MAINTENANCE submenu A2400 MENU 4 3 S930 S93 1 2080 2140 2150 2160 A2080 CLONE 4 A2140 FILE_MGR 4 A2150 SOFT_OPT 4 A2160 BATCH_MA
97. despatched from the manufacturer Once logged in as ADMIN operation of the USERS key calls the Security Access Display page shown in figure 6 1 3a below Note For a more detailed description of how to access the ADMIN login see section 4 4 3 3 5 Eycon 20 Security access Attributes Expires Reference ADMIN ADMIN ADMIN 00000003 ADMIN2 ADMIN2 ADMIN 00000003 COMMISSI COMISSION COMMISSION 00000000 ENGINEER ENGINEER ENGINEER 00000003 OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR 00000000 richard LinManl ENGINEER 00000003 PROPERTIES MAINT REVISION Swf ala n n Bofe Eef en a me Figure 6 1 3a Security Access Page As can be seen from the figure the page is divided into a number of columns Name Access and Reference columns are all as described in section 4 4 3 above Other columns are used as follows HA029280 Chapter 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 6 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 USER ID CONTROL Cont IDENTITY Touching a users Identity calls the Identity pop up to appear figure 6 1 3b This allows a new password to be entered for the ID in the normal way The new password has a 24 hour expiry so the user has to login and provide a further new password within this time period The pop up also allows IDs to be Retired or Disabled richard Identit
98. each language to be made available The syntax of each record is U lt N gt text where N is the index number of the record lt text gt is the text The dictionary can hold a maximum of 200 records each consisting of up to 32 characters THE PROGRAMMER TEXT DICTIONARY The Programmer text dictionary holds user generated text items for display by the Setpoint Program Editor For more details refer to The Setpoint Program Editor Handbook part no HA261134U005 Entries are user text so the items when written are held in the User text dictionary _useruyl The syntax of each record is P lt N gt lt text gt where N is the index number of the record lt text gt is the text The dictionary can hold 200 records each up to 16 characters long Chapter 5 29280 5 34 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 PANEL NAVIGATION This describes how to access the menu system in order to perform a task and achieve an objective This section consists of The Panel Navigation file Section 5 7 1 The versions Coding The Bare Panel version system pnl Coding The Application Panel version default pnl Editing the default pnl file Section 5 7 2 3 Line types Section 5 7 3 Panel Agent declaration Panel Driver declaration Home Page declaration Root Page declaration Initial Page declaration 4 Agent types Section 5 7 4 The architecture of the Standard Interface is coded in th
99. etd reque 6 1 2 Configuration Provider CONSUMER SELECTION AUDIT TRAIL FILTERING PARAMETERS siete eO RR ORE Te 6 1 3 User ID 2 2 SECURITY ACCESS DISPLAY PAGE EXPIRES UE 6 2 1 Enabling electronic signatures 6 2 2 Signature Configuration ACCESS LEVELS SEDES OYO1 60 CO FO FOND lO N20 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Contents Page 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page Chapter 7 REMOTE ACCESS 0 27 1 PM 7 1 Zo Voll 7 1 TIME QUT eset uet 7 1 ZV 2 Filesystem ide e er een feel RE crgo 7 1 7 1 3 Archive File HG 7 1 Chapter 8 THE CONTROL CONFIGURATOR 8 T 8 1 OVERVIEW set Ee t ut Real SE Rs 8 1 8 2 PREPARATION rtc ere RET UU IE e qutt 8 1 8 2 1 Configurator mode selection 8 1 8 2 2 Control efficiency selection 8 1 8 3 RUNNING THE CONFIGURATOR 8 2 8 3 1 Initial menu access uice centre titre ipei ete ee eta 8 2 8 3 2 The Initial menu e oe o eec
100. file is longer than the one on the storage device but has the same initial data it will be exported to replace the existing file c Ifneither a nor b are true the user is prompted for a decision During export the screen is normally locked to the Archive Manage page Setting Page Locked to No causes normal screen navigation to be restored with the export continuing as a background task Once export is complete a message appears to tell the user that the memory device may be removed Any other export messages also appear at the user s current display page The user may return to the Archive manage page at any time Note The large frame unit displays an archiving in progress icon at the top of the screen The icon consists of a disk shape with an inward pointing arrow to the left The arrow and the upper central portion of the disk shape flash green during export m 3 4 4 Data integrity Although the Visual Supervisor is designed to maintain logged data in a secure manner in the event of sudden loss of power it is not always possible to guarantee that no data will be lost or that any data record currently being written will be complete Such problems will be minimised if logging is stopped prior to a controlled power down Logging can be stopped by turning logging off in LOGGING MONITOR or by using the STOP button in SYSTEM APPLN APP MGR Chapter 3 029820 3 12 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUP
101. g for carbon diffusion LOGIC AND4 4 input AND Boolean function COMPARE Indicates greater less than equal of two inputs COUNT UP DOWN pulse counter with START END count target LATCH D type flip flop function NOT NOT Boolean function OR4 4 input OR Boolean function PULSE Pulse output monostable function XOR4 4 input exclusive OR Boolean function MATHS ACTION Action control with use of stored variables and elapsed time ADD2 Adds two inputs DIGACT Action control with use of stored digital variables and elapsed time DIV2 Divides two inputs EXPR Free format maths expression with up to four inputs MUL2 Multiplies two inputs SUB2 Subtracts two inputs OPERATOR EVENT Act upon as audit trail event PNL_CMD Panel Command PNL_DLG Panel dialogue generation PNL_MSG Panel message generation PNL_ACC Access to panel system ORGANISE AREA Associates GROUP blocks into an AREA GROUP Associates display and recorder channels into a GROUP LOGDEV Specifies and controls access to an archive medium LGROUP Collects data from point blocks for archiving LOGGRPEX LGROUP extension block LPTDEV Printer device block PGROUP Printer Group RECORDING DR_ALARM Filters alarms and events DR_ANCHP Data recording analog channel point block DR_DGCHP Data recording digital channel point block DR_REPRT Report generator SELECTOR 2OF3 VOTE Selects best input from three averaging only the inputs in tolerance ALC Alarm collection producing a common logic O P SELECT Outputs the hi
102. in the format hh mm ss Schedule Program File Name Start Date Start Time Iterations Schedule Program Schedule Program 12 When time entry is complete and the confirmation bar shows the time in the correct format press the Return key File Name SAMPLE Start Date 04 04 06 Start Time 10 30 00 Iterations The keyboard disappears and the Schedule Program page now shows the specified time in the Start Time field 29280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 1 3 SCHEDULING A PROGRAM Cont 3 1 3 3 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF ITERATIONS RUNS Schedule Program 13 In the Iterations field press the 1 The numeric keyboard reappears 14 Key in the required number of runs and press the Return key To change the entered value the key and red cross key operate as described in step 8 If the program is to repeat continuously until further notice press 0 15 The Schedule Program page displays the specified number of itera tions File Name SAMPLES Start Date 04704706 Start Time 10 30 00 Iterations 0 Continuous ACCEPT The program is now scheduled Chapter 3
103. include FTP Yes The instrument allows up to four users to be logged in at any one time but only one of these may have write permis sion attribute View Only No This user s log on log off activity is recorded in the Event Log Users with View Only Yes do not have their log on log off activity recorded Notes 1 Any attempt to log into a non FTP account or into a nonexistent account will be recorded in the Event log 2 The mis typing of FTP passwords is included in the count of failed attempts to log in section 4 4 3 2 and therefore may result in the account being disqualified 3 Attempts to login to non FTP accounts are not included in the count of failed attempts to log in TIMEOUT FTP users are automatically logged out after 2 minutes of inactivity This happens regardless of any values for user timeout which have been set at the instrument user interface 7 1 2 File system The file system as viewed via FTP is seen as a simple set of folders with the characteristics shown in table 7 1 2 Notes 1 Itis not possible to access the USB bulk storage device via FTP 2 Itis not possible to create new folders via FTP FTP LIN Write ES Name device Description Permission Visibility app E Internal flash memory for application files Yes If IPRP not enabled Internal archive if fitted No If archive fitted Table 7 1 2 File system
104. only A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 Dialogue Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 Signature Agent A200000 SIGN 5 END OF FILE HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 39 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 1 THE PANEL NAVIGATION FILE Cont AUDITOR PACK VERSIONS Cont Coding Sample Application Panel version _default pnl SAMPLE APPLICATION PANEL SYSTEM Auditor Option fitted Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home page is first User Page or will default to Overview else System Summary as this has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the user screen 100 if present I100 Root Menu R1000 A1000 MENU 3 4000 2000 9000 1500 3000 7000 8000 5000 1 System Submenu A2000 MENU 3 S 130 S 13 1 2010 2200 2300 2080 2500 A2010 SYS_SUM A2080 CLONE 4 Application sub submenu A2200 MENU 3 S396 S397 2020 22 10 2230 A2020 APP_SUM 2210 4 0 A2230 FB_MGR 3 4 0 Setup sub submenu A2300 MENU 3 8398 S399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 2040 85 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 Continued Chapter 5 29280 5 40 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 1 THE PANEL NAVIGATION FILE Cont AUDITOR PACK VERSIONS Cont Admin A2500 MENU 5 3 S 1400 S 1401 2510 2520 A2510 NET_AUDIT 5 A2520 SIGN_CFG 5 Programmer A3000 SPP_MENU 2 3 3 3010 A3010 SPP 2 3 2 3000 1500 Se
105. only Minimum inter unit spacing 50 mm vertical or horizontal Note where multiple units are mounted in close proximity with one another steps must be taken to ensure that the resulting ambient temperature does not exceed the speci fied maximum operating temperature of 50 degrees Celsius Figure 1 2a Small frame unit mechanical installation Chapter 1 Page 1 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont 9 6 mm 288 0 mm m Profibus option Chapter 10 Fixing Clip one each side 9 288 0 mm Ll 280 3 mm fell gt neo in me ns me en n Protective conductor terminal M4 314 4 mm both 0 1 3mm fy Panel thickness Max 22 mm Min 2 mm Serial Ethernet Comms Power Flash card Em o Profibus option Chapter 10 281 4 mm E tej 298 4 mm Panel cutout 282 mm x 282 mm PANEL MOUNTING DETAILS Installed panel angle Vertical panels only Minimum inter unit spacing 50 mm vertical or horizontal Note where multiple units are mounted in close proximity with one another steps must be taken to ensure that the resulting ambient temperature does not exceed the speci fied maximum operating temperature of 50 degrees Celsius Figure 1 2b
106. page example Contain eight or sixteen binary digits showing the logic states of a corresponding set of up to eight or sixteen parameters To edit the bitfield directly type in a bit pattern then lt Enter gt it Alternatively press lt Enter gt to display a Full Description page listing the parameter TRUE FALSE or HIGH LOW states in the same format used for LINtools Specification Menu bitfields Figure 8 4 1g shows an example Alter a logic state by locating the cursor on the state typing in T rue or F alse and pressing lt Enter gt A bit may be read only FULL DESCRIPTION Field ModeAct Block PID 1 Type PID NotRem TRUE HoldAct FALSE TrackAct FALSE RemAct FALSE AutoAct TRUE ManAct FALSE FAutoAct FALSE FManAct FALSE Figure 8 4 1g FULL DESCRIPTION page for bitfield example To connect an input to a bitfield press the key and type the block name field name from which the connection is to be made Note See below for information and advice on types of database connections Two and four digit combined hexadecimal status fields Hex fields are marked with a gt sign and have the same format and significance as those found in LINtools specification menus The digits show the logic states of a corresponding set of parameters up to four per hex digit To edit the field directly type in new values then press lt Enter gt Alternatively
107. points in the group a slider control appears at the right side of the display to allow access to hidden points To return to the area display the up arrow key is pressed If a point faceplate is touched a close up of the faceplate appears giving further information about the point the nature of this extra information depending on the type of faceplate To return to the group display the up arrow key can be used To return to the area display the up arrow key can be used twice or the menu key can be pressed followed by Overview Note If only one group is configured the area page does not appear To access the area page the menu key is pressed followed by operation of the Overview key as shown in figure 3 6 1a Press menu key Figure 3 6 1a Access to area page Figure 3 6 1b shows typical area group and point displays A selection of typical point displays is given in section 3 6 2 below TREND DISPLAYS Operation of the down arrow key whilst in group display mode calls one of up to four trend displays Horizontal Vertical Full width horizontal Full width vertical In each case it is possible to enter review mode allowing histori cal data to be viewed Section 3 6 3 below gives more details ALARM INDICATION Alarm annunciators take a variety of forms and cover different groups of points or function blocks but all operate the same protocol as follows Indicator colour Definition Unfilled
108. save and the CPU sends an error message e g Save failed Invalid device Notes 1 Please refer to the note in section 8 4 6 about automatic saves 2 Modifications to a control database are carried out on the RAM image only not directly to the DBF file in FLASH They are copied to FLASH overwriting the existing DBF file automatically when the database is restarted or when a SAVE operation is carried out LOAD UTILITY Retrieves a control program from a specified memory area and loads it to the CPU RAM area Note that LOAD can not be performed during runtime Select LOAD from the UTILITIES options menu the default filename specifica tion E Eycon 10 DBF is displayed Edit the specification if needed to alter the filename or its source as described for the SAVE utility above then press Enter to execute the load After a short pause the CPU signals completion as described for the SAVE option Typing any key returns the UTILITIES menu An invalid filename specification aborts the load and the CPU sends an error message e g Load failed File not found To load a file from a remote node prefix the filename by the address of the remote node e g FC M FRED DBF or Eycon 20 DBF according to model Chapter 8 029280 8 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 6 UTILITIES Cont FILE UTILITY Permits access to the CPU file page allowing files to be deleted or copied
109. screen has been operated New slaves can be added by touching the NEW key and editing the values which appear in the resulting dialogue box Instrument This entry is the number which appears in the InstNo column in the GWF Modbus table Slave Address This value sometimes called the Modbus address is what the slave expects to see in any message sent to it Host The IP address of the relevant Slave Node TCP Port This is the port used for the connection The default 502 should be used unless the slave documenta tion advises otherwise Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 38 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 2 Setting the start up strategy Hot and Cold starts are ways of starting the instrument automatically after a power failure or after a power variation large enough to trigger an alarm a brown out The strategy is set by choosing Hot Start Cold Start or both and by choosing time out intervals for Hot Start and Brown Out HOT COLD START CRITERIA The type of start selected depends upon the process and upon the operational policy of the user For example some processes are so sensitive that a power loss of any duration will always mean that the process plant or the load or both will need manual attention before re starting In this case automatic restart either hot or cold would be inappro priate Hot start and Cold start selected The most common strategy is to set both the Hot Start and the Cold
110. section 4 4 above Access to User IDs and passwords etc requires ADMIN permissions The major points to note are as follows 1 It is not possible to edit a user s Identity Name Access Level or Attributes once the SAVE key has been pressed 2 Once a password has been allocated it can not be used again either by the original user or by a new user 3 A Password expiry period amongst other things can be set in the Properties menu Once this period has ex pired the relevant passwords will no longer be usable 4 Anew user s initial password has a 24 hour expiry period Within this time the user must log in and enter a new password Once this is done the new password will be allocated the expiry period set up in the Properties menu default 90 days 5 A Password must include one non alpha character i e it must have at least one character which is not one of A to Z or a to zZ 6 The password may not be the same as the User identity 7 The Delete key in the non audit pack instrument is replaced by Retire key When the Retire key is operated with a user selected that user s name is removed after confirmation from the security access page The details are however stored within the instrument to ensure that the same ID password etc cannot be used more than once SECURITY ACCESS DISPLAY PAGE This page is called by touching the ACCESS key from the root menu and entering the ADMIN Identity and Password both ADMIN when
111. the LOAD key LOAD SAMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 1 The full Programmer menu appears With no program running HOLD and ABORT are greyed out The Program pane reads IDLE on a white Programmer background showing the program is loaded but idling not running MONITOR ERUNT 8 Press RUN The Program pane changes to green with status RUNNING The ex pected time of completion and the number of the segment currently executing are also displayed The program is now running Chapter 3 029820 3 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 1 2 Running from a point Running a program from a point means running a new program from a user specified point after its start point The first seven steps are the same as in 3 1 1 Running a program now above 8 Press the RUN FROM key at bottom left The Run From page appears headed with the name of the program just loaded The Duration field shows how long the program will take to com plete The Run From field is waiting for a time into program value to be entered from which the program run is to be started Initially the Run From field is set at the default of 00 00 00 the start so under the Segment header below it the segment name is 1 the first The Time Through field shows at what time through the segment the program wi
112. the changes before saving them the CANCEL button is used Before any saved changes can take effect the application must be stopped and then restarted or the instrument must be powered off and on again Generally parameter changes such as baud rate require only a stop and restart of the application whereas hardware changes such as changing a Modbus master port to a slave port require a power down and up Press SYSTEM PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME 2 Press SETUP d CD mu Press menu key 3 Press COMMS 8 1 Press the Menu key and select SYSTEM from the Pop up menu CLONING Press SETUP Press COMMS sem Ce STARTUP COMMS CLOCK The Comms Setup page appears INTERNAT PANEL For each port COMI COMO ENET2 there is a column of parameters Hardware Protocol Mode No If necessary the vertical slidebar can be used to display more parameters hidden further down the page The full list is Hardware Standard for example RS485 Protocol for example Modbus Slave Node Number decimal Baud rate Parity Data bits number of If necessary use Parity Stop bits number of the option key to Ti t Modbus Master only in milliseconds bs indi 3 SAVE CANCEL ETHERNET TalkThru Modbus slave only LI Option key Comms Setup PORT ENET1 gt Hardware Ethernet Protocol Node No
113. time or date if the master clock is running Date changing From the Clock Setup page touch the date field A numeric keyboard is displayed allowing the correct date to be entered The cursor moves to the next digit after each character has been entered To cancel all the digits the ones at the top of the keyboard display but not the ones in the Clock Setup page in the background or in memory press the C key the digits change to question marks To cancel the whole time change operation and return to the Clock Setup page press the red cross key Once the correct date has been entered operate the Return key To save the entry and re set the date press the SET key 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 41 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 3 RESETTING THE CLOCK Cont TIME CHANGING RESET Before starting please see note 3 on the previous page miso 7 8 06702706 From the Clock Setup page press the time field 7 5 15 05 07 A keyboard is displayed with the current time displayed in green at the top 1 2 3 with a cursor flashing under the first hours digit 0 Hr 1 Hr 1 Type in the required time the cursor moves to the next character after each X C number is keyed in To cancel all the digits the ones at the top of the keyboard display but not the
114. tron dan it luce dana elec qe gu es 4 53 TAG REFERENCES 3 3 ere d tette tto e mettere heute nona 4 53 RECIPE VALUE sees ER eet ae 4 53 ADDING A RECIRE o oet geass on a o rei tete 4 53 rtt 4 53 SAVING RECIPES etse cer ere e eden neg a 4 54 RECIPE FILE PROPERTIES 13 22 cetera eer Pto reed 4 54 4 83 Capturing d Reclpe s c pr e eee ete ener 4 54 49 OEM FEATURE S eb ee euet uite 4 55 4 9 1 Intellectual Property Right Protection 4 55 MODIFYING IPRP SETTINGS ssssss 4 55 4 10 2 51d dete ette teen 4 56 Chapter 5 5 5 1 1 1 2 D 1 Se INTRODUCTIONS cise iade lenem 5 1 8 11 The dictionaries e 5 1 5 1 2 Panel navigation and database 5 2 5 2 THE SYSTEM TEXT DICTIONARY 00 5 2 5 2 File structure e EE reete utter eie eo rid 5 2 5 2 2 Editing s stem rtt cte tr 5 3 5 2 3 New language versions 5 3 5 2 4 The dictionary ecce tt ege e e read 5 3 5 2 5 Panel customisation using the dictionary 2 7 4 5 24 5 2
115. 0 RECIPE MONITOR Menu button to call Monitor page 1166 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE File name filter 1170 RECIPE EDIT Menu button to call Editor 1220 BATCH LOAD Menu button to call Load page 1230 BATCH LOAD Load a new batch batch can be loaded from strategy in blocks only if this is removed 1231 BATCH START Start a batch 1232 BATCH HOLD Put batch into hold 1233 BATCH RESTART Restart batch after putting into Hold 1234 BATCH ABORT Abort a running batch 1235 BATCH RESET Reset a batch 1236 BATCH NOTE Enter a batch note 1237 BATCH SAVE AS Save a batch that has been created 1238 BATCH CREATE Create a new batch file 1240 BATCH STATUS Menu button to call Status page The following items are empty by default If set they enable the additional features as described NO CONTEXT FUNCTION 788 LOGGRP Display the number of groups active out of total 1166 RECIPE File name filter HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 6 Alarm event customisation using the dictionary The following dictionary entries may be defined to add additional information into the alarm text In all cases the text if defined prefixes the another item If a space is required between the prefix and the item this must be included in the dictionary item when defined The text is used in the following contexts 1 Panel Event Log See section 3 5 6 2 Alarms and events recorded on trends See section 3 6 1
116. 05 amc_diag SppDig areal mod5 06 db_diag 2404 4 moduls 5 2500 6 41 Use down arrow key to re order display 2404 4 edb diag mod5 01 pnl_diag alh_diag elindiag mod5 02 ramp5 1 amc diag Eycon 10 mod5 03 ramp5 2 areal ise diag mod5 04 SppCtr1 ddr_diag 1lin_dext mod5 05 SppDig db_diag loop5 1 mod5 06 T2550 5 edbtable loop5 2 moduls 5 T2550 6 Figure 4 3 8d Alpha numeric Function block ordering Note For the sake of simplicity only those function blocks shown in figure 4 3 8b have been included in the above figure In reality function blocks hidden off screen in figure 4 3 8b would replace some of those shown above Chapter 4 029280 Page 4 26 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 8 FUNCTION BLOCK MANAGER Cont FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Ramp Dis FALSE V 1115 23 degc TgtSP 15 00 degc Once a function block has been highlighted touching the down arrow Be ut E ae key displays block details Block name Block type and update rate figure 4 3 8e Complete Active NotActiv 17707000 dege FALSE FALSE 00 00 00 Holdback 77 FALSE FALSE NONE 5 1 SPP_RAMP Block name 5 1 Block type SPP RAMP Update rate 1000 ms With the data base stopped the Delete key al
117. 280 11 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION General specification In order to comply fully with BS EN61010 all I O and hardware alarms must be enabled Physical 1 4 VGA Dimensions Bezel Cut out Depth Weight Screen Type Display area Touch panel Character set 144 x 144 mm 138 x 138 mm 87 7 mm 106 8 with Profibus option 1 5 kg 1 4 VGA TFT colour 111 x 84 mm Resistive analogue Unicode Latin 1 Physical XGA Dimensions Bezel 288 x 288 mm Cutout 282 x 282 mm Depth 70 4 mm 90 mm with Profibus option Weight 3 7 kg Screen Type XGA TFT colour Display area 245 188 mm Touch panel Resistive analogue Character set Unicode Latin 1 Environmental Temperature Storage 10 to 85 C Operation Oto 50 C Humidity Storage 5 to 95 RH non condensing Operation 5 to 85 RH non condensing RFI Emissions BS 50081 1 Susceptibility Electrical Safety Vibration Shock Protection Front panel BS EN50082 2 BS EN61010 1 2001 Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 BS EN60873 Section 9 18 BS EN60068 2 31 BS EN60873 Section 9 12 IP65 Power requirements Voltage range Ripple Max power requirement at 24V Operating current at 24V Inrush current User termination Internal fusing 19 2 to 28 8V dc 24V dc 20 1 V max Small frame 20 W Large frame 24 W Small f
118. 280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 1 3 Scheduling a program Scheduling a program means setting a time at which it will start to run automatically If another program is running at the scheduled start time the scheduled program will be delayed and started later The late start is recorded in the Alarm History 1 In the row of navigation keys at the bottom of the screen press the Menu key 2 Select PROGRAMMER from the pop up menu that appears With no program running the Programmer menu which appears has just two options PROGRAMS and SCHEDULE 3 Select SCHEDULE The Schedule Program page appears prompting for information about the program to be scheduled 4 Press the File Name field The left side of the screen shows a pick list of the programs that the in strument holds 5 Select the required program The background of the program name changes to yellow 6 Press the Return key the green arrow ACCESS ALARMS SYSTEM Press PROGRAMMER key 1 Press menu key Programmer SCHEDULE File Name 22222222 Start Date 22 22 27 Start Time 27777277 Iterations ACCEPT Schedule Program 22229292 22922992 dsample 22 22 22 STMAXALL ENMAXSEG 22 22 29 ENMAXSP B PT
119. 3 MX 8 13 9 5 5 TABLES V qup eheu equip isset qutt 8 15 TABLES HS T RI EE ERI NS DRITTEN 8 15 TABLE MENUS oo reote ort oS 8 17 Chapter 9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 9 1 9d BATTERY REPLACEMENT tee eo eibi 9 1 9 1 1 Replacement procedure 2 0 41 1 e 9 1 9 2 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 2 9 2 Chapter 10 PROFIBUS MASTER 10 T INTRODUCTION eet Dense e e toit ete tert te 10 1 10 2 INSTALLATIONS eere re eee e pee e pe 10 1 10 2 1 Mechanical installation e 10 1 10 2 2 Pinout 2 ce e dete Grec c dd dee 10 1 10 3 FUNCTION BLOCKS ite trier ei CH 10 4 10 3 1 GWProfM CON teen 10 4 Contents HAO29280 Page 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page Chapter 11 FLUSH MOUNTING OPTION INSTALLATION 11 1 er t eee ete 11 1 14 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION let dett 11 1 11 2 1 Specification eere ee ertt 11 2 Appendix A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 2 197 1 General specificati n 2 0 ni ded ec e er ete ahaa 1 Communications specification 9
120. 4 44 Server number 8 5 Display date oe Heo 4 44 S6IVOX0 ele airtel ates ME ed 4 4 Pop Up 4 44 Setpoint Title Dats tet dene einen 8 5 Edititig i inerte oen ies 4 4 Te eR 5 56 Trend SAVING erepta p ae ane 4 13 Displays ne dace hace ten 3 18 Setting and re setting passwords 4 28 3 24 3 26 4 35 8 13 Two line display Event 9 3 17 4 47 ites 8 15 Sign amp Authorise 6 11 of 8 5 Signature ice 6 11 Configuration 6 11 U CODy e cct cet tees iet c feme etus 4 18 LECHE octies ient anes 4 19 4 22 Slave connection 4 21 1 7 wae 1 3 11 1 8 15 Communications A 3 Up Key en Oats A NOME ES 2 3 2 1 10 1 Standard Update period 1 eon 8 5 ACCOSS ence aede REA 2 12 USBconnectore af er ASTU 1 8 Int rfaGe 2 1 2 5 User START eene 4 19 4 23 ie oe se 6 4 Start Stop u
121. 6 Names of recipes to 16 401 to 480 Names of recipe variable numbers 1 to 80 5 13 1 Example If B1001 is included in a form file section 5 9 then the file name is included in the report Chapter 5 029280 Page 5 60 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 14 BATCH FILES For instruments supporting Batch it is possible to create Batch files UYB on a PC using a text editor or spreadsheet that supports Comma separated variable CSV format files Each UYB file consists of 2 parts The first part is a 6 line header which describes in a fixed format the general information contained in the file The second part consists of a number of phases of the batch Notes No line may exceed 512 characters including line feed carriage return instructions Spaces are counted as characters Trailing commas will be treated as illegal unless otherwise stated Commas double quotes single quotes 9 and equals signs are all illegal in fields Non printing characters excluding CR and lt LF gt are not permitted anywhere in the file gt 5 14 1 File Header The format of the 6 line header is Line 1 Line 1 must contain UYB 1 only Line 2 Line 2 contains comma separated information about the current revision of the file e g 2 10 04 06 09 51 16 Fred Bloggs Where 2 is the revision level of the file 10 04 06 is the day month year that revision was carrie
122. 618 COMMS LEGEND 11 DELETE 1619 COMMS LEGEND 11 DEL ALL 1620 COMMS DIALOG_TITLE 20 Confirm Delete All 1621 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Host re Retry delay 1622 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Connect initial delay 1623 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Connect retry 1 delay 1624 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Connect retry 2 delay 1625 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Connect retry 3 delay 1626 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Reconnect retry delay 1627 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Reconnect num retries 1628 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Asy conn Poll tmeout 1629 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Async connect timeout 1680 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 16 MiniPCI Card 1681 SYSSUM ITEM 16 None 1682 SYSSUM ITEM 16 Profibus 1683 SYSSUM ITEM 16 Spare 1691 SYSSUM ITEM 16 L11 CARB_DIFFx1 1692 SYSSUM ITEM 16 L12 CARB_DIFFx2 1693 SYSSUM ITEM 16 L13 CARB_DIFFx3 1694 SYSSUM ITEM 16 L14 CARB_DIFFx4 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 5 Panel customisation using the dictionary It is possible to customise the standard panel interface by defining certain dictionary entries to be empty An empty TE dictionary entry takes the form S lt N gt in the uyl file Note the is the last character on the line it must not be followed by any other even a space character If any of the dictionary entries listed below is set to be empty then the corresponding function is removed from the standard interface Note do not define dictionary entries other tha
123. 84 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Free Time 785 LOGMON ITEM 8 ON 786 LOGMON ITEM 8 OFF 787 LOGMON ITEM 8 On Event 789 LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Files 796 LOGAMAN BUTTON_TEXT 12 EXPORT 797 LOGAMAN MESSAGE 128 Please wait 798 LOGAMAN ITEM_TITLE 16 File Size 799 LOGAMAN BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 5 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 800 CLONE PAGE_TITLE 20 Cloning 801 CLONE LEGEND 11 CLONING 802 CLONE ITEM 16 System 803 CLONE ITEM 16 Application 804 CLONE ITEM 16 ALL 805 CLONE BUTTON TEXT 12 EXPORT 806 CLONE BUTTON TEXT 12 IMPORT 807 CLONE INTRO 64 System Data 808 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Config Options 809 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Config Resources 810 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Dictionaries 811 CLONE ITEM TITLE 18 User Pages 812 CLONE INTRO 64 Application Data 813 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Control Database 814 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 SFCs 815 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Programs Recipes 816 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 User Pages 817 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Comms Profiles 818 CLONE BUTTON TEXT 12 CLEAR 819 CLONE BUTTON TEXT 12 DELETE 820 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Exporting 821 CLONE ITEM TITLE 22 Importing 822 CLONE MESSAGE 128 Aborting 823 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 Storage device not present Insert then select OK to continue 824 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 This file already exists Do you wish to overwrite it 825 CLON
124. 9 OEM FEATURES 4 9 1 Intellectual Property Right Protection IPRP The IPRP feature is provided to allow OEMs for example to prevent unauthorized copying of application files To determine if a feature is enabled view the software options page section 2 1 3 If IPRP is enabled 1 IR IE a Files on the E drive may not be copied from the instrument either to the USB memory stick if fitted or via network ELIN or FTP operations All files on the E drive may be modified using normal user interface operations New files may be added to the E drive but they may not be copied from the instrument Existing files may be overwritten by new files with the same name across a network Files are scrambled when cloned out of the instrument so clone files can be used only in the source instrument or in another instrument with the same IPRP password see below MODIFYING IPRP SETTINGS The procedure for modifying the IPRP settings is to create a text file to copy it to the E drive and then to power cycle the instrument The text file must be called OEM TXT and consists of a single line containing comma separated items as follows OEM 1 current password new password enable disable Where the items have the following definitions OEM Non variable text string 1 Non variable value Current password The current password As despatched from the factory this is _ _ If current password is entered incor
125. A082377U999 for more informa tion GATEWAY MODBUS configuration gt GWindex Select GW index MODE Operating mode INTERFACE Select interface SETUP Serial line TABLES Register amp bit configuration Figure 8 5 Gateway menu 8 5 1 GW index This command appears only for products which support multiple GW indices Select the GW index number 1 to 3 inclusive that is to be viewed by the configurator The filename where the GW index number was loaded appears in the filename field GWindex Select GW index GWindex 1 Filename Filename 8 5 2 MODE Selecting MODE causes a pop up menu to appear allowing the user to select Master or Slave mode The selected mode is arrowed MODE Operating mode Mode doleo F gt Slave Master Chapter 8 029280 8 12 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 3 INTERFACE Allows the interface type and instance of the instrument to be selected The Interface type should be selected as Serial or TCP Ip then the port number to which the Modbus instrument is to be connected should be entered INTERFACE Select interface Type Serial gt Serial COMI TCP IP 8 5 4 SETUP Configures the selected Interface Type and Interface Instance of the instrument defined in the INTERFACE menu Selecting SETUP displays a menu that is dependent on the INTERFACE and
126. A7000 RCP_MENU 2 3 3 7010 7010 2 3 2 7000 8000 MENU 2 3 8010 A8010 BATCH 2 3 2 8011 Alarms A9000 ALM MENU 2 3 9010 9011 9021 A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 9020 55 2 3 Dialog Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 END OF FILE Chapter 5 29280 5 38 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 1 THE PANEL NAVIGATION FILE Cont AUDITOR OPTION VERSIONS This sub section contains listing similar to those in 5 7 1 1 above but for instruments with the Auditor option fitted Coding The Bare Panel version system pnl SAMPLE BARE PANEL SYSTEM Auditor Option fitted Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home Agent set up for user page 1 if this does not exist then it will default to the System Summary which has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the same Il Root Agent R1000 A1000 MENU 3 2010 4000 2210 2300 2130 2400 2500 9012 1 A2010 SYS_SUM 2210 4 0 SETUP submenu A2300 MENU 3 S398 S399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 2040 85 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 MAINTENANCE submenu A2400 MENU 4 3 S930 S93 1 2080 2140 2150 2160 A2080 CLONE 4 A2140 FILE_MGR 4 A2150 SOFT_OPT 4 A2160 BATCH_MAINT 4 Admin submenu A2500 MENU 5 3 S 1400 S 1401 2510 2520 A2510 NET_AUDIT 5 A2520 SIGN CFG 5 AA4000 ACCESS Alarm History for event log
127. ARAMETERS Lin Mode UNINIT No attempt is currently being made to establish communications with the Consumer INIT Initialised but no communications have taken place as yet CONNECTED Initial communications have been established but no Audit Trail files are being transmitted ACTIVE The Audit Trail is being transferred to the Consumer Alarm active YES include active alarms Alarm Cleared YES include cleared alarms Alarm Ack ed YES include acknowledged alarms Cached Alarms No do not include cached alarms see note below System Event YES include system events Block events YES include block events Operator note YES include operator notes Block Value Change YES include events recording changes to block field values Message active YES z include active messages Message Cleared YES z include cleared messages Message Ack ed YES z include acknowledged messages Min alarm priority 1 to 15 Specifies minimum alarm priority for inclusion Min event priority 1 to 15 Specifies minimum event priority for inclusion Note Cached alarms is normally set to No to prevent cached blocks being sent to the consumer It is usual for the Consumer to have cached these blocks itself Chapter 6 29280 Page 6 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 User ID control The use of passwords and user IDs is more strictly controlled in an instrument fitted with the Auditor option than in instrument not so fitted
128. B2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS UTILITY ACCESS 1 If necessary stop and unload any application currently running and operate the SOFT OPS key in the MAINT menu 2 Press SYSTEM key File Colours 1 ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS State STOPPED Press menu key OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING SUMMARY APPLN 8 6 E gt _save saveas SIOR SETUP CLONING Press APPLN key Press UNLOAD Appl n Manager Application APP SUM APP MGR MGR 4 File 2222722 ACCESS APP MGR MAINT EVT LOG i File Colours LOAD ag DELETE State RUNNING 7 8 Press MAINT Press menu key Press APP MGR Maintenance STOP m 8 9 CLONING FILE MGR Press STOP Press SOFT OPS Figure B2a Access to the SOFT OPS key Continued 029280 Appendix Issue 5 Mar 08 Page B 1 VISUAL SUPERVSOR HANDBOOK B2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS UTILITY ACCESS Cont The first Software Option Change page appears 2 Modify the displayed options as required and press the Change key The second Software Option Change page appears Contact the supplier of the instrument with the MAC address and Change Code as presented on the screen The supplier will provide a Validation Code which must be entered and the Validate key pressed
129. Consumer selection eene 6 2 EMIGBO D DEBE aer 8 8 10 Gente EDIT oae 2 8 COnflgUr tOL rct cade cte prede eens 8 1 Editin Database i tian ees 4 47 g n Alarm 5 48 Selecting efficiency eee 8 1 Databases 8 5 blocks dette E 8 8 Error 5 28 aic teal HER petat eot d dois ipn 8 16 Event messages 5 33 Create Blocks sese 4 25 Function blocknames ose e ee n 5 48 JP 3 24 3 26 RR 4 52 Customisation of pred EIA485 1 7 5 1 Eleciicalimstallalion ote al ee denis 1 6 D Profibus Master 10 4 Electronic signatures 6 10 Daily ERIN 4 37 File names Rees 4 16 End actlOn iei pe 4 12 Files aoa enn etta i ete 3 11 Engineer level access 4 28 Data integrity 3 12 Enumerations cte 5 49 Database Error Name amp address 8 9 Message
130. Ctrl gt key and type the specified character Function Cursor Up Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Page Up Page Down Key combination lt Ctrl gt U lt Ctrl gt D lt Ctrl gt L Ctrl R lt Ctrl gt P lt Ctrl gt N Table 8 3 1 Cursor control equivalent key combinations Some tables allow values to be entered directly or to be called up by a menu For direct entry type the first character s of the chosen option followed by lt Enter gt Alternatively access the menu with lt Enter gt or lt Tab gt as the first character after the field is selected Chapter 8 Page 8 2 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 3 2 The Initial menu The Initial menu Figure 8 3 1 lists two options Database and Gateway Select Database to access the Main menu for configuring a LIN database This is described in section 8 4 Select Gateway to access the Gateway menu for setting up a Modbus configuration described in section 8 5 8 3 3 Quitting the VDU package amp CPU configuration mode The starting screen can be returned to at any time while running VDU package by operation of lt Ctrl gt lt E gt Typ ing lt A gt in the starting screen quits the VDU program Note this action does not quit configuration mode in the CPU itself Getting a CPU out of configuration mode must be done from the terminal Press Escape repeatedly until the main menu screen
131. E Invensys EUROTHERM Invensyse EUROTH ER Mo Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s name Eurotherm Limited Manufacturer s address Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL United Kingdom Product type Visual Supervisor Models Eycon 10 Status level A1 and above Eycon 20 Status level A1 and above Safety specification EN61010 1 2001 EMC emissions specification EN61326 1 1997 Class including amendments A1 A2 and A3 EMC immunity specification EN61326 1 1997 Industrial locations including amendments A1 A2 and A3 Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC and also with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Signed Lue sd Dated 304 2006 Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited William Davis General Manager 1A249986U700 Issue 2 Aug 06 CN22697 2008 Eurotherm Limited All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of cont
132. E DIALOG TEXT 80 Destination device is full 826 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 Error encountered when copying file 827 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 Destination file exists but source file does not Re move it 828 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 No RUN file found 829 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 Multiple RUN files found 839 CLONE DIALOG TEXT 80 Storage device corrupted Replace then select OK to continue 840 AGP PAGE TITLE 20 Overview 841 AGP LEGEND 11 OVERVIEW 842 AGP BUTTON TEXT 12 AUTO 843 AGP BUTTON TEXT 12 MANUAL 845 AGP BUTTON TEXT 8 VIEW 846 AGP BUTTON TEXT 8 LIVE 930 MAINTMEN MENU TITLE 16 Maintenance 93 MAINTMEN LEGEND 11 MAINT 932 FILEMGR PAGE TITLE 20 File Manager 933 FILEMGR LEGEND 11 FILE MGR 934 FILEMGR ITEM TITLE 16 Device 935 FILEMGR ITEM TITLE 16 Filter 936 FILEMGR ITEM TITLE 16 File 937 FILEMGR ITEM TITLE 16 Size 938 FILEMGR ITEM TITLE 16 Free Space 939 FILEMGR ITEM UNITS 9 Bytes Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 14 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 940 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 COPY 941 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 942 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Copy File 943 FILEMGR PARA 24 Copy To 944 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirm Delete 945 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment 946 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Node 947 FILEMGR ITEM UNITS 9 Local 948 FILEMGR MESSAGE 128 Remote file access Please wait 951 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Missing 952 A
133. ENTS Cont SAMPLE INSERTING A NULL SEGMENT Cont New Segment The New Segment window reappears displaying the name of the new ISegnent c segment j gy dh CANCEL This inserted segment will be a null operation until it has been modified A null operation consists of a dwell of zero duration Press OK aia The Program Editor page returns with new but empty segment inserted after the one which was being modified In order to view the whole setpoint sequence it might be necessary to scroll right or left using the scroll bar arrows at the bottom of the display The SAVE button is used to save the changes when completed If neces sary SAVE button is called to the display by pressing the option key located below the screen Option key DELETING A SEGMENT The procedure for deleting a segment is the same as that for inserting a segment except that 1 the DEL SEG key is used 2 the first segment of a program cannot be deleted the DEL SEG key is greyed out deactivated The setting is saved in the same way 4 1 6 Changing hold back properties Hold Back is a state that is automatically induced when the SP ramp rate is too fast for the process to be able to fol low it When the process has fallen behind the SP by an amount equal to a pre set holdback value then the SP ramp is stopped held until the PV ca
134. ERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 5 ALARMS MESSAGE RESPONSE Section 2 6 above describes the alarm pane and the way in which it is used by the instrument to annunciate alarm event and message occurrence The sections below describe the alarm history page and how to acknowledge alarms events and messages TIME REPRESENTATION If time synchronisation is configured then the date and time of a cached block are the date and time of alarm event occurrence at the originating block and are displayed as DD MM HH MM If it is not certain that the original block s instrument has its own clock synchronised then the date and time of detection of the alarm or event will be used and these are displayed as DD MM HH MM 3 5 1 Alarm history page To display the alarm history page either 1 2 Press the Alarm pane The Alarms menu appears The name of the current alarm condition is displayed in the Alarm pane 3 Press HISTORY The Alarm History page depicted in figure 3 5 1a below appears Indicates there are further alarm history pages accessible via arrow key s Displays younger history if any i Calls filter acknowledge and archive keys Press the Menu key below the screen then press ALARMS in the pop up menu or TREND Program Aborted TREND Loaded Run Prog Download PRINTER Config Amarillo Download Database Started 12550 7 Comms GASCONIC Load SFC CON2 Clear SFC_CON1 Clear TREND Load Eycon 20 BadBat Database Lo
135. ES Displays a process style faceplate for PID PID_LINK and PID_CONN function blocks Loop name Process value Local Setpoint Working Setpoint Output Ip Working Working Setpoint uH R A Mode select buttons Figure 3 6 2b PID faceplate Process value Shows the last known process value associated with the loop Working setpoint Shows the last known working setpoint value associated with the loop Local setpoint Shows the last known value for the local setpoint value associated with the loop Output percentage Shows the current percentage 0 to 100 of full scale of the output Mode Shows the current mode Auto Manual or Remote Alarm The alarm beacon is red if the block is in alarm The beacon is continuously red if the alarm has been acknowledged or flashes if unacknowledged Mode select These buttons allow the mode to be selected as R Remote A Auto or M Manual 3 6 3 Display modes Group data can be displayed in a number of formats as listed below When a group is touched in the area display section 3 6 1 above it will appear in the format last used Other modes are scrolled to by means of the down arrow key The display modes are described below in the order in which they appear after a power up This order is User screen if one has been set up not described here Faceplate display Numeric
136. For example First Loop Lp1 replaces the LIN database name Lp1 with the new name First Loop Note The maximum number of characters for block aliases is eight for the small frame 1 4 VGA unit and 16 for the large frame XGA unit 5 8 2 Alarm names These are displayed in the Alarm History page Syntax lt Alarm Alias gt lt Block Name gt Alarms lt Alarm Name gt where Alarm Alias is the replacement text and Alarm Name is the original LIN database name for the block For example Battery Root Alarms BadBat replaces the current name text BadBat with the new name text Bat tery Note The maximum number of characters for alarm aliases is seven for the small frame 1 4 VGA unit and 16 for the large frame XGA unit although only the first eight characters appear in the alarm pane see section 2 6 for alarm pane details Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 48 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 8 3 Enumerations Enumerations are nearly always Boolean two state variables such as TRUE FALSE and OPEN CLOSED They are displayed as part of the Programmer graphical facilities PREVIEW PREPLOT and EDIT and are also used in log ging files There are two types 1 Syntax Block Name Block Field lt Alias gt lt Alias gt For example digital Out OPEN CLOSED This replaces the existing enumerations in block field digital out with the new enumera
137. GP ITEM_TITLE 12 Wrong 953 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Unknown 954 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Comm Err 961 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Sensor Break 962 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 CJC Fail 963 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Not Used 964 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 OP Sat 965 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Init 966 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Inv Cal 968 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Mod Fail 970 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 AI2 971 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 DI4 972 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 DO4 973 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 AO2 974 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 AI3 975 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 018 976 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 977 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 AO4 978 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 DO8 979 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 980 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 DI6 990 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 XP 991 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 TI 992 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 TD 993 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 RCG 994 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 CBH 995 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 CBL 996 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 MR 997 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 Act 1000 AGP PAGE_TITLE 20 FB Manager 1001 AGP LEGEND 11 FB MGR 1002 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Block name 1003 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Block type 1004 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Cached from 1005 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 4 ms 1006 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Update rate 1007 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Update rate 1008 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Update rate 1009 FB_MGR ITEM 16 No connections 1010 ACCESS INTRO 64 User ID and password then LOG ON 1011 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Ident HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1012 ACCESS I
138. H MESSAGE 128 Bad block 1258 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Invalid dictionary reference 1259 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Incorrect password 1260 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Shared block reference s 1270 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 Batch Start Confirm 1271 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Please confirm starting of batch 1272 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Please confirm your password to start batch 1273 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Password 1280 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 BATCH NOTE 1281 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Add a batch note 1282 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Note 1285 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE AS 1286 BATCH DIALOG TEXT 80 Save batch file 1287 BATCH ITEM TITLE 16 Filename 1288 BATCH DIALOG TITLE 28 SAVE 1289 BATCH DIALOG TEXT 80 Overwriting 1290 BATCH DIALOG TITLE 28 CREATE AS 1292 BATCH ITEM TITLE 16 Recipe Line 1293 BATCH ITEM TITLE 16 Display Group 1294 BATCH ITEM TITLE 16 Message 1295 BATCH ITEM TITLE 16 Log Group 1296 BATCH ITEM TITLE 16 Log Report 1300 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 PROPERTIES 1301 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 20 Account properties 1302 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Min User Id Length 1303 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Min Password Length 1304 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Max Login Attempts 1305 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Password Expiry 1306 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 User Timeout HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1307 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Reducing password expiry period ma
139. ID Compound Mode Alarms Fallback gt HOLD TRACK HAA 100 0 Eng PV MANUAL g LAA 2 0 Eng SP AUTO g HDA 190 0 Eng OP REMOTE LDA 100 0 Eng SL MAN g TrimSP F AUTO 4 TimeBase Secs RemoteSP g XP 100 0 Track TI 2 200 TD 0 0002 Figure 8 4 1 Pop up options menu example Using the arrow keys move the cursor gt to a menu option and select it by pressing lt En ter gt Disabled options may not respond to selection A quicker alternative to accessing the pop up options menu is to type the required option or enough of its initial letters to uniquely specify it directly into the selected field and then press lt Enter gt E g entering just H selects HOLD entering F_M selects F MAN Forced Manual Chapter 8 Page 8 6 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 1 MAKE Cont Alarms field Bitfields Press lt Enter gt to display a 4 column Alarms page listing alarm name e g HighAbs acknowl edgement e g Unackd status e g Active and priority 0 to 15 Update the acknowledge ment or priority fields the only editable ones by typing in a value and pressing lt Enter gt Any single letter can be used for the acknowledgement field Figure 8 4 1f below shows an example Alarms page Alarms Block PID 1 Type PID Software Unackd Active 15 HighAbs Unackd Active 15 LowAbs HighDev Active 10 LowDev 2 Combined Unackd Active 15 Figure 8 4 1f Alarms
140. ID is initially chosen as unique by the instrument The name can be edited in the normal way In addition to the batch ID there can be up to six custom items in the example shown there are three viz Order No Customer and Contact Again these items are editable in the normal way The titles of these custom items e g Order No are set up using the customising techniques described in Chapter 5 below HAO29280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 31 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 8 4 Batch initiation Batch Start Confirm Please confirm starting of batch Once all the batch data has been entered operation of the START key causes one of the following to occur depending on the way in which the batch has been configured 1 The batch starts immediately 2 dialogue box appears asking for confirmation of Batch Start Opera tion of the OK button starts the batch 3 A dialogue box appears asking for the current user s password Entry of the password followed by operation of the OK button starts the batch OK CANCEL Batch Start Confirm Please confirm your password to start batch Password OK CANCEL 3 8 5 Batch monitoring The batch may be monitored from the Batch Status screen which is accessed from the main menu using the BATCH key then the STATUS key The batch status screen contains all the information present on the Batch Start screen but also incl
141. INT_4 Alarm history for event log only A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 A4000 ACCESS Dialogue Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 END OF FILE Continued Chapter 5 29280 5 36 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 1 THE PANEL NAVIGATION FILE Cont THE VERSIONS Cont Coding Sample Application Panel version _default pnl Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home page is first User Page or will default to Overview else System Summary as this has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the user screen 100 if present I100 Root Menu R1000 A1000 MENU 3 4000 2000 9000 1500 3000 7000 5000 1 System Submenu A2000 MENU 3 S 130 S 131 2010 2200 2300 2080 A2010 SYS_SUM A2080 CLONE 4 Application sub submenu A2200 MENU 3 S396 S 397 2020 22 10 2230 A2020 APP_SUM 2210 4 0 2230 3 4 0 Setup sub submenu A2300 MENU 3 8398 S 399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 A2040 COMMS 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 Programmer A3000 SPP MENU 2 3 3 3010 A3010 SPP 2 3 2 3000 1500 Continued HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 37 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 1 THE PANEL NAVIGATION FILE Cont THE VERSIONS Cont Security Access A4000 ACCESS Logging Submenu A5000 LOG MENU 2 3 5010 A5010 LOG 2 3 2 Area Group Point displays A1500 AGP 1 2 2 Recipe
142. IPTION page for block example Block Read write Block tagname Type Read only Block type Refresh rate Read only Time secs since the block was last scheduled to run Note that for a control block the PID algorithm is not necessarily recalculated every time the block is scheduled Server number Read only Compound Read write Name of the block s parameter database A blank field means the block database is local i e in the current Controller Supervisor Data base names and their LIN addresses are specified via the main menu NET WORK option described in section 8 4 5 Rate ms Rate is the minimum update period i e maximum rate at which an indi vidual cached block is transmitted across the Local Instrument Network LIN The default is 10ms minimum i e 100Hz maximum Rate can be set between 1015 and 64s Note that rate values are minimum update times only and heavily loaded networks may not be able to reach the faster update rates 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 8 8 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 1 Cont Parameter values Type in a value and press lt Enter gt to update the database Read only parameters do not accept new values The CPU automatically adds a following decimal point and padding zeros if needed but before a decimal point a zero must always be typed e g 0 5 not 5 Pressing lt Enter gt with the field selected before starting to type accesses a
143. ISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 11 FLUSH MOUNTING OPTION INSTALLATION Note This chapter gives details of the mechanical installation of the Flush mounting option Wiring details are as given in chapter and for the Profibus option chapter 10 11 1 UNPACKING The unit is despatched in a special pack designed to protect it during transit If the outer box of the pack shows signs of damage please open it immediately and examine the instrument If there is evidence of damage contact the manufacturer s local representative for instructions Do not operate the instrument in the meantime If the outer box is not damaged remove the instrument from its packing with all accessories and documentation Once the unit has been installed store any internal packing with the external packing in case of future despatch 11 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The clamping plates can be mounted either at the top and bottom of the Visual Supervisor or at left and right sides Figure 11 2c shows details of how to remove the clamping plates The plates are fixed to the rear of the panel see figures 11 2d 11 2e for fixing centres either by suitable screws into the rear of the panel or by means of studs or ma chine screws passing through the panel from the front A and B in figure 11 2a M5 studs or screws are recom mended the clamping plate fixing holes are 6mm in diameter 1 Check that the mounting panel is no thicker than 13mm and no thinn
144. ISPLAY MODES Cont HORIZONTAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE Cont Review mode The section describing Vertical trend with faceplate above gives full details of review mode The Cursor appears at the right hand edge of the screen for horizontal traces Moving this zoom slider down up increases decreases the amount of time base displayed Buttons have similar effect but provide step changes Zoom factor is shown below the display 1 1 7 Cursor initially at d right edge of screen Faceplate values are Use this pan slider or the those at the arrow keys to select that part of cursor time the time base to be viewed and date Left moves back in time 17 02 02 13 37 47 x2 Cursor date Cursor time Zoom factor Live key Figure 3 6 3 Trend review controls HORIZONTAL TREND FULL WIDTH Figure 3 6 3k Horizontal full width Chapter 3 029820 3 26 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 7 DOWNLOADING RECIPES A recipe set consists of sets of instructions recipes for controlling between one and eight identical production facili ties The examples below use paint mixers as an illustration of the four types of recipe available 1 simple recipe This file contains references to a single set of equipment and a single set of values to be ap plied to the equipment
145. MODE configurations SERIAL MASTER If Serial is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Master is specified in the MODE menu the SETUP menu shows Baud rate Parity Stop bits and Time out fields SERIAL SLAVE If Serial is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Slave is specified in the MODE menu the SETUP menu shows Baud rate Parity Stop bits Time out and Slave No fields Baud rate 2400 Parity Odd Stop bits 2 Instr No gt 63 Time out 1 000 secs TCP MASTER If TCP IP is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Master is specified in the MODE menu the SETUP menu shows only the Time out field TCP SLAVE If TCP IP is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Slave is specified in the MODE menu the SETUP menu will show the Port no Instr No Time out and CNOMO fields Note If the instrument supports CNOMO registers this field indicates that Register Offset values 121 to 124 will display specific Manufacturer and Product details 029280 Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 8 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 4 SETUP COMMAND Cont This page gives general information about the Interface configuration Port no Baud rate Parity Stop bits Line type Time out Instr No TCP IP Interface and Slave Operating Mode only It shows the TCP port via which this modbus TCP slave instance communicates 0 default 502 Highlight and enter this item to see a menu of the available baud rates 110 150 300 600 1200
146. MONIC ENTRY INVALID DESCRIPTION POINTS ACCESS 1 Security access AGP 1 B Overview displays ALM_HIST 2 B Alarm History Summary ALM_MENU 1 B Alarm Menu APP_SUM 1 B Application summary BAT_MENU 1 B Batch menu BATCH 2 See table 5 8 CLOCK 1 Real time clock maintenance CLONE 1 ISE cloning utilities COMMS 1 Communications setup DIALOG 1 Dialogue box manager FB_MGR 1 B Function Block Manager FILE_MGR 1 A File Manager INTERNAT 1 Internationalisation LOGGING 4 B Logging control and monitoring MENU 1 General purpose menu MESSAGE 2 B See table 5 8 NET_AUDIT 1 Network Audit Trail Configuration PANEL 1 Panel parameters e g brightness RCP_MENU 1 B Recipe menu RECIPE 4 B See table 5 8 RESOURCES 1 A System resources allocation SIGN 1 Electronic Signatures manager SOFT_OPT 1 A Software options SPP 7 B Setpoint Programmer SPP_MENU 1 B Setpoint Programmer Menu STARTUP 1 Startup strategy definition SYS_SUM 1 System summary Table 5 7 4a Agent types Chapter 5 29280 5 46 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 4 AGENT TYPES Cont The second column in Table 5 7 4a on the previous page shows that some agents have more than one entry point The parameter values to invoke the respective sub menus are as follows AGENT VALUE FACILITY ALM_HIST 0 Alarm history 1 Alarm summary 2 Event Log BATCH 0 Batch load start 1 Batch status LOGGING 0 Monitor 2 Archive Management 3 Groups 4 FTP MESSAGE 0 All message
147. Manager page to Loading an application or Loading and running should be referred to Application Summary and Function Block Manager provide useful summaries and overviews at any time HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 1 Application summary page Press SYSTEM This page displays the percentage of the instrument s various memory ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS resources that are currently in use Pec meni EHE Press the Menu key and select SYSTEM from the pop up menu e EEJ SUMMARY APPLN Select APPLN then APP SUM Press menu key SETUP CLONING Press APPLN Press APP SUM The Application Summary page appears showing Application ise 1 the name of the loaded application Beates KUNME 2 its state RUNNING IDLE or STOPPED Memory Usage Control DB 128 kB 76 3 data about memory usage um a SFC ST 112 kB 0 4 Programmer 92 kB 0 0 Modbus 20 kB 0 0 4 3 2 Application manager page Note If the Terminal Configurator is being used the Application Manager page will not be accessible Conversely if the Application Manager page is being used the Terminal Configurator will not be usable Press the Menu key and select SYSTEM from the pop up menu Press SYSTEM Select APPLN from the SYSTEM window to display the Application PROGRAMMER LOGGING a Q SUMMARY APPLN
148. OGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Name Type 726 LOGGRP PARA 24 Configuration 727 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Column Titles 728 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Date Format 731 LOGGRP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 732 LOGGRP BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOG NOW 741 LOGGING ITEM 13 ASCII 743 LOGGING ITEM 13 UHH 745 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Normal 746 LOGGRP ITEM 13 High 751 LOGGRP ITEM 13 ON 752 LOGGRP ITEM 13 OFF 753 LOGGRP ITEM 13 TRIGGER 755 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Text 758 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Sequence 756 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Hourly 757 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Daily 761 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Date Time 762 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Spreadsheet 763 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Integer 764 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Duration 765 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Days 766 LOGGRP ITEM 13 DHMS 767 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Present 768 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Absent TIO LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Files Exported 771 16 Files Skipped 772 16 Page Locked 773 DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Archive Manager Export 774 LOGAMAN DIALOG_TEXT 80 Complete Device may now be removed 7715 LOGAMAN DIALOG_TEXT 90 Do you wish to skip ALL duplicate files i e never overwrite files on the export device 776 DIALOG_TEXT 80 Export device is full Replace device and press OK to continue 777 LOGAMAN BUTTON_TEXT 12 EXPORT ALL 778 16 Export device 779 LOGGING ITEM_UNITS 9 Bytes 780 LOGGING ITEM_UNITS 9 KBytes 781 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Media Size 782 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Free Space 783 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Logging 7
149. ON_TEXT 12 START 392 APPMGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Confirm Delete 393 APPMGR MESSAGE 128 Application management is already in progress else where 394 APPMGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Saving 396 APPMENU MENU_TITLE 16 Application 397 APPMENU LEGEND 11 APPLN 398 SETMENU MENU_TITLE 16 Setup 399 SETMENU LEGEND 11 SETUP 400 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 RESET 401 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 LOADING 402 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 PRE_RUN 403 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 RUNNING 404 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 HELD 405 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 HELDBACK 406 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 COMPLETE 407 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 IDLE 408 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 POST_RUN 409 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 ERROR 410 SPP SPP_FP_VALUE 8 CLOSED 411 SPP SPP FP VALUE 8 OPEN 412 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Segment 413 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Setpoint 414 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Ramp at 415 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 to 416 SPP BUTTON TEXT 12 DONE 417 SPP PAGE TITLE 18 Current Program 418 SPP PARA 20 Program 419 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Name 420 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Status 421 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Duration 422 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Completion 423 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Iteration 424 SPP Special 1 425 SPP PARA 24 Segment 426 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Name 427 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Time Remaining 428 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 RUN 429 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 HOLD 430 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 431 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Save Program 432 SPP ITEM
150. P SPP_HOLDBACK 8 HIGH amp LOW 512 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Duration 513 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 INS SEG 514 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 DEL SEG 515 SPP PAGE TITLE 20 New Segment 516 SPP PAGE TITLE 20 Confirm Delete 517 SPP ITEM 16 Continuous 518 SPP MESSAGE 128 Building Display please wait 519 SPP ITEM TITLE 16 Type 520 SPP SPP CELL 8 Dwell 521 SPP SPP CELL 18 Step 522 SPP SPP CELL 18 Ramp 523 SPP SPP CELL 18 524 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Expressn 525 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Servo SP 526 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Servo PV 528 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Dwell 529 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Step 532 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Expressn 536 SPP ITEM_TITLE 20 At End 537 SPP SPP_AT_END 24 Indefinite Dwell 538 SPP SPP_AT_END 24 Starting Values 539 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Ref 540 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program Limits Exceeded HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 550 SPP ITEM_TITLE 20 Rate Units 551 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 Seconds 552 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 Minutes 553 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 Hours 554 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 days 555 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 No program loaded 561 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Id 562 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Common Block Refs 563 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Iterations 570 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SKIP 571 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 LAYOUT 572 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Editor layout 573 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Long SP names 574 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment start 575 SPP
151. PAUSED 1212 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 RESUMING 1213 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 STOPPING 1214 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 STOPPED 1215 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 ABORTING 1216 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 ABORTED 1217 BATCH BATCH STATE 12 FAILED 1220 BATCH LEGEND 11 BATCHES 1221 BATCH PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Batch 1222 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 1223 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Recipe Name 1224 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Id 1225 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 State Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 18 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1226 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Started At 1227 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Phase 1228 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Batch Id 1229 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Ended At 1230 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 1231 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 START 1232 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 HOLD 1233 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 RESTART 1234 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 1235 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 RESET 1236 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 NOTE 1237 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 1238 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 CREATE 1240 BATCH LEGEND 11 STATUS 1241 BATCH PAGE_TITLE 20 Batch Status 1245 BATCH PAGE_TITLE 20 Batch Start 1250 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 BATCH ERROR 1251 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Batch File not found 1252 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Batch File limits exceeded 1253 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Invalid block reference s 1254 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Incorrect batch state 1255 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Unrecognised file format 1256 BATCH MESSAGE 128 File write error 1257 BATC
152. PERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 1 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM NOW Cont The Load Save Program page appears prompting for a file name To the left of the page title is the current time and to the right is the current date Note Up to eight setpoint programs can be supported simultaneously Where more than one such program is running the load save screen TNT ri shown at the top of this page has an additional field Id This field can take the value 1 to 8 to identify which programmer is to run this program File Name 22277777 All display pages refer to the program associated with the currently selected Id For any particular programmer display page the identical page for other valid Ids can be scrolled through using the right and left arrow keys LOAD 4 Press the yellowed field of question marks On the left side of the screen a pick list vertical menu appears showing the programs that the instrument currently holds If necessary the scroll bar at the bottom of list can be used to reveal more Load Save program 5 Press the name of the required program The background of the selected program s name changes to yellow 6 Press the Return key the green arrow The pick list disappears and the Load Save Program page now shows the name of the selected program on a yellow background File Name SAMPLE 7 Press
153. Return key The dialogue box reappears this time showing the new value Press DONE The Program Editor page returns with the new value shown in the selected cell E To save the setting press the Option key below the screen and then the SAVE button Option key Chapter 4 029280 4 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 4 Changing a segment In the Program Editor page press the identifier at the top of the column of the segment to be modified For example segment 1 A dialogue box appears with two fields Segment and Duration and three buttons INS SEG DEL SEG and DONE The following subsections show how to change a segment s identifier and duration respectively Inserting and deleting segments is described in sec tion 4 1 5 Once the segment changes are complete the SAVE button is used to save the changes If necessary the SAVE button is called to the display by D pressing the option key located below the screen Option key CHANGING SEGMENT IDENTIFIER In the dialogue box press the Segment field A qwerty keyboard appears A numeric symbol keyboard can be called by pressing the up arrow key at bottom left A further operation of the arrow key calls a keyboard of accented lower case letters Pressing the up arrow key again re displays the original qwerty keyboard The segm
154. SS TO THE PANEL SETUP 4 44 DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS 4 44 ORI RM RUN RUMP eius 4 45 DATA ENTRY Nae 4 45 4 6 CLONING AN INSTRUMENT 4 46 4 6 1 Accessing the cloning 4 46 4 6 2 Cloning application data 4 47 EXPORTING APPLICATION DATA ss 4 47 IMPORTING APPLICATION 4 47 HA029280 Contents Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 4 6 3 Cloning system instrument data 4 48 SELECTING SYSTEM DATA 4 48 EXPORTING SYSTEM DATA 4 48 IMPORTING SYSTEM DATA 4 48 4 6 4 Cloning both application and system data ALL 4 49 4 7 FILE MANAGER eee oce Rete hd eed tte ED D pe Rl eade 4 50 4 7 1 Stopping the 4 50 4 7 2 Calling the file manager 4 50 47 3 File Copy and Delete 2 2 e mre 4 51 4 7 4 Reloading the application s 4 52 4 8 RECIPE MANAGEMENT 4 52 4 8 1 Creating recipe 4 52 4 8 2 Recipe editing e tote 4 52 ADD RECIPERE mette tie tentent pa mat 4 52 ADDA VARIABLE pnto ease
155. SUPPORTED CATEGORY BLOCK FUNCTION BATCH BAT_CTRL Batch controller interface DISCREP Transmitted received digital signal match to diagnose plant faults RECORD Storage retrieval of analogue digital values for runtime use SFC_CON Sequence SFC control selection and running SFC_DISP Display monitoring control of remotely running sequence SFC SFC_MON Sequence SFC runtime monitoring RCP_SET Recipe set RCP_LINE Recipe Line COMMS GW_CON To be issued later GW_TBL To be issued later GWProfM_CON Profibus DPV1 comms master CONDITN AGA8DATA AGAS calculation block for compressibility of gas mixtures AN_ALARM Alarm with absolute deviation rate alarms CARB_DIFF On line carbon diffusion modelling CHAR 16 point analogue characteriser DIGALARM Digital alarm FILTER First order filter FLOWCOMP Computes flow rate corrected for pressure temperature and density GASCONC Contains gas concentration units in Mole units INVERT Analogue inversion block LEAD_LAG Lead lag RANGE Re ranges an analogue input STEEL_SPEC Steel specification UCHAR 16 point characteriser for analogue input blocks CONFIG T800 System block T2900 System block Eycon 10 System block Eycon 20 System block CONTROL 3 TERM Incremental form of the PID block ANMS Analogue manual station CONN Analogue connections DGMS Digital manual stations DG CONN Digital connections MAN STAT Manual station with connections to front panel displays MODE Control mo
156. Save Recipe 1122 RECIPE LEGEND 11 STATUS 1123 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Recipe Status 1124 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Downloaded at 1125 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Version 1126 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Edited by 1127 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 At 1128 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Timeout 1130 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Status 1131 RECIPE ITEM 12 RESET 1132 RECIPE ITEM 12 DOWNLOADING 1133 RECIPE ITEM 12 COMPLETE 1134 RECIPE ITEM 12 FAILURE 1140 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 RECIPE ERROR 1141 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Recipe File not found 1142 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Recipe File limits exceeded 1143 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Invalid block reference s 1144 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Recipe download in progress 1145 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Unrecognised file format 1146 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 File write error 1150 RECIPE LEGEND 11 MONITOR 1151 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Recipe Monitor 1152 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 SP 1153 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 SP Live 1154 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 PV 1155 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Capture 1160 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 RCP 1161 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Id 1162 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 1163 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Line 1164 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Recipe Name 1165 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Variable Name 1168 RECIPE ITEM 8 FALSE 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 5 Page 5 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1169 RECIPE ITEM 8 TRUE 1170 RECIPE LEGEND 11 EDIT 1171 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Recipe Editor
157. TEM_TITLE 18 Name 1013 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOG ON 1014 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Access 1015 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 User Password 1016 ACCESS INTRO 64 please re enter User password 1017 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 PASSWD 1018 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 USERS 1020 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOG OFF 1021 ACCESS INTRO 64 To change to Multi User mode select OK See docu mentation for password information 1023 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Multi User select 1024 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 Changing to multi_user mode will be irreversible Select OK to continue 1025 ACCESS DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Confirm Multi User mode 1026 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Identity 1027 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Reference 1028 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Name 1029 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Access 1030 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Identity 1031 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Password 1032 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Confirm 1033 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 NEW 1034 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1035 ACCESS DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Delete User 1036 ACCESS DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 New User 1037 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Sorting entries please wait 1038 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 DISABLE 1039 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Your password has expired You must change it now 1060 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Forms 1063 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Security Access 1064 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Net Audit setup 1065 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Signature setup 1066 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Include Source Files 1067 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Category 1068 CLONE DIALOG_TITLE 28 WARNING 1069 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80
158. The full name of the protocol is Modbus RTU slave Used for the Talk thru facility ENET3 and for direct connection with a Modbus master port is for Modbus TCP COM and or Printer Used to send reports and or alarms to a serial printer The full name of the protocol is Modbus RTU master MODBUS S Table 4 5 1 Available protocols Changes to Protocol selection become effective at different times as follows ELIN1 2 3 On power up ENET4 On application start 5 On power up COM1 COM2 On application start TALK THRU Talk Thru or transparent Modbus access is a facility provided to enable use of the Eurotherm iTools package to configure Model 2500 controllers without having to disconnect them from the Visual Supervisor The 2500s are con nected to the Instruments s Modbus Master port as shown in section 1 3 5 The PC is connected to the Modbus Slave port on the front panel via an EIA232 link With the iTools package running on the PC the Model 2500 units can then be configured by talking through the Visual Supervisor Notes 1 In order for TalkThru to work the database must contain a Gateway file GWF for Modbus slave and for Modbus master both of which are referenced in GW_CON blocks 2 PC iTools be connected to the Modbus COM 1 2 port but needs an EIA422 485 converter 3 For more information refer to the iTools Help system 4 The PC may be connected across E
159. This is purely a display function the program continues to run as normal To leave review mode and return to the live zoom pan display the LIVE key beneath the zoom slider or the LIVE key in the option bar should be operated To return to the normal pre plot display the option bar VIEW key should be operated Moving this zoom slider down up increases decreases the amount of time base displayed Buttons have similar effect but provide step changes Zoom factor is shown below the display Cursor initially at right edge of screen Faceplate values are Use this pan slider or the those at the arrow keys to select that part of cursor time the time base to be viewed and date Left moves back in time 03 04 06 13 31 17 x2 Cursor date Cursor time Zoom factor Back Live key Figure 3 3 2c Review mode controls Chapter 3 29820 3 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 4 LOGGING DATA This section describes how incoming data can be logged archived to an archive device 3 4 1 Types of files The selection of file type ASCII or UHH is made in the Logging Groups window described in section 4 2 below ASCII This is a text file that is human readable and which can be imported into standard spreadsheets Files of this type have ASC extensions UHH This format is a non human rea
160. This will acknowledge every alarm under the selected filter 56 ALH ALH TITLE 8 ACK 57 ALH PAGE TITLE 20 Alarm summary 59 ALH FILTER 8 MSGS 61 ALMMENU PAGE_TITLE 20 Add Note 62 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 NOTE 63 ALMMENU INTRO 64 Adds a Note to the Alarm History list 64 ALMMENU ITEM_TITLE 16 Your note Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 66 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 LOG 67 ALH PAGE_TITLE 20 Event Log 68 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 EVT LOG 71 ALMMENU PAGE_TITLE 20 Alarm Archive 72 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ARCHIVE 73 ALMMENU INTRO 64 Archive to disk the alarm history 74 ALMMENU DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Acknowledging All Cached Block Alarms 75 ALMMENU ITEM TITLE 16 Remaining 76 ALMMENU ITEM TITLE 16 Block 77 PRINTER ALM_TYPE 3 ACK 78 PRINTER ALM_TYPE 3 ACT 79 PRINTER ALM TYPE 3 CLR 90 APPMGR DIALOG TITLE 28 Load Error 91 FATAL FATAL_ERROR 20 No cold hot start 92 FATAL FATAL_ERROR 20 No hot start 93 FATAL FATAL_ERROR 20 No cold start 94 SYSTEM DIALOG_TITLE 28 Missing template libraries 101 MONTH MONTH 3 Jan 102 MONTH MONTH 3 Feb 103 MONTH MONTH 3 Mar 104 MONTH MONTH 3 Apr 105 MONTH MONTH 3 May 106 MONTH MONTH 3 Jun 107 MONTH MONTH 3 Jul 108 MONTH MONTH 3 Aug 109 MONTH MONTH 3 Sep 110 MONTH MONTH 3 Oct 111 MONTH MONTH 3 Nov 112 MONTH MONTH 3 Dec 113 ALH DATE POOR CHAR 1 114 ALH
161. VE AS START Manager File RISE State RUNNING STOP No application loaded File Press DELETE LOAD LD RUN DELETE No application loaded The Confirm Delete window appears File RISER Delete File RISE OK CANCEL Press OK LOAD LD RUN DELETE HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 8 Function Block Manager The function blocks set up in LinTools for this application can be viewed as a group by touching the FB MGR button of the Application pop up Touching a particular function Block calls its details to the display Reference to the LinTools manual will normally have to be made to understand the entries completely Highlighted items in the Function Block list can be edited Figure 4 3 8a shows how to access the Function Block Manager and figure 4 3 8b shows the initial Function Block Manager display pages 2 Press SYSTEM ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS PROGRAMMER AOE HOME 1 Press menu key SETUP CLONING Press APPLN APP SUM Press FB MGR Figure 4 3 8a Access to the Function Block Manager Eycon 10 lin dext 2500 5 mod5 01 ise diag edb diag mod5 02 ddr diag edbtable mod5 03
162. _TITLE 16 File Name 433 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 434 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 435 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 436 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 437 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Schedule Program 438 SPP ITEM_TITLE 17 File Name 439 SPP ITEM_TITLE 17 Start Date 440 SPP ITEM_TITLE 17 Start Time 441 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Iterations 442 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CLEAR 443 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 ACCEPT 444 SPP SPP_CELL 18 SP 445 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 D 446 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 S 447 SPP Special 2 to 448 SPP SPP CELL ABBR 8 R 449 SPP Special 2 R 450 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 Servo SP 451 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 Servo PV 452 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Save As 453 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 455 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Overwriting 456 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM SAVE 457 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 458 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 459 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Deleting 460 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM DELETE 461 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 462 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 463 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 File Saved 464 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM SAVE 465 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 466 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program File not found 467 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program File too large 468 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 File read error 469 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 File write error 470 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Unresolved block references 471 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program Already Running 472 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Insufficient file space 473 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Unrecognised file format 474 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Schedule already loaded 475 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Max nested subprograms lim
163. a for example programs Notes 1 If Intellectual Property Rights Protection IPRP section 4 9 1 is enabled then data may be cloned only to the original instrument or to another with the same IPRP settings This section consists of the following subsections Accessing the Cloning page Section 4 6 1 Cloning application data Section 4 6 2 Cloning system instrument data Section 4 6 3 Cloning both application and system data cloning ALL Section 4 6 4 4 6 1 Accessing the cloning page cT ACCESS Press the Menu key PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME 2 Select SYSTEM a A pem SUMMARY APPLN 3 Select CLONING Py m CLONING Cloning The Cloning page appears 4 Press the Application field yellowed EXPORT IMPORT A pick list appears allowing System Application or ALL to be selected System All The highlighted field Application in this example indicates which type of data was last selected for cloning IMPORT Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 46 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 6 2 Cloning application data This consists of 1 Exporting application data 2 Importing application data EXPORTING APPLICATION DATA From the Cloning page select Application The Applica
164. a E3 4 34 d 64 B4 a 4 5 35 65 u B5 E5 6 36 f 66 q B6 E6 7 37 g 67 B7 E7 8 38 h 68 B8 8 8 9 39 69 B9 E9 3A i 6A 0 EA 3B k 6B BB EB lt 3C 1 6C BC i EC 3D m 6D i ED gt 3E n 6E a BE i EE 6F 4 0 40 70 CO FO A 41 4 71 Fl B 42 r 72 A C2 5 2 43 s 73 A C3 F3 D 44 t 74 C4 4 45 u 75 C5 5 46 v 76 C6 F6 G 47 w 77 C C7 a F7 H 48 x 78 C8 F8 I 49 y 79 C9 F9 J 4A 2 7 FA K 4B 7B E CB FB L 4C 7C i CC FC M 4D 7D CD FD N 4E 7E CE b FE 4F i CF y FF Table C ASCII codes HAO29280 Appendix C Issue 5 Mar 08 Page C 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK C2 GLOSSARY Application Archiving Brown out Configuration Configurator Configurer COSHH Customisation Database Dictionary files EMC Home page LIN database Log group Logging OEM Power outage Process variable PV Ramp An application consists of a LIN database a User Screen page set possibly some Setpoint Programs Sequences and Dictionary files plus actions profile files and sometimes GSD files for third party devices The application embodies the instrument s control strategy and also determines the behaviour of its user interface Archiving is the process of recording the history of a set of data values onto a removable floppy disk The data can only be
165. acters 16 characters V122 Hold 8 characters 16 characters V123 Abort 8 characters 16 characters V124 Reset 8 characters 16 characters V125 Restart 8 characters 16 characters V126 Complete 8 characters 16 characters V127 Save 8 characters 16 characters V128 Pause 8 characters 16 characters V129 Resume 8 characters 16 characters V130 Stop 8 characters 16 characters V131 Phase 8 characters 16 characters V132 Create 8 characters 16 characters V138 Ethernet Save 16 characters 16 characters V139 Modbus TCP Save 16 characters 16 characters V140 Net Audit save N A 16 characters See Note 141 Lost Messages N A 16 characters See Note V142 Power Cycle N A 16 characters See Note V143 Net Audit Update 16 characters 16 characters See Note V150 Sig Conf Save 16 characters 16 characters See Note 151 Sig Conf Update 16 characters 16 characters See Note V152 New Level Sign 16 characters 16 characters See Note V153 Old Level Sign 16 characters 16 characters See Note V154 Item Sign 16 characters 16 characters See Note V155 Page Sign 16 characters 16 characters See Note V156 Function Sign 16 characters 16 characters See Note V157 Unused Signature 16 characters 16 characters See Note V158 Sign Fail 16 characters 16 characters See Note V159 Authorise Fail 16 characters 16 characters See Note V160 Min ID 8 characters 16 characters V161 Min Password 8 characters 16 characters V162 Max Login Attemp 8 characters 16 characters V163 Expire Pasword 8 character
166. aded Alarm event message as configured in Lin Blocks ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER RECIPE Batch Locana HISTORY ACK ALL ACK SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES LOCKED Alarm History ACTIVE 04 04 06 12 04 04 06 12 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 _ XL LL 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 43 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 43 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 04 04 06 11 40 02 Date Time of Date Time of occurrence alarm or highlighted message red if active being cleared alarm or messagg Date Time of acknowledgemen uem e n F1 F15 rie 17 8 ie REB Figure 3 5 1a alarm history display XGA version to log archive Information is arranged in a number of columns as shown above The figure shows the XGA version the 1 4VGA version is similar but does not have the Ack column The CLEAR and ACK columns contain one of the follow ing 1 Dashed lines for events defined as one off occurrences which by their nature are not Clearable 2 Blank spaces for alarms or messages that are still active 3 Time and date showing when the item ceased to be active or was acknowledged 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 3 Page 3 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 5 1 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Cont For brevit
167. aken at all Note Some functions cannot be allocated some access levels Administrative functions for example always require a minimum level of Signature and some functions cannot be assigned Action Disabled The available functions are in a number of categories a picklist of categories being displayed when the Function field is touched Figure 6 2 2b below shows this picklist The button functions at the bottom of the page are as follows SAVE Saves all changes to all functions CANCEL Cancels all changes made since last SAVE or DEFAULT operation DEFAULT Returns the access levels to those when initially enabled 029280 Chapter 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 6 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 2 2 SIGNATURE CONFIGURATION Cont Application Setup Cloning File Manager Administration Alarms Overview Programmer Recipe Batch Logging Figure 6 2 26 Function picklist Chapter 6 Page 6 12 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 7 REMOTE ACCESS The instrument provides a limited set of facilities which allow remote users to access the instruments 7 1 7 1 1 FTP logon FTP access always requires the user to log on Anonymous FTP logons are not permitted To configure the instru ment for FTP logon the user based access system section 4 4 3 must be used and the relevant user s attributes con figured to
168. and no thinner than 2mm for steel 2 Inthe panel cut an aperture 138mm x 138mm small frame or 281mm x 281mm large frame If more than one instrument is to be mounted in the panel the recommended minimum spacings are as shown in figure 1 2a 1 2b 3 From the front side of the mounting panel insert the instrument rear end first through the aperture Insert the two panel clamps into the rectangular apertures at the sides of the instrument case 5 Whilst ensuring that the sealing gasket is flat against the front of the panel tighten the screws of the clamps suffi ciently to hold the unit firmly in position IMPORTANT Do not use excessive force to tighten the screws It could distort the case and render the instrument inoperative 29280 Chapter 1 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 1 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont 144 0 mm ale al Panel thickness 22 mm Min 2 mm Flash card e L Ethernet Serial comms Profibus Option Chapter 10 137 5 mm 154 5 mm 170 5 mm 144 0 mm Profibus option chapter 10 MH Fixing Clip one each side 137 0 mm Protective conductor terminal M4 Panel cutout 138 mm x 138 mm both 0 1 mm PANEL MOUNTING DETAILS Installed panel angle Vertical panels
169. and the E device to be formatted The file the cursor to the field and type in the required node and device letter e g FA M Press lt Enter gt to display its files up to a maximum of 20 Move the cursor up and down the file list and tag files with an asterisk using the lt Enter gt key Then move the cursor to the top column head field and press lt Enter gt to display the function menu Copy Delete Find and for E device and A device only Format Finally select a function and press lt Enter gt to carry it out Note that the Find function has wild card characters which help in the locating of filenames containing known character strings Press lt Escape gt to return to the UTILITIES menu 8 4 7 ALARMS Select ALARMS to view the currently active alarms in the instrument Move the cursor up and down the list press lt Enter gt to acknowledge an individual alarm Press I to inspect the block containing the alarm 8 4 8 ALARM LOG Select ALARM LOG to view a reduced functionality version of the front panel alarm history 8 4 8 EVENT LOG Select EVENT LOG to view a reduced functionality version of the front panel event history HA029280 Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 8 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 MODBUS CONFIGURATION Note The resident Modbus configurator is similar in operation to the Modbus configurator in the T500 LINtools package See the T500 LINtools Product Manual Part No H
170. andard 334 PANEL ITEM 26 Small 339 PANEL ITEM_UNITS 9 days 340 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 COPY ALL 341 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Copy Files 342 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 16 DEL ALL 343 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirm Delete All 344 FILEMGR ITEM FILE 16 Files 360 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 20 Security Access 361 ACCESS LEGEND 11 ACCESS 362 ACCESS INTRO 64 Enter required level and password then CHANGE 363 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Current Level 364 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 New Level 365 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Password 366 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 CHANGE 367 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 PASSWDS 368 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 20 Passwords 369 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 28 Confirm Password 370 ACCESS INTRO 64 Please re enter top level password 371 ACCESS ACCESS LEVEL 10 LOCKED 372 ACCESS ACCESS LEVEL 10 OPERATOR 373 ACCESS ACCESS LEVEL 10 COMMISSION 374 ACCESS ACCESS LEVEL 10 ENGINEER 375 ACCESS ACCESS LEVEL 10 ADMIN Chapter 5 Page 5 8 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 380 APPMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Appl n Manager 381 APPMGR LEGEND 11 APP MGR 382 APPMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 File 383 APPMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 State 384 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 385 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 LD RUN 386 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 UNLOAD 387 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 388 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 389 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 390 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 STOP 391 APPMGR BUTT
171. appears then press lt Escape gt once more to clear the screen The CPU is now out of configuration mode Notes 1 lt Ctrl gt lt O gt Exit VT100 mode does not quit CPU configuration mode and must not be pressed 2 Stop start download upload files cannot be stopped via LINfiler in the LINtools package in a CPU if it still in configuration mode If any attempt is made to do so Error 8333 Configurator in use is reported It is necessary to quit CPU configuration mode before such operations are attempted Caution Always quit the primary CPU from configurator mode after use Otherwise an operator unaware that the CPU is still in configurator mode might subsequently plug in a terminal and type Enter Enter hoping to see the version and power up shutdown messages The result could be totally unexpected because the con figurator would continue from its last operation For example if if the configurator were last used to start a database it would execute the start sequence twice 8 4 DATABASE CONFIGURATION Figure 8 4 shows the Main menu and sections 8 4 1 to 8 4 7 describe its items MAIN MENU Select option gt MAKE Create block COPY Copy block DELETE Delete block INSPECT Inspect block NETWORK Network setup UTILITIES Engineering utilities ALARMS Current Alarms ALARM LOG Alarm History Log EVENT LOG EVENT LOG Fi
172. archived as described in section 3 5 4 below 3 5 2 Alarm Message Acknowledgement ALARMS Alarms can be acknowledged the following ways 1 Press the Menu key below the screen In the pop up menu which appears press ALARMS then press ACK to acknowledge the displayed alarm or ACK ALL to acknowledge all current unacknowledged alarms 2 Press the Alarm Pane In the pop up menu which appears press ACK to acknowledge the displayed alarm or ALL to acknowledge all current unacknowledged alarms 3 From the option bar in the Alarm History page Section 3 5 1 or the Alarm summary page section 3 5 5 press the ACK key MESSAGES Some messages are cleared by the system itself without operator intervention In such cases entries appear in the Alarm history page CLEAR column but not in the acknowledge column large frame units only All message indica tion stops For other messages touching the alarm pane or operating the Menu Alarms Messages key displays the latest message in a pop up window Subsequent operation of the OK button for this window both clears and acknowledges the mes sage Batch Message The batch has now started OK 3 5 3 Adding notes to alarm history The NOTE facility allows an operator defined text message to be added to ACK ACK ALL HISTORY the alarm history as follows In the Alarms menu press NOTE SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES
173. as shown in the figure CREATE AS Filename Recipe Line Display Group Message Log Group Log Report OK CANCEL Filename Allows a filename eight characters max to be entered for the Batch file Recipe line Allows a recipe line to be chosen for batch action Display Group Allows one of the display groups to be selected for batch action see section 3 6 for further details Message Allows a message set up in LIN blocks configuration to be selected for display as appropriate Log Group Allows a log group to be selected for Batch action section 4 2 Log Report A logging group may have been configured to have reports In such a case one of the log group s report files may be selected to drive batch reports batch report is generated for start stop and abort The create facility generates an elementary report file UYF which may be customised by being exported and edited see section 5 9 1 for further details of UYF files Entry of a Filename is mandatory Other field entries are optional HA029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 33 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 3 HA029820 Page 3 34 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 4 MANAGEMENT This chapter is for those responsible for setting up the instrument for managing applications for editing setpoint pro grams and for supervising the day to day operation and moni
174. ate and the status panel will show COMPLETE Starting values This ends the program by restoring its starting values In this case the program adopts the Idle state upon finishing simpl Indefinite Dwell Select the required action and press the Return key The Properties window reappears showing the selected action and below that the message DONE Press DONE The Program Editor page re appears Chapter 4 029280 4 12 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 7 CHANGING PROGRAM PROPERTIES Cont KE SAMPLE CHANGING DEFAULT ITERATIONS In the Properties window press the current value for iterations displayed in the Iterations field A numeric keyboard pop up menu appears allowing the default number of iterations to be set between 0 and 999 where 0 results in continuous running 4 1 8 Changing setpoint names Analogue and digital setpoint names can be changed but not while the program is running For analogue setpoints the holdback values can also be SIMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 amended see section 4 1 6 above simple With the program stopped press the setpoint whose name is to be edited in this example Ana In 1 Setpoint Ana ini For an analogue setpoint a window is displayed offering the option to Holdback change Setpoint name and Mode shown opposit
175. ated by joining a consecutive pair of 16 bit registers as described below The following restrictions are applied to ensure that the 32 bit value created is transferred indivisibly The multiread function 3 and multiwrite function 16 must both be enabled The scan count must be even The first register of the pair must be at an even offset within the table The first register of the pair must not be the last register in the table The second register of the pair must not already be assigned to a LIN database field The field type of the 32 bit register pair must be a 32 bit long signed or unsigned a 32 bit real or a string For a string only the first four characters are transferred To create 32 bit register pair enter 4 D in the DP field of the first register of the pair This causes the register s DP to adopt the value D and the following register the value d If any of the above restrictions are violated the entry will be rejected When the first register of the 32 bit pair is assigned to a LIN database field the second register automatically copies the same field name assigning the name and the DP can be done in either order A 32 bit register pair can be restored to individual 16 bit registers by changing the DP of the first register to zero to four Register and diagnostic tables only This column specifies the format of the data in the register normal or binary coded decimal BCD
176. attributes column can be decoded as shown in table 6 1 3 Remote NO The values are additive so if for example Sign and Authorise are both selected Yes and OK CANCEL all other fields are selected No then the attributes value would be 00000003 Authorise View only Admin only Display 00000000 00000001 00000002 00000004 00000010 00001000 00002000 Table 6 1 3 Attribute coding Chapter 6 HA029280 Page 6 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 USER ID CONTROL Cont EXPIRES This column shows the expiry date for each Password For each new user the expiry date is 24 hours after the new user details are Saved The user must log on and change the password within 24 hours or the Password will lapse The new password will have the Expiry period set in the Properties menu described below of the Security Access Page SCREEN KEYS SAVE CANCEL NEW PROPERTIES MAINT STATS REVISION JoePLoy These keys are located near the bottom of the screen The SAVE and CANCEL keys operate in the same way as de scribed in section 4 4 3 above NEW 27 Operating the NEW key calls the New User pop up menu to the display Identity Once the details have been entered and OK pressed the new user Name M appears in Green on the screen Access OPERATOR Note Do not press SAVE until all other parameters e g Password NNNM attributes hav
177. bles list highlight TABLES and press lt Enter gt Individual menus can be displayed by selecting the required Table number see Table Menus TABLES LIST The Tables List provides an overview of all the tables in the Modbus configuration Each instrument supports a maxi mum number of Tables as defined by the TABLES field in the instrument Configuration Header block The Tables List offers sixteen tables so 4 pages are used to cover the 64 tables This menu allows tables to be created and the types offsets sizes and for master mode function codes scan counts instrument numbers and tick rate to be specified The Tables List also accesses individual Table Menus for detailed configuration 1 e LIN Database mapping see Table Menus section The Tables List menu below shows an example Tables List with Table 1 configured as a Register Table The first four columns Table Type Offset and Count are common to both the Master and Slave Operating Modes The re maining Functions Scan count Instr No and TickRate appear only when Master Operating Mode is configured Table Type Offset Count Functions Scan count Instr No TickRate Register nused nused nused sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 1 2 3 4 5 6 J 8 9 Ca G G G G G Cu GG G lt gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 c
178. c2 Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasConcl Water GasConc2 Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConcl Hsulphid GasConc2 Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConcl Hydrogen GasConc2 Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConcl CrbMonOx GasConc2 CrbMonOx 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConcl Oxygen GasConc2 Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConcl iButane GasConc2 iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 Butane GasConcl nButane GasConc2 nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 Pentane GasConcl iPentane GasConc2 iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 Pentane GasConcl nPentane GasConc2 nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 Hexane GasConcl nHexane GasConc2 nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 2a Multi line file example FILES WITH OPTIONAL CAPTURE VARIABLES To generate a recipe file with separate capture points then for each recipe line there must be an additional field after each column in the title line and for each variable The title line entry should be an item called Capture and the field for the variable is the tag of the field to be captured This field may be left blank if no capture value is to be specified Figure 5 10 2b shows the 2 line file of figure 5 10 2a with capture variable on the first two variables UYR 1 7 10 04 06 08 59 02 Richard 30 Setpoint Line 1 Capture Setpoint Line 2 Capture Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConcl M
179. characters Notes 1 Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option 2 Not applicable to units fitted with the Auditor Option 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 29 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY Cont No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA XGA V54 Bad refs 8 characters 16 characters V55 Sch load 8 characters 16 characters V56 Run 8 characters 16 characters V57 Held 8 characters 16 characters V58 Resume 8 characters 16 characters V59 Abort 8 characters 16 characters V60 Finish 8 characters 16 characters V62 Heldback 8 characters 16 characters V63 Restart 8 characters 16 characters V64 Overnest 8 characters 16 characters V65 Bad Prog 8 characters 16 characters V66 Sch Abrt 8 characters 16 characters V67 OverLims 8 characters 16 characters V68 Early 8 characters 16 characters V69 Ramp Dis 8 characters 16 characters V70 DBN Mem Full 16 characters 16 characters V72 Bad 5 5 16 characters 16 characters V74 Comms Changed 16 characters 16 characters V75 Startup Changed 16 characters 16 characters V76 Instrument Reset 16 characters 16 characters V77 Health Relay 16 characters 16 characters See Note V78 Run Relay 16 characters 16 characters See Note V79 Panel Save 16 characters 16 characters V80 No GWF Found 16 characters 16 characters V82 Created GWF 16 characters 16 characters V83 Extra Modbus S 16 characters 16 characters V85 Language 16 characters 16
180. characters V86 Date Format 16 characters 16 characters V87 Time Format 16 characters 16 characters V88 Duration Format 16 characters 16 character V89 Program Edit 16 characters 16 characters V90 Lost Ed 8 characters 16 characters V9 Skip 8 characters 16 characters V92 No Goto 8 characters 16 characters V93 Common 8 characters 16 characters V94 Save 8 characters 16 characters V95 Deleted program 8 characters 16 characters V96 Run From 8 characters 16 characters V97 Skip Request N A 16 characters See Note V98 Segment Edit 16 characters 16 characters V99 Segment Edit 16 characters 16 characters V102 Gap 8 characters 16 characters V103 Deleted Log File 8 characters 16 characters V104 Too Big Log File 8 characters 16 characters V108 Schedule 8 characters 16 characters V109 Sch Clr 8 characters 16 characters V110 Load 8 characters 16 characters Note Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option Chapter 5 Page 5 30 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY Cont No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA XGA 111 Download 8 characters 16 characters 112 Complete 8 characters 16 characters V113 Failed 8 characters 16 characters 114 Abort 8 characters 16 characters 115 Capture 8 characters 16 characters V116 Save 8 characters 16 characters V117 Deleted Recipe 8 characters 16 characters V120 Load 8 characters 16 characters V121 Start 8 char
181. cluded in the report by the entry of scale low and high values and the adding of the letter B after the width character For example if the user entered scale is 0 to 50 and the width is 20 then a value of 0 is represented by zero asterisks and a value of 50 is represented by 20 aster isks Thus for this example each asterisk represents 20 50 or 0 4 of the scale If the value is not a whole number of asterisks then rounding is applied Thus a value of 42 would be represented by 42 x 0 4 16 8 17 asterisks but a value of 41 41 x 0 4 16 4 would be represented by 16 asterisks The 17th asterisk would turn on when the process value reached 41 5 The following entry includes literal text entries to show the low and high scale values 0 Loop1 PV gt 0 lt 50 20B 50 For a value of 42 this produces the following printout 0 RAK 50 FURTHER INFORMATION 1 Variables of type ENUM are printed textually even in the absence of an enumeration list using the text defined within LIN If an enumeration list is included then all the desired strings must be included Empty or Over range valued do not default to the LIN strings 2 Alarm subfields e g PID1 ALARMS HIGHABS behave as integers taking values 0 to 3 0 Alarm not active Alarm not unacknowledged 1 Alarm active and acknowledged 2 Alarm no longer active but remains unacknowledged 3 Alarm active but not acknowledged If the
182. curity Access A4000 ACCESS Logging Submenu A5000 LOG_MENU 2 3 5010 A5010 LOG 2 3 2 Area Group Point displays 1500 1 2 2 A7000 RCP_MENU 72 3 3 7010 A7010 RECIPE 2 3 2 7000 Batch A8000 BATCH_MENU 2 3 8010 A8010 BATCH 2 3 2 8011 Alarms A9000 ALM MENU 2 3 9010 9011 9021 9012 A9010 ALM HIST 2 2 A9020 MESSAGE 2 3 Dialog Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 Signature Agent A200000 SIGN 5 END OF FILE HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 5 41 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 2 Editing the default pnl file In order to change the architecture layout of the menu system the default pnl file is edited For instance for any one menu it is possible to change 1 its title and any other legends 2 which screen area it occupies E G status area Main pane or pop up menu 3 which sub menus it generates Note It is possible to create a system that is un navigable and unworkable For instance it is possible inadvertently to create a system which generates no panel display and which therefore offers no means of recovery Chapter 5 029280 Page 5 42 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 3 Line types Please read the following in conjunction with the foregoing listings There are several distinct line types each identified by its first character 1 Panel Agent declaration beginning with A 2 Panel Driver declaration beginning wit
183. d press OK OK CANCEL If required the Date Format field can be edited in a similar fashion The format options Date Time Spreadsheet and Integer are de scribed in sections 4 2 1 and 4 5 4 3 5 5 Alarm summary page This provides an alternative way of displaying only those alarms which are currently active acknowledged or not and previously active alarms which are now cleared but which have not been acknowledged The alarm summary page is displayed by touching the SUMMARY key in the Alarm menu Operating the Option key calls an option bar like that described in section 3 5 1 for the alarm history display except that it includes only ACK ALL AREA BLOCK and GROUP keys Alarm Summary TYPE ACTIVE CLEAR Eycon 10 1 04 04 09 10 04 04 09 35 T2550 7 Comms 04 04 08 13 ACK ALL HISTORY gt SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES Figure 3 5 5 Alarm summary access Note Initially the display shows only the highest priority alarm in each block Operation of the down arrow key below the screen causes the display to change such that it shows all alarms A further operation of the keys returns to the single alarm block display and so on Chapter 3 029820 3 16 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 5 6 Event Log The event log page is accessed either a by operating the Log key in the alarm menu or b by operating the EVT LOG key in the root men
184. d from the relevant drive and the copy or delete key operated or the COPY ALL DEL ALL keys can be used to copy or delete all the files within the selected filter on that drive CAUTION Files of the form __SYSTEM X YZ must not be deleted or the instrument will not operate correctly and revert to a factory configuration The file DEF AULT OFL must not be deleted or the faceplates in the overview page will fail to operate correctly X YZis any three character extension File Manager Node M Device Filter File SSYSTEMT UYE Size 11395 bytes Free Space 628084 bytes Copy File File E SYSTEM1 UYL Confirm Delete File E SYSTEM1 UYL Node 8 Device E File CAUTION Files must not be deleted from the drive CANCEL unless it is certain that the control system will not be impaired by so doing See the caution ary notes above Copy to Figure 4 7 3 Copy and delete Node For ELIN systems only the decimal number of the LIN node to be accessed Device Selectable as E internal flash memory or if any of the following are fitted B USB Bulk storage device or H internal archive Filter Allows file display to be limited to certain types of files For example shows all files whereas an entry of DBF allows only files with DBF suffix to appear See File immediately below File Touching this area causes a scroll list of files to be dis
185. d if the dc power supply unit is located more than 30 metres from the visual supervisor s it is supplying Note in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010 the recorder shall have one of the following as a disconnecting device fitted within easy reach of the operator and labelled as the discon necting device a A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947 1 and IEC947 3 b A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool e A separable plug without a locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 1 Ifahazard could arise from an operator s reliance on a value displayed by the equipment the display must give an unambiguous indication e g a flashing alarm whenever the value is over range or under range 2 Where conductive pollution e g condensation carbon dust is likely adequate air conditioning filtering sealing etc must be installed in the equipment enclosure 3 The equipment is designed for process monitoring and supervision in an indoor environment If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment might be impaired 4 The battery within the unit must not be short circuited When exhausted the battery must be disposed of in ac cordance with local regulations for poly carbonmonofluoride lithium cells 5 When connecting a USB device it must be plugged directly
186. d on the underside of the unit as shown in figure 1 2a and figure 1 2b above Note Compliance with EMC directives cannot be guaranteed if the Bulk Storage Device is connected using an extension cable View on non solder end of fixed socket Figure 1 3 4 USB connector pinout y Y Caution Both the user and the peripheral e g USB device must be at the same electrical potential as the instrument housing before the peripheral is connected Chapter 1 HA029280 Page 1 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 3 5 Wiring the Visual Supervisor to I O units For a fixed permanent installation cables should be a low loss type Eurotherm part no S9508 5 2RJ45 xxx where xxx is the length in metres with an implicit decimal point as in xx x and a maximum of 99 9 metres For a tempo rary set up cables can be general purpose types Category 5 cable can be used for runs of up to 100 metres For runs greater than this one or more pairs of hubs using fibre optic connection is recommended Wiring between the Visual Supervisor and I O units may be carried out using the EIA485 connectors or the Ethernet connector all of which are located at the rear of the unit as shown in figure 1 2a and 1 2b Figure 1 3 5a shows two simple wiring examples Figure 1 3 5b gives a more complex example For full details of the I O unit wiring consult the documentation supplied with the I O unit Visual supervisor rear pa
187. d out 09 51 16 15 the hours minutes seconds that revision was carried out Fred Bloggs is the name of the person who last modified the file Line 3 Line 3 defines the batch engine interface as BAT CTRL End Action gt lt Timeout gt lt Confirm level gt lt BatchID gt e g 1 0 60 2 Where BATCHI 15 the name of the BAT_CTRL block to run the batch 0 defines the action on RESET 0 Requires a reload Can be re started without a reload 60 defines the timeout in seconds for state transitions 2 defines the level of confirmation required when starting from the front panel 0 No confirmation required 1 OK CANCEL dialogue box 2 Required re entry of password ABC R isan optional batch id prefix of the form lt Prefix gt R where Prefix overwrites the batch ID from the left with the characters of the prefix For example a prefix of RKN would result in batch IDs such as RKN00014 R if added makes the batch ID read only i e it cannot be changed from the front panel HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 61 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 14 1 FILE HEADER Cont Line 4 Line 4 defines the display interface as lt User Screen gt lt Display Group gt lt Message Filter gt lt User Item1 gt lt User Item6 gt Where lt User Screen gt is the number of a user screen page associated with the batch or 0 is none lt Display Group gt is the optional name of a
188. d time below to the sup port desk who will issue you with the recovery pass word 1397 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Recovery Key 1398 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Date Time 1399 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Minutes Left 1400 ADMIN MENU_TITLE 16 Administration 1401 ADMIN LEGEND 11 ADMIN 1410 NET_AUDIT PAGE_TITLE 20 Network Audit Trail 1411 NET_AUDIT LEGEND 11 NET AUDIT 1412 NET_AUDIT PARA 24 Destination node 1413 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 LIN Node 1414 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 LIN Segment 1415 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 Disabled 1416 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 UNINIT 1417 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 INIT 1418 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 CONNECTED Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 20 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1419 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 ACTIVE 1420 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm active 1421 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm cleared 1422 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm ack ed 1423 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Cached alarms 1424 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 System event 1425 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Block event 1426 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Operator note 1427 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Block value change 1428 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Message active 1429 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Message cleared 1430 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Message ack ed 1436 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Min alarm priority 1437 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Min event priority 1450 NET_AUDIT
189. dable file format UHH files can be interpreted only by Review software UHH files have Sequence file names see below and the extension UHH If Hourly or Daily is selected then new UHH sequence files are created at hour or day boundaries respectively 3 4 2 Name types The selection of name type Text Hourly Daily Sequence is made in the Logging Groups window described in sec tion 4 2 later in this document TEXT A Text file is a continuous file that starts when logging starts and stops when logging stops The file must have an 8 character file name with the usual MS DOS constraints the instrument adds the file type suffix asc or uhh If uhh files are used and TEXT is selected the files are treated as SEQUENCE see below HOURLY Hourly means that the instrument automatically parcels the archive into files of one hour length For the sequence of files that result the user supplies the first two letters of the file name s and the instrument assigns the last six to indi cate the time month hour day that the recording started for that particular file For example were Monday to be typed in then a file name for an hourly type file might be mo010323 which would mean that archive started at the beginning of hour 23 of day 3 of month 1 DAILY Daily is similar to Hourly The instrument parcels the recording into files that start at the beginning of each day mid night and run for 24 hours The user supplies
190. de selection with push button masking PID PID control function PID LINK Faceplate for SETPOINT 3 TERM MAN STAT MODE combination SETPOINT Generates a setpoint with bias limits and alarms SIM Simulates two first order lags or capacity with noise TP CONN Specifies up to nine fields as EEPROM tepid data at power down CONVERT ENUMENUM Converts between enumerated number types ENUMUINT Converts from enumerated type to integer type UINTENUM Converts from integer to enumerated type DIAG AGA8DIAG AGAS block diagnostics ALH DIAG Alarm history statistics ALINDIAG ALIN MAC LLC diagnostics AMC_DIAG Comms statistics on application master DB_DIAG Database diagnostics DDR_DIAG 800 data recording statistics EDB_DIAG External database diagnostics block Page A 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK FUNCTION BLOCKS SUPPORTED Cont CATEGORY BLOCK FUNCTION DIAG Cont EDB_TBL External database table ELINDIAG ELIN Diagnostics EMAPDIAG Ethernet mapping diagnostic FDDADIAG FTP transfer from logging IDENTITY Check list ISE_DIAG Options and features NATPDIAG Audit Trail Provider diagnostics NATCDIAG Audit Trail Consumer diagnostics PBUSDIAG Profibus diagnostics PMC_DIAG Profibus diagnostics PNL_DIAG Front panel information PRPDIAG Port Resolution Protocol diagnostics RSRCDIAG Database and system resource diagnostics SFC_DIAG Sequence diagnostics XEC_DIAG Task diagnostics IO AN DATA Analogue data e
191. diag loop5 1 mod5 04 alh diag SppCtr1 loop5 2 mod5 05 amc_diag SppDig areal mod5 06 db_diag 2404 4 moduls 5 2500 6 CREATE SAVE NETWORK Block Create Network Set Up Category 1 0 Eycon 10 07 7 iss type ANIN Eycon 10 08 8 ock name Sasa Eycon 10 06 6 OK CANCEL Eycon 10_05 5 Figure 4 3 8c Create Save and Network keys CREATE This key allows a new block to be created Once the block category block type and block name have been entered operation of the OK key causes the new block to be created Category and Type are selected from pop up pick lists The block name must be typed in SAVE Operating this key saves the database in the same way as the SAVE key in the Application Manager section 4 3 4 NETWORK Operation of this key displays a list of all the external databases defined within the application 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 4 4 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 3 8 FUNCTION BLOCK MANAGER Cont ALPHA NUMERIC BLOCK DISPLAY Initially the FB Manager page lists the blocks in database order Touching the down arrow key re orders the list in alpha numeric order with numeric entries first figure 4 3 8d Further operations of the key toggle between the two display orders 10 11 dext T2550 5 mod5 01 ise diag edb diag ramp5 1 mod5 02 ddr diag edbtable ramp5 2 mod5 03 pnl diag elindiag loop5 1 mod5 04 alh diag SppCtr1 loop5 2 mod5
192. ds common to both Field DB Write and MOD Write Register Field DP Format DB Write MOD Write Value 0 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 1 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 2 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 3 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 4 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 5 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 6 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 7 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 8 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 9 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 10 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 11 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 12 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 13 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 14 0 Normal Enable Enable gt 0000 15 0 Normal Enable Enable 20000 Figure 8 5 3b Register table menu default Register and diagnostic tables only This column shows the Modbus address of the particular register The first register in the table takes its address from the Offset value given to the table via the table list described above The remaining read only addresses follow on consecutively Digital tables only This column shows the Modbus address of the digital bit on the selected line of the table If the line contains a bitfield rather than a single bit the address shown is that of the first bit in the bitfield Mappings may be made for a single bit or for an 8 or 16 bit field according to the value defined in the Width parameter see later The first bit address in the table ta
193. e LOG NOW For ASCII files only LOG NOW logs a sample immediately it has been selected This manual initiation can be used to take samples as and when required in addition to samples taken under timed logging FORMAT ABS REL EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION Date Time Absolute 25 09 98 10 30 00 Choose this format to set up the program to accept the date and time as dd mm yy hh mm ss The first example in the previous column means 25 September 1998 at 10 30 am 09 25 98 10 30 00 The date format can be set to be mm dd yy as described in section 4 5 4 below The second example expresses the date and time in the new format Spreadsheet Absolute 36068 51 Choose this format for data to be exported to a spreadsheet The format is a single floating point value the integer part of which is the number of days since 31 Dec 1899 at 0 hours and the decimal part is the proportion of the day since midnight For example a value of 1 5 would represent 1 Jan 1900 at noon The example in the previous column represents 30 September 1998 at 10 mins and 5 secs past midday that is 30 09 98 at 12 10 05 Integer Absolute 980930121005 An integer count of seconds since 31 Dec 1899 at 0 hours Duration Relative 00 04 30 00 A text format for expressing the time since start of logging The example represents 4hrs 30mins since start of logging Days Relative 0 1875 Choose this format for data to be exported to a spreadsheet A single floating point value The example repres
194. e For a digital setpoint ig in Mode the only editable field is Setpoint name ig i DONE Press the yellowed field Key in the new name up to a maximum of 16 characters FOLLOWED d simple BY ENTER gp E eee ee Bes setpoint Ramplja Ana In Holdback Dig in Mode NONE DONE Press DONE wt 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 9 Segment timing display Normally segment timing is shown and edited in terms of the duration of each segment It is possible to change this to show the start time and or the end time of the segment in addition to the duration or it can be changed to show start time only If start time only is selected the segment is edited by specifying how far into the program the segment is due to start not in terms of the segment duration In this case the time displayed for each segment must be greater than the preceding segment and less than the following segment To change these options press the LAYOUT button at the bottom of the simple Iced aes aa Program Editor screen Editor Layout Long SP names Segment start The Editor Layout window appears Segment duration na In NES Segment finish et ta Wide cells Press any field to alternate between YES and NO ug em Dig in The Lon
195. e 3 32 Acknowledgement 2 11 3 15 5 62 Active Cleared Ack ed 6 2 Recipe selection 3 31 Display pane nene dece 2 9 Battery replacement 9 1 Field ret 8 7 Baud rate it Ee eerta 8 14 eoo DO un 2 10 Bitflelds Ree uie is 8 7 Archiving uci 3 16 BlOCK ses tige eee denen 8 4 Display addding notes to 3 15 SEE 8 8 Page see 3 13 Creation aient aucem img 4 25 3 13 Delete eee eet 8 8 Two line display 2 11 3 14 Events otio hn nguoi edits 6 2 eco ea cdi aes 3 18 thoro haec oliver teu 8 9 Ene eH ede 8 11 Overview ele sedition de ieee ee 8 4 Names ai READ 5 48 Tagnatme aee 8 5 Pare xcd 2 2 dto EH eC 8 5 Responding 2 3 13 Value 40000 6 2 Status iuc eh Recettes 2 9 Brightness of display 4 44 SUMMANY oio LE PREGA 3 16 Brown 0ut iii eee 4 39 ene ee res 4 20 Time zie ERR E 4 40 APP SUM itane entered 4 20 Application Data eene 4 47 Cac
196. e 5 9 1 The various highlighted items are discussed below Literal Text Lin database Total no of characters Directive variable No of decimal places PIC FS Temperature pidl pv 6 3 NPressure im Size pid2 pv 6 2 N pidl pv gt 30 0 lt 90 0 Cold OK Hot N TIME 8 DATE 8 N Limit values Limit text Text comma System variable Figure 5 9 1 Sample UYF file Chapter 5 029280 5 50 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 9 1 REPORT FORMS Cont UYF FILE ENTRIES The UYF file contains identification information directive followed by a list of those items text and variables which are to be included in the report These items must be separated by commas OR by New Line Line feed or Carriage return instructions Rules 1 No line is to include more than 255 characters not counting commas linefeeds etc 2 No spaces or tabs may be included between items although they may be included in text strings for formatting purposes Directive Literal Text Dictionary text The form identifier used to attach a number to the report for reference via function blocks Different reports can be included in one UYF file by preceding them with different Directives The directive must precede the list of displayed items and must occupy a line of its own The syntax is I lt number gt where number is an integer between 1 and 999 inclusive No spaces are allowed Enc
197. e Panel Navigation file more usually called the pnl file This section of the manual describes the Panel Navigation file and how to edit it in order to customise the architecture of the Standard Interface to your own requirements The architecture of the User Screen Interface is assembled using the User Screen Editor and is held in other files To customise the architecture of the User Screen Interface see the User Screen Editor Handbook part no HA260749U005 5 7 1 The Panel Navigation file THE VERSIONS For any instrument there can be three versions of the Panel Navigation file held in software with copies of two of them ROM The file names are lt gt default pnl and _system pnl with ROM copies of default pnl and system pnl Each of these versions is mostly a list of agents with various parameters determining behaviour Some of these pa rameters are agent specific others are generic Codings for system pnl the Bare Panel version and default pnl called the Application Panel version here follow Note For units fitted with the Audit option please see Auditor Option Versions below for codings With an application say lt appname gt loaded the system looks for lt appname gt pnl This is a version that has been customised for that application and which will generate an interface architecture specifically for it For an instrument that periodically runs different applications there
198. e a screwdriver to rotate the jacking screws clockwise a few turns on each screw at a time until they are free of the lugs and the clamp can be removed Note that a narrow screwdriver 4 5 mm max is required for the last few turns when the blade must fit within the diameter of the M6 lug hole Re fitting is the reverse of the above process Side mounting lugs 4 places Clamping plate 6mm Locking nuts 10mm A F two per clamping plate Jacking screw two per clamping plate Figure 11 2c Clamping plate fixing details 11 2 1 Specification The specification for the flush mounting option differs only in the mechanical dimensions given in figures 11d and and in the IP rating which is as follows IP rating without overlay 40 IP rating with overlay Depends on the design of the overlay panel Chapter 11 HA029280 Page 11 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 11 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont a 183 6mm gt 109 1 E lt 160 0 mm MEE 90 mm 143 0 1 UU 133 0 mm 0 Profibus option Fixing holes 6 mm dia 143 0 mm 171 0 mm A A ajeje ira es re Panel cutout A x 144 mm x 144 mm 0 1 Overlay cutout C x C 114 5 mm x 114 5 m offset B from top o
199. e bars Figure 3 6 3c Vertical bargraph display mode Chapter 3 HA029820 Page 3 22 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont HORIZONTAL BARGRAPH This mode shows the current point values as horizontal bars with faceplates The length of each bar is proportional to the current value of its associated point Zero and full scale values appear below the bars Figure 3 6 3d Horizontal bargraph display mode VERTICAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE Standard display This view displays points as though they are being traced on a chart which is rolling downwards The latest data is at the top of the display and the extent of the data shown on the screen is displayed at the bottom left of the screen in hours and minutes For 1 4 VGA XGA displays Only the faceplates associated with the first six 16 group items can be displayed Where there are more than six 16 trends these are plotted without faceplate As a part of the group s configuration it is possible to re order the group contents to define which faceplates are displayed The colour bar at the top of each faceplate is that of its associated trend Scroll bar display An alternative view be obtained by pressing the option key to display the options bar then pressing VIEW This calls the scroll bar display shown in figure 3 6 3f below If no further action is taken trend data will continue to up date normally
200. e been configured for this user Once SAVED Confirm only the password can be changed OK CANCEL Configure the users Attributes as described above then press SAVE The user Identity and Name change to Blue and the Password expiry Figure 6 1 3d New User screen date appears as next day If the user Password is to expire at any period other than that set in the PROPERTIES menu described below this should now be set ADMIN should now be logged out of and the new user logged in and a new password entered Account Properties Min User Id Length 6 Min Password Length 6 Max Login Attempts 72 PROPERTIES P rd Expiry 890 d Similar to the Properties page described in section 4 4 3 this page bs Y ndi depicted with default values in figure 6 1 3e allows the login param User Timeout 60 minutes eters to be set as shown below OK CANCEL Figure 6 1 3e Properties default values Min User ID Length 3to8 Min Password Length 3 t0 8 Passwords must have at least one non alpha character Max Login attempts 1 to 99 The number of attempts at logging in that may be made before the account is disabled Password Expiry 1to180 The password expires after the specified number of days have elapsed since the last time the value was edited User Timeout 1 720 user is logged out after the specified number of minutes has elapsed since previ ous screen acti
201. e g orange paint 2 The multi recipe This file contains references to a single set of equipment and multiple sets of values to be ap plied to that equipment e g orange purple and brown paint 3 multi line recipe This file contains a single set of values that may be applied simultaneously to up to four sets of equipment e g orange paint to line 1 orange paint to line 2 orange paint to line 3 4 A multi line multi recipe This file contains multiple values that may be applied simultaneously to up to four sets of equipment e g orange paint to line 1 purple paint to line 2 brown paint to line 3 green paint to line 4 Figure 3 7a shows a simplistic view of example 4 and figure 3 7b a sample recipe page Notes 1 Incases 1 and 2 above there is only a single line so references to lines do not appear in the user interface 2 number of recipe files that can be loaded simultaneously depends on the application The number of files that can be loaded is defined by the number of sets each with a separate ID If only one set or ID is configured then references to set IDs do not appear at the user interface Paint maker recipe set any line can make any colour Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Green Green
202. e latching or non latching auto acknowledging Latching alarms are annunciated until ac knowledged auto acknowledge alarms are annunciated until the alarm trigger returns to a non alarm state Decisions on which conditions should trigger an Auto Ack Alarm rather than an Acknowledge Alarm latching alarm are made during configuration 2 6 1 Alarm state indication Alarm state is active or inactive acknowledged or not An alarm is triggered becomes active when the value it is monitoring moves outside a pre set value or range of values It becomes inactive when the signal returns to within the preset value or range of values These values are set up during configuration Alarm indicators flash until the alarm has been acknowledged at which time they become illuminated steadily To acknowledge an alarm the alarm pane can be touched followed by ACK Access permission needs to be set Flashing One or more active alarms are present one or more of Red Black which have not been acknowledged Steady One or more active alarms are present all of which have Red been acknowledged Flashing One or more unacknowledged alarms were active but White black have now returned to their non active states Steady There are no active alarms present and there are no non White active unacknowledged alarms present Table 2 6 1 Alarm annunciation summary In summary If the indication is red an active alarm is present and if it is f
203. e not found E32 834A Connection source is not an O P E33 834B Multiple connection to same I P E34 834C Connection destination not I P E35 834D No free connection resources E36 834E Bad conn Src dest block field E37 834F Invalid connection destination E38 8350 Hot start switch is disabled E39 8351 No database was running E40 8352 Real time clock is not running E41 8353 Root block clock is not running E42 8354 Hotstart time was exceeded E43 8355 Root block is invalid E44 8356 Too many control loops E45 8357 Coldstart switch is disabled HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 27 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 3 THE ERROR TEXT DICTIONARY Cont As with the System text dictionary it is possible to 1 Replace any text item Error message in the Error text dictionary with messages customised for a particular in dustry or application and or 2 Internationalise the messages by creating a new dictionary for each of up to ten languages 5 3 1 Editing error messages The Error dictionary supplied is a part of the _system uyl file To customise it the principle is the same as for the System text dictionary 1 In the Error text dictionary find the text to be replaced 2 Note its reference number 3 Key in the reference number and then the text you want to replace it with related by the following syntax E lt N gt lt text gt where N is the reference number of the record you want to change lt text gt
204. e recipe application Chapter 2 HA029280 Page 2 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 1 2 THE STANDARD INTERFACE Cont NAVIGATION KEYS Up Menu key qui etl Right Option key Down Figure 2 1 2c The Navigation keys These touch sensitive printed keys at the bottom of the screen carry the following functions UP Goes up one level of menu hierarchy DOWN Goes down one level or cycles the screen according to context LEFT Jumps across left in the hierarchy at the same level Also moves forward left between successive pages of tabular data Action depends upon context RIGHT Jumps across right in the hierarchy at the same level Also moves back right between successive pages of tabular data Action depends upon context OPTION Brings up a menu or an extra set of keys for options specific to the page on display MENU Brings up the main top level Pop up menu of the hierarchy USER DEFINED KEYS These keys F1 to F6 or F1 to F27 according to model are configurable using User Screen Editor software running in a PC This software available from the Process Supervisor manufacturer includes a full Help system to explain how to carry out user screen configuration A printable html form of this help system is downloadable under part number HA260749U005 29280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 08 Page 2 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 1 3 The opening display Note if the system has
205. eal time clock and SRAM data e g hot start database A flag BadBatt can be set in the Eycon 10 or Eycon 20 block This flag will result in an instrument alarm should the battery volt age falls below the minimum necessary for it to function properly It is recommended that the battery be replaced as soon as possible after the appearance of this warning Caution The user must be at the same electrical potential as the instrument housing when accessing the battery Notes 1 battery backed RAM data is lost during battery change unless power to the unit is maintained during the change 2 Battery type is BR2330 Poly carbonmonofluoride lithium Available from the Visual Supervisor manu facturer under part number PA261095 3 Dispose of exhausted batteries in accordance with local regulations regarding this battery type 9 1 1 Replacement procedure 1 For non Profibus units remove the screw securing the access cover Remove the cover Replace the battery and refit the cover 2 For units fitted with the Profibus option remove the screw securing the Profibus enclosure Carefully separate the enclosure from the instrument taking care not to damage the wire harness which connects the option board to the main board Replace the battery and refit the enclosure Note Drawings not to the same scale Access cover or Profibus enclosure BR2330 Cover retaining screw location
206. ed 029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 29 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 7 2 MONITORING THE RECIPE Cont RECIPE MONITOR PAGE This page is called from the Recipe menu figure 3 7 1b by touching the MONITOR key The monitor page gives recipe values in tabular form as shown below As can be seen the following columns are displayed RCP The recipe variables SP The value held in the recipe file for each variable SP Live The current live database values for each variable Where the SP and SP Live values differ the value is highlighted in red providing a useful diagnostic should a recipe download fail PV Optional values monitored in conjunction with the recipe Might not be present on any recipe file Capture Optional values that would be captured if a recipe CAPTURE is performed Might not be present on any recipe file SP Live Methane 90 6724 90 6724 Nitrogen 3 1284 3 1284 Carbon Dioxide 0 4676 0 4676 Ethane 4 5279 4 5279 Propane 0 8280 0 8280 Water 0 0000 0 0000 HydrogenSulphide 0 0000 0 0000 Hydrogen 0 0000 0 0000 Carbon Monoxide 0 0000 0 0000 Oxygen 0 0000 0 0000 i Butane 0 1037 0 1037 n Butane 0 1563 0 1563 i Pentane 0 0321 0 0321 n Pentane 0 0443 0 0443 n Hexane 0 0393 0 0393 n Heptane 0 0000 0 0000 n Octane 0 0000 0 0000 n Nonane 0 0000 0 0000 n Decane 0 0000
207. ed This is a simple text file in 2 parts a header line and then a single line for each value of interest 5 15 1 Header Line The header line is of the form 1 lt burst_threshold gt lt back_off_period gt lt dynamic_threshold The three optional numeric fields are as follows Burst threshold The number of consecutive database cycles that a value has changed before a burst condition is seen to have occurred Once the burst condition occurs audit trailing will stop to prevent over filling the log until the value stabilises gain Default value 10 Back off period The number of consecutive database cycles that a value must remain unchanged before a burst condition is considered to have cleared and normal audit trailing resumes Default value 10 Dynamic threshold The percentage in integer multiples of database cycles that a value must have changed before a dynamic condition is seen to have occurred Once the dynamic condition occurs audit trailing will stop to prevent over filling the log until the value stabilises gain Default 10 5 15 2 Item Lines Item lines are of the form depicted below Each line identifies a field name to be monitored lt BlockName gt lt FieldName gt HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 63 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 5 29280 5 64 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER
208. elow If recovery account is set to YES this enables a recovery in the event of all ADMIN accounts becoming unusable This requires a maintenance contract with the manufacturer Account Maintenance Recovery Account YES OK CANCEL Figure 4 4 3d Maintenance screen Note See also Chapter 6 if the Auditor Option is fitted Statistics Operating the STATS key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Statistics screen showing how many users have been configured out of the total available For example Users 6 100 means that six of the 100 possible users have been configured Note For small frame instruments a second operation of the Option key is necessary to reveal the STATS key Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 34 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 SETTING UP AND RE SETTING THE INSTRUMENT This section describes the following items Editing Comms parameters Section 4 5 1 Setting the Start up strategy Section 4 5 2 Re setting the clock Section 4 5 3 Changing the language and the data entry formats Section 4 5 4 Setting up the panel display Section 4 5 5 gt WN 4 5 1 Editing communications parameters The editing procedure for Communications Parameters consists of displaying the Comms Setup page and setting up or editing the parameters for each port fitted to the unit The SAVE button is used to save the changes or to cancel
209. em dictionary Parameter specifics are PANEL AGENT PARAMETERS MENU Ids for the agents accessed in this menu SPP Id for the associated SPP MENU SPP MENU Id for the associated SPP MENU Id for the associated HIST APP MGR Bit encoding for displayed keys buttons A Application system 1 UNLOAD 2 SAVE 4 SAVEAS 8 STOP START B Bare system 1 LOAD 2 LOAD AND RUN 4 DELETE Example of a Menu Agent using parameters to specify the agents to be accessed from the menu A1000 MENU 3 4000 2000 9000 3000 5000 1 The bit encoding in the table above for the Application panel version refers to the last parameter in the line A2210 APP MGRA 0 in the corresponding listing PANEL DRIVER DECLARATION Syntax D lt Id gt lt Type gt lt Specifics gt where lt Id gt is the driver identity In a single driver system this has no real significance Type is the mnemonic for the panel driver type Currently the only type supported is QVGA Example D1 QVGA where the 1 in D1 is just an identifier for the driver even if there is only one installed Currently there are no parameters for driver declarations Chapter 5 HA029280 5 44 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 3 LINE TYPES Cont HOME PAGE DECLARATION Syntax H Id Example This defines the Home agent the one active after power up or after HOME timeout which generates the Home page If there is no Home dec
210. emaining fields concern the configuration of the files to be logged To change any of these fields Logging must be selected OFF as described above Archive Int This is the interval at which data is archived during the logging process The maximum rate is 1 file per sec for example 1 file 1 sec 3 files 3 secs If a faster rate than this is entered for example 4 files each 2 secs then the specified rate may not be reached in which case data samples will be lost The default format for this field is hh mm ss but this can be changed see section 4 5 Setting up and re setting the instrument Values are entered using the numeric keyboard that appears on the left of the screen when the field is touched File Type ASCII This human readable file type is for importing into standard commercial spreadsheets Files of this type have extensions of the following type ASC AS1 to AS9 or A01 to A99 Any file name type may be used Uhh UHH files can be interpreted only by Review software UHH files can have only Sequence file names If Hourly or Daily is selected then new Uhh sequence files are created at hour or day boundaries respectively The file extension is Uhh Name Type Text This results in a continuous file that starts when logging is initiated and stops when logging is stopped Hourly Logs data in hourly blocks starting on the hour Each log is written to a different file name Daily Logs data in 24 hour bloc
211. ent identifier can be a name a number a character or a digit but DOS file name rules apply The required segment identifier for example a is keyed in using one or more of these keyboards To clear the entry so far but retaining the keyboard display press the key To cancel the entry and return to the setpoint display press the red cross SAMPLE key Once the segment identifier has been keyed in the Return key is operated to save it The Program Editor page reappears showing the new identifier for the segment 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 4 CHANGING A SEGMENT Cont CHANGING SEGMENT DURATION Caution 1 Changing the duration of ramp at rate segments is not permitted 2 Changing the duration of ramp to segments changes the rate of ramp Therefore before making any such change you should consider the possible ef fect of this upon the operation of the process plant SAMPLE In the dialogue box press the Duration field A numeric keyboard appears with the current duration displayed at the top in hh mm ss format The format can be changed as described in section 4 5 4 Changing the language and date formats Key in the required duration Once the correct duration is keyed in the Return key is used to save it Baia ae eae 00 06 00 00 50 00 00 35 00
212. entire field is specified e g PIDI ALARMS a bitwise OR of all alarms is performed Note The subfield Combined is also accessible This is derived from the individual alarms using a differ ent algorithm 3 It is mandatory to supply size information for all variables except when an enumeration list has been given in which case the width defaults to that of the longest string 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 53 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 9 2 Alarm forms Note Ensure correct operation of each customised IDs as any error in the ID will not be reported as an alarm in the LPTDEV block For any application with printer support there can be an optional alarm message formatting form UYT file The file syntax is similar to the UYF file described in section 5 9 1 above to which reference should be made if neces sary UYT files are used to customise the way in which alarm and Event messages are printed in reports These messages are invoked when certain actions occur within the instrument Each alarm or event has an identifier assigned to it so that the correct type of message can be selected The various identifiers are listed in table 5 9 2a along with their applicability to various system variables which can be included in the report These system variables are listed in table 5 9 2b In the case where a system variable is inapplicable a blank is displayed Applicable to Invok n A
213. ents 4hrs 30mins since start of logging DHMS Relative 00032000 Days Hours Minutes Seconds since start of logging The example represents 3hrs 20mins since start of logging Table 4 2 1 Date formats for logs HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 2 2 FTP Transfer The FTP transfer mechanism allows the instrument to act as a FTP client to up to 3 FTP servers for the purpose of transferring the files on the internal archive to a remote computer If more than 1 FTP server is configured then the transfer may be configured to operate in either multiple copy or single copy mode MULTIPLE COPY MODE Every file is transferred to every configured FTP server so that every relevant remote computer receives every file SINGLE COPY MODE In this mode only one copy is made of each file on the internal archive The instrument attempts to send this file to the first configured server but if the transfer fails then it will attempt the second and if that fails then the third if config ured CONFIGURATION YU TERT Archive FTP Servers Revision 18 01 04 06 11 58 44 ADMIN Single copy Appears only if Auditor 149 121 128 150 option enabled E M Password Es Directory EEPQROO eae 2 3 Host ONZE Enabled MES User ELR2 Password Directory i B 3 3 ost 149 121 128 231 Enabled MES User
214. ephone 34 91 661 6001 Fax 34 91 661 9093 E mail info es eurotherm com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB Telephone 46 40 384500 Fax 46 40 384545 E mail info se eurotherm com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte Schweiz AG Telephone 41 44 787 1040 Fax 41 44 787 1044 E mail info ch eurotherm com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Eurotherm Limited Telephone 44 1903 268500 Fax 44 1903 265982 E mail info uk eurotherm com Web www eurotherm co uk U S A Leesburg VA Eurotherm Inc Telephone 1 703 443 0000 Fax 1 703 669 1300 E mail info us eurotherm com Web www eurotherm com ED54 invensyse EUROTHERMe EUROTHERM LIMITED Faraday Close Durrington Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL Telephone 44 0 1903 268500 Facsimile 44 0 1903 265982 e mail info uk eurotherm com Website http www eurotherm co uk Specification subject to change without notice Eurotherm Limited HAO29280 5 24241 Invensys Eurotherm the Eurotherm logo Chessell EurothermSuite Mini8 EPower Eycon Eyris and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc its subsidiaries and affiliates All other brands may be trademarks of their respec tive owners
215. er than 1mm 2 Cutan aperture 144mm x 144mm small frame or 290mm x 290mm large frame in the panel If more than one instrument is to be mounted in the panel the recommended minimum spacings are as shown in figure 11 2d 11 2e 3 From the rear of the panel offer the front of the instrument to the aperture and secure the clamping plates to the panel using fixings appropriate to the panel type fixings A and 4 Use the jacking screws to adjust the position of each corner of the Visual Supervisor such that the touch screen surface is flush with the front surface of the panel Adjustments may need to be made more than once for each screw When the adjustment process is complete use the 6 mm locking nuts 10 mm across flats to secure the jacking screws 5 Complete installation by fitting an overlay see figures 11 2d 11 2e for overlay cutout dimensions Clamping Rear face of plate panel gt Jacking screw Panel cutout 4 Figure 11 25 Adjust each corner Large frame unit shown small frame unit similar Large frame unit shown small frame unit similar 029280 Chapter 11 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 11 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 11 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont To remove a clamping plate usually to change from top bottom fixing to left right fixing 1 Remove the jacking screw locking nuts and retain them for later re assembly 2 Us
216. er than the period of time already elapsed in that segment other parameters can be edited as normal 2 The PREVIEW facility on the PROGRAMMER menu displays a profile of the loaded program over its full duration and target values can be displayed at any point in time It is recommended that frequent use be made of PREVIEW when editing a program in order to check that the edits have produced the intended profile 3 For systems with the Auditor option fitted an edited program must be saved before it is run HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK EDITING A PROGRAM Cont Before editing can start the Program Editor page must be accessed as described in section 4 1 2 Once the editor page has been accessed the program can be edited in the following ways Changing a setpoint section 4 1 3 By changing the type of ramp to it By changing its value Changing a segment section 4 1 4 By changing its identifier By changing its duration Inserting or deleting a segment section 4 1 5 Inserting a segment Deleting a segment Changing the Hold Back properties for any analogue setpoint section 4 1 6 Choosing the setpoint Changing the Holdback mode Changing the Holdback value Changing program properties section 4 1 7 Changing the name of a program Changing the rate units for a program Choosing an action to be taken at the end of each run Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 2 Issue 5 Mar 08
217. ers can be selected from all three keyboards as required Use up arrow key to select alternative keyboards 8 Enter the first character of the password It appears in the black 252 10 Security Access EEE EE EERE aj sjd f g confirmation bar at top left and the cursor moves under the next space Enter the next character and so on Erroneous characters can be deleted by positioning the cursor under the relevant character and pressing the C key Alterna tively to return to the Security Access page press the red cross key 9 When the confirmation bar shows the correct password press the Return key RESET SED ioi Security Access The Security Access page reappears unchanged from step 6 Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level LOCKED New Level OPERATOR Password CHANGE 10 Press CHANGE RESET ED Security Access The display blanks momentarily and returns showing the selected Enter required level and password level OPERATOR ENGINEER or COMMISSION in the Current Level field as well as the new level field New Level OPERATOR If not an incorrect password must have been entered Check that the Password password is correct for the level selected in step 4 and then repeat from step 3 onward CHANGE Chapter 2 HA029280
218. es 5 3 S T Safety notes hd ehe 1 1 T500 LINtOOlS inei 8 1 SAV OG cider re a a iate 4 19 4 22 tes 8 15 Utility eR DH ces 8 10 8 17 SCan is aiid aisle ek ested 8 16 Talk through uuo died tcs 4 36 SGHEDULE nuces 2 8 Master slave esses 8 13 Scheduling a program 3 4 Terminal Configurator Screen saver configuration 4 44 Modbus Configuration Security access 6 3 TABLES command 8 15 Segment Terminal Mode essen 8 2 Changing duration 4 8 itp 3 11 Changing the identifier 4 7 Names T 4 16 eel 4 9 The dictionary eese 5 3 ie i eee o UE petere 4 8 TICK RAG ceu e dede 8 16 sje 3 7 Time display in Alarm history 3 13 Timing 4 14 Time format aec teens 4 48 Serial COMMS connection 1 7 e diede 8 14 Serial master slave 8 13 Display brightness
219. es 0 to 15 ComsErr2 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 16 to 31 ComsErr3 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 32 to 47 ComsErr4 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 48 to 63 ComsErr5 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 64 to 79 ComsErr6 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 80 to 95 ComsErr7 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 96 to 111 ComsErr8 Slave comms error bits for slave addresses 112 to 125 Alarms Software software error has occurred BadFile The GWF is corrupt or missing BadDBF The GWFis not associated with the current database file dbf BadCfg Profibus configuration error ImgSize The process image size for one or more slaves is too big HWError Profibus hardware error ComsErr An OR of all ComsErr values from all configured slaves TooMany No more GW instances available TableFlt One or more tables in this GW instance has an internal fault BadPort A mismatch in the port configuration between the GW configuration and the system opt file in the target PendSave The memory image of this GW instance has been modified probably by the removal of invalid block references since it was loaded from the GWF A save of the GWF must be performed in order to synchronise the file with the memory image Spare Spare Spare Spare Combined Gives the priority level of the highest priority active alarm in the block Chapter 10 029280 Page 10 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERV
220. ese drawings are not to the same scale System Alarm Pane Program Pane Page title bar Main pane MENU KEY OPTION KEY User definable keys F6 Figure 2 1 2a 1 4 VGA layout HAO29280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 2 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 1 2 THE STANDARD INTERFACE Cont 3 5 A VERRE AI eT Page title bar Main pane MENU 202 e ref e Len ion EID ui OPTION KEY ES 219 _F20 T ms me e Figure 2 1 2b XGA screen layout MAIN PANE This area contains the keys menus pick lists dialogue boxes windows and pages that make up the standard menu system of the Visual Supervisor PROGRAM PANE This displays information about the state of the program that is currently loaded or running ALARM PANE This displays alarm signals and messages LOGGING PANE For XGA units only touching this area calls the logging menu to the main pane The logging pane does not appear on 1 4VGA units ACCESS PANE For XGA units only displays the currently logged in user Touching this area calls the access menu to the main pane The access pane does not appear on 1 4VGA units RECIPE PANE For XGA units fitted with the recipe software option only this pane shows the status of the current recipe line See chapters 3 and 4 for details of th
221. et may be used Chapter 5 HAO29280 Page 5 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont NO CONTEXT CLASS MAX TEXT 1 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 2 OIFL DIALOG TITLE 28 FILE UPDATE 3 OIFL DIALOG TEXT 80 The User Page file has changed The panel system will now reload 4 GLOBAL HIDE CHAR 1 5 GLOBAL UPDATE_ERROR 1 6 GLOBAL DISP_ERROR 1 12 OIFL OIFL_ERROR 20 OIFL ERROR 13 OIFL OIFL_ERROR 20 BAD FILE 14 OIFL OIFL_ERROR 20 BAD LINE 15 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 BAD EOF 16 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 MEMORY 17 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 SYNTAX 18 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 RANGE 19 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 NAME 20 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 DICTIONARY 21 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 TYPE 22 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 ACTION 31 ALMMENU MENU_TITLE 16 Alarms 32 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ALARMS 33 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ACK 34 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ACK ALL 35 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 HISTORY 36 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 SUMMARY 37 ALMMENU DIALOG_TEXT 80 This will acknowledge every alarm 38 ALMMENU BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 39 ALMMENU BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 40 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ABORT 41 ALH PAGE_TITLE 20 Alarm History 42 ALH LEGEND 11 ALM HIST 43 ALH ALH_TITLE 8 TYPE 44 ALH ALH_TITLE 8 ACTIVE 45 ALH ALH_TITLE 8 CLEAR 46 ALH LEGEND 11 FILTER 47 ALH ALH_FILTER 8 ALL 48 ALH ALH_FILTER 8 ALARMS 49 ALH ALH_FILTER 8 AREA 50 ALH ALH_FILTER 8 GROUP 51 ALH ALH FILTER 8 BLOCK 52 ALH ALH FILTER 8 EVENTS 53 ALH FILTER 8 SYSTEM 54 ALH DIALOG TEXT 80
222. et to 7096 or lower and that the screen saver be used if the instrument is on but not continuously manned Pressing either the Brightness or Saver Brightness fields brings up a pick list of alternative percentage values staged at 10 intervals Choose the required value s then Press Return The pick list disappears To save the selection press SAVE minutes X 4 B CANCEL Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 44 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 5 SETTING UP THE PANEL DISPLAY Cont 8 TIME OUTS t MEE minutes Pressing any of the other fields brings up a numeric keyboard from which 2 munutocs new values for the various time outs can be entered 0 minutes After each entry press Return The keyboard disappears To save the value press SAVE DATA ENTRY Note The following adjustment applies only to XGA large screen units The size of the Data Entry pop up can be reduced by selecting Small for the item Data entry HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 45 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 6 CLONING AN INSTRUMENT Cloning an instrument consists of copying data between instruments via a USB Bulk storage device in order to repli cate either the characteristics of the instrument or of the application or of both It can also be used to backup dat
223. ethane loopll pv GasConc2 Methane loop21 pv 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen GasConcl Nitrogen loop12 pv GasConc2 Nitrogen loop22 pv 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide 1 GasConc2 CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConcl Ethane GasConc2 Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConcl Propane GasConc2 Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasConcl Water GasConc2 Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConcl Hsulphid GasConc2 Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConcl Hydrogen GasConc2 Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConcl CrbMonOx GasConc2 CrbMon0x 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen 1 GasConc2 Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConcl iButane GasConc2 iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 n Butane GasConcl nButane GasConc2 nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 i Pentane GasConcl iPentane GasConc2 iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 n Pentane GasConcl nPentane GasConc2 nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 n 1 GasConc2 nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 2b UYR file example with Capture Variables 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 57 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 10 2 MORE COMPLEX FILES Cont FILES WITH OPTIONAL MONITOR VARIABLES To generate a recipe file with monitor points fo
224. f panel cutout 18 3 mm 137 5 Vertical panels only Min inter unit spacing vertical 50 mm Min inter unit spacing horizontal 50 mm Note Ensure that the ambient temperature does not exceed 50 degrees Celsius Figure 11 2d Small frame unit mechanical dimensions HAO29280 Chapter 11 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 11 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 11 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont lt 318 0 289 0 mm 931 mm 140 0 mm gt 3 lt 74 0 Se MEME V 2 EE O J DE Y oe bx Profibus 6 mm dia option E E ap EEE HE E 625 aS NM m LION fe e rs re e EE n Panel thickness Max 13 mm Min 1 mm Panel cutout A x A 290 mm x 290 mm 0 1 Jacking screw 4 places G3 m mag E Overlay cutout C x D C 240 mm D 250mm offset B from top of panel cutout 30 mm Note Ensure that the ambient temperature Vertical panels only does not exceed 50 degrees Celsius Min inter unit spacing vertical 50 mm Min inter unit spacing horizontal 50 mm Figure 11 2e Large frame unit mechanical dimenssions Chapter 11 029
225. f the Language field is touched a pick list appears showing which lan guages are available Select the required language and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Language field shows the selected language DATE FORMAT If the Date Format field is touched a pick list of the available Date For mats appears Select the required format and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Date Format field shows the selected format TIME FORMAT If the Time Format field is touched a pick list of the available time for mats appears Select the required format and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Time Format field shows the selected time format If the Duration Format field is touched a pick list of the available time duration formats appears Select the required format and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Duration Format field shows the selected format RESET DD MM YY FRENCH GERMAN SPANISH AGE Internationalise DD MM YY DD MM YY Internationalise DD MM YY 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 4 4 43 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 5 Setting up the panel display The following items can be ed
226. flashing underline cursor _ at the field using the User defined names arrow keys then proceed as described below for the different data field types Some data fields display further nested levels of data when entered In such cases press lt Enter gt to access a deeper level press lt Escape gt to return to a higher level Note that editing a database during runtime is possible but is not recommended Stopping the database is described in section 8 4 6 below Type in a name 8 characters max and press lt Enter gt to overwrite existing data To insert characters locate the cursor at the character to follow and type the insertions A beep warns that excess characters have been typed To abort the current entry and leave the database unchanged move the cursor to a field above or below the current field before pressing lt En ter gt or press the lt Escape gt key Note that remote database names entered in the Compound field must be prefixed by an equals sign which is included in the character count Pressing lt Enter gt with the cursor on the first character of the Block or Compound fields before starting to type accesses a Full Description page Figure 8 4 1c shows an example This page gives general information about the block and has a common format FULL DESCRIPTION Block PID_1 Type PID Refresh rate 0 1040 Server number 2 Compound Alpha Rate ms Figure 8 4 1 FULL DESCR
227. following sections 3 1 Running a program 3 2 Holding and aborting a program 3 3 Monitoring a program 3 4 Logging data 3 5 Responding to alarms 3 6 Area and group displays 3 7 Downloading recipes All the descriptions assume that access at Operator level has already been gained as described in Section 2 8 above If at any point the display shows results that differ from those that the instructions tell you to expect then the Menu key at the bottom of the screen can be operated to call the Pop up menu and the beginning of the task or another facil ity if required 3 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM There are three ways to run a program depending upon requirements 1 RUN Runs the entire program now 2 RUN FROM Runs the program now but from a specified point after its start 3 SCHEDULE Runs the entire program at a specified time 3 1 1 Running a program now ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS USER SCREENS 1 In the row of navigation keys at the bottom of the screen press the Menu key to call the Pop up menu 2 Gy P The Program pane displays RESET if there is no program BROGR AMMER key 1 loaded at the moment or IDLE if a program has already been Press menu key selected 2 Select PROGRAMMER Programmet PROGRAMS SCHEDULE The Programmer window appears offering two choices PRO GRAMS and SCHEDULE 3 Select PROGRAMS 029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 1 VISUAL SU
228. g SP Names field re formats the display to permit names up to 16 LOAD SAVE SAVE AS NEW characters long but this will reduce the number of cells visible The Wide Cells field widens each cell reducing the number of segments on display to allow eight character values and values in scientific notation configured in the application to be displayed Notes 1 The settings for segment timing are preserved across power failure 2 Itis possible to switch between settings at any time as this has no effect on the actual program merely on how the data is presented Chapter 4 HA029280 4 14 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 2 LOGGING GROUPS OF DATA A group is a set of up to 16 data values that are recorded to one file The data can be drawn from the same source or from different sources If from the same source the data can be recorded at different data rates with each data rate assigned to a different group It is possible to record just one group or several groups simultaneously If several groups are to be recorded simulta neously the groups can be saved to one file or to separate files Archiving to one or more remote computers using FTP is described in section 4 2 2 below Typically logging groups of data is used for 1 General audit records for subsequent analysis with MS Excel for instance 2 Quality control of product and plant 3 Monitoring staff perfor
229. g a range of up to 1000 records The sections are allocated as follows 1001 1999 Recipe set number 1 2001 2999 Recipe set number 2 3001 3999 Recipe set number 3 4001 4999 Recipe set number 4 Also the section 1 999 represents the recipe set currently on view and is thus a duplicate of one of the other sections The following table indicates how the records are allocated in each recipe set To get the actual record from recipe set number n simply add 1000 n For example to get the record of the user who last edited the recipe 3 uyr file use record number 3014 Record Value 1 File name excluding uyr 11 Revisions number of uyr file 14 Name of user who last edited the uyr file 15 Returns YES if the file has been edited but not saved or NO if not edited 111 Name of line number 1 112 Name of recipe selected on line 1 113 Name of recipe active on line 1 114 State of recipe on line 1 121 to 124 As 111 to 114 but for line 2 131 to 134 As 111 to 114 but for line 3 141 to 144 As 111 to 114 but for line 4 151 to 154 As 111 to 114 but for line 5 161 to 164 As 111 to 114 but for line 6 171 to 174 As 111 to 114 but for line 7 181 to 184 As 111 to 114 but for line 8 301 to 316 Names of recipes 1 to 16 respectively 401 to 480 Names of variable numbers 1 to 80 respectively HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 59 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 13 THE BATCH DICTIONARY The batch dictio
230. ghest middle and lowest inputs or median of 2 3 or 4 SWITCH Single pole double throw switch for analogue signals TAG Specifies a user task loop tagname selected from list of eight tags HA029280 Appendix A Issue 5 Mar 08 Page A 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK FUNCTION BLOCKS SUPPORTED Cont CATEGORY BLOCK FUNCTION SPP SPP_CTRL Monitors schedules and controls program running SPP_DIG Wires out digital setpoints from the setpoint program SPP_EXT Programmer extended functions SPP_RAMP Local Ramp TIMING DELAY Delay for dead time applications RATE_ALM Up down rate alarm applied to PV OP held at last non alarm value RATE_LMT Rate limiter and ramp generator SEQ Multi segment slope level time 15 O P digitals SEQE SEQ extender TIMEDATE Clock and calendar event TIMER Timer TOTAL Totaliser integrator for analogue variable TOT_CON Totalisation connector block TPO Time proportioning o p block Produces a pulse stream with mark space ratio proportional to its analogue input value Appendix A HA029280 Page A 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVSOR HANDBOOK APPENDIX B OPTIONS UPDATE B1 INTRODUCTION The Software Options Utility allows the software options fitted in the instrument to be changed as follows 1 The utility provides a Change code 2 The user contacts the supplier with the Change Code 3 The supplier provides a further Validation code which is used to enable the relevant options
231. gure 8 4 Configurator Main menu Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 8 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 1 MAKE Installs function blocks in the control strategy Note that a running database must be stopped before any blocks can be added to it Stopping and starting the database is described in section 8 4 6 Select MAKE to display the SET MENU the controller s resident library of block categories detailed in the LIN Product Manual Part number HA082375U003 Note that every strategy must contain a header block Eycon 10 or Eycon 20 the only block initially available for a new strategy Select a category to list its blocks Figure 8 4 1a shows part of the screen dis play when LOGIC is selected as an example LOGIC Select type gt PULSE AND4 OR4 XOR4 Figure 8 4 1a Logic category menu upper part Select the block to be installed The block Overview appears listing the block parameters default values and units in a double 3 column format Figure 8 4 1b shows the default overview for the PID block as an example BLOCK OVERVIEW Refer to Figure 8 4 1b which shows the main features of a typical block overview used to monitor and update block parameters Overviews can also be accessed via the COPY and INSPECT main menu options The overview is equivalent to a LINtools Specification menu and its fields have the same meanings although data entry is different Note Parameters being updated by i
232. h 3 Home and Root page definitions beginning with H and R respectively 4 Initial page definition beginning with 5 Comment lines beginning with a space character Notes 1 The system will ignore anything it cannot interpret rather than crash or hang up 2 The default pnl file is a CSV file with lines terminated by either LF or CR LF 3 The character V placed at the end of a line combines two lines into one logical line Repeated use will combine several displayed or printed lines into one logical line If logical lines are more than 255 charac ters long the 255th character is overwritten by subsequent characters 4 Linetypes may appear in any order 5 Lines beginning with any other character other than A D H or R are ignored effectively making them comments 6 The Comment line type is self explanatory explanations of the other line types follow PANEL AGENT DECLARATION Syntax A lt Id gt lt Type gt lt Access gt lt WrAccess gt lt Pane gt lt Specifics gt where all parameters beyond lt Type gt are optional PARAMETER MEANING lt Id gt is the Agent Id specified as a decimal number from 1000 to 2 1 or hex if preceded by X Ids 1 999 are reserved for user pages defined in the user screen OFL file lt Type gt is a mnemonic for the panel agent type For example MENU ALM_HIST and so on These are listed later Access gives the security level re
233. h 170 APPSUM PAGE_TITLE 20 Appl n Summary 171 APPSUM LEGEND 11 APP SUM 172 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Application 173 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Machine State 174 APPSUM PARA 24 Memory Usage 180 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 OFF 181 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 RESET 182 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 IDLE 183 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 RUNNING 184 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 STOPPED 185 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 ERROR 189 APPSUM ITWM TITLE 16 Ctrl VoIDB 190 APPSUM ITEM UNITS 9 kB 191 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Control DB 192 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Programmer 193 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 SFC DB 194 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 SFC ST 195 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Modbus slave 196 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Modbus master 197 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 transient 198 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Profibus Master 200 STARTUP PAGE TITLE 20 Startup Strategy 201 STARTUP LEGEND 11 STARTUP 202 STARTUP ITEM TITLE 18 Hot Start 203 STARTUP ITEM TITLE 18 Warm Start 204 STARTUP ITEM TITLE 18 Cold Start 205 STARTUP ITEM TITLE 18 Startup State 206 STARTUP ITEM TITLE 18 Hot start time 207 STARTUP ITEM TITLE 18 Brown out time 220 COMMS PAGE TITLE 20 Comms Setup 221 COMMS LEGEND 18 COMMS 222 COMMS DIALOG TEXT 80 The settings specified are invalid 223 COMMS DIALOG TITLE 28 Hardware check 224 COMMS DIALOG TEXT 80 IMPORTANT Ensure comms cables are unplugged before pressing OK to continue Chapter 5 29280 5 6 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5
234. hapter 11 for details of the Flush mounting option 10 2 2 Pinout details Figure 10 2 2 shows pinout details for the Profibus 9 way D type connector 029280 Chapter 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 10 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 10 2 INSTALLATION Cont 6 7 mm 144 0 mm n 1095 mm P M 86 8 mm oO i Profibus connector 9 S m Fixing Clip T one each side __ E E F4 F5 F6 ZI oe Protective conductor terminal M4 Panel thickness Max 22 mm Min 2 mm Flash card Panel cutout 138 mm x 138 mm both 0 1 mm Ethernet Serial comms Profibus 7 137 5 mm b 154 5 mm D 170 5 d PANEL MOUNTING DETAILS Installed panel angle Vertical panels only Minimum inter unit spacing 50 mm vertical or horizontal Note where multiple units are mounted in close proximity with one another steps must be taken to ensure that the resulting ambient temperature does not exceed the speci fied maximum operating temperature of 50 degrees Celsius Figure 10 2 1a Mechanical installation small frame unit Chapter 10 029280 10 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 10 2 INSTALLATION Cont
235. he second register is ignored Chapter 8 Page 8 18 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 5 TABLES Cont MOD Write This column allows selected values in the LIN database to be prevented from being written to their associated Modbus registers or bits Highlight the required MOD Write field and press lt Enter gt to see a menu of options Enable and Protect Select Protect to write protect the Modbus register bit s or Enable to allow overwriting Notes 1 To protect an entire table for a Modbus Gateway facility operating in Master mode the write function codes 5 and 15 or 6 and 16 can be disabled in the tables list 2 For a 32 bit register pair MOD Write applies only to the first register The MOD Write value of the second register is ignored Value This column shows the current 16 bit value of the field in 4 digit hexadecimal representation Value is read only HA029280 Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 8 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK This page is deliberately left bank Chapter 8 29280 8 20 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE This section shows how to replace the battery and how to calibrate the touch screen 9 1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT The battery replacement period depends on the cumulative length of time over which the instrument is left without supply power The battery maintains the r
236. he Pop up menu which offers a choice of submenus as depicted below ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER RECIPE Figure 2 2 1 The Standard Interface top level ACCESS SYSTEM and ALARMS appear on every instrument others appear only if configured Of these PRO GRAMMER and RECIPE are the most frequently used Below this menu level there are usually two or three further levels of functions that give users successively more detailed control of different aspects of programs applications and the instrument itself 2 2 2 Information entry Information entry is by touching areas on the screen with a finger the eraser end of a pencil or similar Hard sharp or pointed implements such as pens keys and fingernails must never be used or damage will be caused to the touch screen The keys and other items of the Standard Interface which appear in the Main Pane are not all touch sensitive and those that are sensitive active are not active all the time You can tell which items are active at any time by their pale yellow background and you can tell which active item was the last one you selected by its bright yellow back ground 29280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 08 2 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 3 THE POP UP MENU NOTE In the following description of the Pop up menu and indeed of all the screen displays throughout this manual it is important to note that almost everything is open to customi
237. hed alarms cactus teu 6 2 Cloning 4 47 Capture recipe n 4 54 Importing eic tetris 4 47 Chanain SAVING x idet e etr 4 22 a Segment eee pei 4 7 Deletion eene 4 23 Die 4 41 Loading and Running 4 23 Date Time format 4 43 Management 4 19 from Access levelto User ID 4 30 Manager Pag ec eee 4 20 Hot Cold Start settings 4 40 Reloading nnt Rein 4 52 ates 4 43 3 Setpoint value 4 6 Summary 4 20 6 54 4 22 29280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK C Cont D Cont Clock Setup page 4 41 Deploy iit enn deed eit dete 6 7 Gloningrs s hic ha aute eet me tk e 4 46 Diagnostic gos get saa apes OE 8 15 All data uns 4 49 Dictionary Application data 4 47 Error text 5 27 Instrument 4 48 EVent text naeh Shei eee A 5 29 System data uhren 4 48 EE 5 1 emassa 4 40 Programmer text 5 34 Commission level
238. hich are usually two state Boolean variables such as ON OFF and TRUE FALSE 5 2 THE SYSTEM TEXT DICTIONARY The System text dictionary holds all the text displayed by the instrument s Standard Interface except for the follow ing 1 Error messages 2 Event messages 3 Segment type names and text in menus and column headers Of these Error messages and Event messages are held in their own dictionaries and can be customised through those Commands segment type names and text in menus and column heads are held elsewhere and cannot be customised In customising the System dictionary it is possible to 1 replace any text item with text for a particular industry or application and or 2 the text can be internationalised by creating new dictionaries for each of up to ten languages 5 2 1 File structure In the listing of the System text dictionary in section 5 2 4 the column header running throughout is NO CONTEXT CLASS MAX TEXT No Stands for REFERENCE NUMBER CONTEXT Describes the application to which the text relates For example STARTUP COMMS or CLOCK CLASS Describes the type of text For example title of a dialogue box button text or error message MAX The maximum permissible length of the replacement text in number of characters TEXT The default text that the instrument is supplied with for this item Chapter 5 HA029280 Page 5 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 2 Editing system text The
239. hing the current Id value then keying in the required value SUMMARY APPLN lt CLONING Press APPLN key Press APP MGR Appl n Manager File Colours State RUNNING STOP 6 ape save Press UNLOAD 5 Press STOP Appl n Manager File Colours State STOPPED SAVE AS STOP Appl n Manager File SUMMARY ACCESS APP MGR SETUP MAINT EVTLOG l LOAD LD DELETE Press MAINT Press menu key 9 Maintenance Press CLONING FILE MGR BATCH MAINT SOFT OPTS BATCH MAINT Figure 4 10 Batch Maintenance access using the pop up keyboard which appears This facility must be used with caution as if multiple log files with the same batch ID are imported into Review soft ware it will view them as the same batch Unless this is the intention any records of previous batches with the same ID should be removed from Review before the ID is reset Chapter 4 Page 4 56 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 5 CUSTOMISING 5 1 This chapter describes how to customise the Standard Interface it consists of the following sections 5 1 Introduction 5 9 Form files 5 2 The System text dictionary 5 10 Recipe files 5 3 The Error text dictionary 5 11 The writeable dictiona
240. hown as modes Mode EE None means no limits which means no Hold Back Low specifies a limit below the current setpoint value If the PV falls below this limit then the program will compensate by holding the setpoint steady until the PV has recovered to exceed the limit High specifies a limit above the current setpoint value If the PV exceeds LOW this limit then the program will compensate by holding the setpoint steady HIGH until the PV has fallen below the limit BIGHSLON High amp Low sets both limits Choose the required limit e g LOW It highlights Press the Return key The picklist disappears Holdback Press DONE Ane T Mode The dialogue box disappears Value CHANGING HOLDBACK VALUES Press the Value field yellowed A numeric keyboard appears showing the current value in a black confir mation bar at the top Key in the required value and press the Return key The keyboard disappears Press DONE The dialogue box disappears Chapter 4 029280 4 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 7 Changing program properties In the Program Editor page press the SP Setpoint cell at top left The Properties window appears prompting for Name Rate Units At End Iterations From this screen the possible tasks are To change the
241. iButane GasConc iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 n Butane GasConc nButane GasConc nButane GasConc nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 i Pentane GasConc iPentane GasConc iPentane GasConc iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 n Pentane GasConc nPentane GasConc nPentane GasConc nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 n Hexane GasConc nHexane GasConc nHexane GasConc nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 2c Single line file with Monitor and capture 5 11 WRITABLE DICTIONARY The writable dictionary holds text that may be used for the batch system or in reports This dictionary is different from all other dictionaries in that it can be modified from the Batch screen or from a user screen The values of these texts may optionally be initialised from the USER UYL file described in section 5 5 above AII values are preserved across power failure but any values in the UYL file will over write those on power up The dictionary holds up to 120 records each of up to 40 characters in length Chapter 5 Page 5 58 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 12 THE RECIPE DICTIONARY The recipe dictionary holds text that originates from the recipe files uyr It may not be initialised from a uyl file The text held by this dictionary changes whenever uyr files are loaded or modified from the front panel The dictionary is divided up into sections one for each recipe set each spannin
242. ing the STOP SAVE START UNLOAD LOAD LD RUN and DELETE keys that appear at the foot of the Application Manager page UNLOAD and DELETE For many processes the Visual Supervisor will control one application all the time This will be loaded and run at commissioning or soon after and thereafter will never be unloaded and will never be de leted For many processes therefore UNLOAD and DELETE will not be used STOP SAVE and START processes will use STOP SAVE and START because an application has to be stopped to save application data to preserve cold start values if they need changing This is true even if the process runs only one application START simply restarts an application after a SAVE LOAD and LD RUN processes require a LOAD or LD RUN at least once These tasks are described under the following headings Displaying the Application Summary page section 4 3 1 Displaying the Application Manager page section 4 3 2 Stopping an application section 4 3 3 Saving application data section 4 3 4 Unloading an application section 4 3 5 Loading an application or Loading and running section 4 3 6 Deleting an application section 4 3 7 Function Block Manager section 4 3 8 If the very first application is being loaded and run on an instrument LOAD and then START or just LD RUN will be used If an application is already running and it is to be replaced by another the sequence from Displaying the Application
243. into the instrument The use of extension USB leads may compromise the unit s ESD compliance 6 There are no specific insulation requirements for external circuitry 7 Inorder to comply with CE requirements the Protective conductor terminal must be connected to a protective conductor SYMBOLS USED ON THE EQUIPMENT LABELLING One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the unit s labelling Refer to the manual for instructions Ethernet connector Protective conductor USB connector terminal This instrument Serial communications for dc supply only connector For environmental reasons this unit must be recycled before its age exceeds the number of Precautions against static elec trical discharge must be taken when handling this unit years shown in the circle Caution When accessing the battery or setting DIP switches etc the operator must be at the same electrical potential A as the casing of the instrument Ave When fitting USB devices both the operator and the device must be at the same electrical potential as the casing of the instrument HA029280 Chapter 1 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 1 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE The unit may be cleaned using a lint free cloth moistened if necessary with a weak detergent solution Aggressive cleaning materials such as isopropyl alcohol may not be used as they damage the touch screen The average life of the
244. inuous development and product improvement The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document y Invensys e EUROTH ER Restriction of Hazardous Substances RoHS Product group Eycon 10 Eycon 20 Table listing restricted substances Chinese FA 8 AB EMI SUE Eycon 20 id Afr SRR X 11363 2006 PHEREN SonUSSEBCEM ELE ERAN S195 EIS ERIBSITI1363 2006 29 9 English Restricted Materials Table Product Toxic and hazardous substances and elements Eycon 10 Eycon 20 X Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 X Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Approval Name Position pae Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager Moule Cas lola 157 6 2007 140294700700 CN23195 Issue 1 Feb 07 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CHAPTERS Section Page INSTALLATION theca ei te n
245. is the replacement text For example 7 not found 5 3 2 Creating new language error text Any additional language dictionaries that are created must be named _system0 uyl systeml uyl _system2 uyl and so on up to _system9 uyl one dictionary for each language to be implemented PROCEDURE In Excel or any similar spreadsheet program 1 Write a first column of reference numbers from E1 to at least E45 2 In second column assign code numbers 3 In the third column write the error message in the required language Chapter 5 29280 5 28 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY On delivery the Event text dictionary is as listed below As with the System and Error dictionaries it is possible to Replace any text item Event message in the Event dictionary with messages customised for a particular industry or application and or 2 Internationalise the messages by creating a new dictionary for each of up to ten languages V11 to V13 take the User ID V110 to 116 take the recipe file name or the recipe name No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA XGA V1 Clock set 16 characters 16 characters V3 Started N A 16 characters Note 1 v4 Ack all 16 characters 16 characters V5 Access Save N A 16 characters V6 Access Updated N A 16 characters Note 1 V7 Timeout 8 characters 16 characters V8 Retired User N A 16 characters Note 1 V9 Disq
246. isted for longer than a preset time Unless the alarm is set up to take some action the Brown out time acts only as a warning in case some special strategies exist that might need implementing in those circumstances or that have been set up to run automatically If power totally fails but returns within the interval specified as Brown out time then the instrument treats it as a brown out If it returns after the Brown out time then a restart is either possible or certain depending on how soon after the time limit it returns The type of restart attempted depends on the programmed strategy CHANGING START UP VALUES Changing Hot Cold start settings Hot Start YES In the Startup Strategy page press the Startup setting to be changed Edit Cold Start YES the entry using the pick list which appears then press Return The pick Hot start time 00000071 list disappears and the Startup Strategy page displays the new value Brown out time 00050070 SAVE CANCEL Changing time out values IDLE 22 21 52 Startup Strategy In the Startup Strategy page press the time out value to be changed Key YES in the new value using the pop up keyboard then press Return The field YESI shows the new value 00 10 00 00 05 00 CANCEL Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 40 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 3 Resetting the cloc
247. it exceeded 476 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM LOAD SAVE ERROR 477 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 478 SPP MENU TITLE 11 Programmer 479 SPP LEGEND 11 MONITOR 480 SPP LEGEND 11 PROGRAMS 481 SPP LEGEND 11 SCHEDULE 482 SPP LEGEND 11 PREVIEW 483 SPP LEGEND 11 PRE PLOT Chapter 5 29280 5 10 Issue 5 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 484 SPP LEGEND 11 EDIT 485 SPP LEGEND 11 PROGRAMMER 486 SPP SPP_FP_VALUE 8 NODATA 487 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Run From 488 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Name 489 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 490 SPP LEGEND 11 RUN FROM 491 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 RUN 492 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Duration 493 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Time Through 494 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 A program is scheduled Continue with LOAD 495 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 LOAD PROGRAM 496 SPP PARA 24 Current Schedule 497 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 UNSAVED EDITS 498 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 This operation will result in the loss of edits which have not yet been saved 499 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 RAMP TYPE CHANGE 500 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 This will require other ramp types in this segment to be changed 501 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 NEW 502 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 New Program 503 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Program 504 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Properties 505 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 Holdback 506 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Mode 507 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Value 508 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 NONE 509 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 LOW 510 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 HIGH 511 SP
248. ited from the Panel Setup page 1 Backlight properties Display Normal and Saver brightness Saver Time out a value of 0 means no time out Saver brightness is the screen brightness when the screen saver timeout expires 2 Page time out values a value of 0 means no time out Home for any Home pages Pop up for the Pop up menu Data Entry for the pick lists and keypads 3 Time out to return to Access Level Locked a value of 0 means no time out If this is enabled by adding an entry into the text dictionary Section 5 2 4 Press SYSTEM No 331 then a time out period can be set If the screen is not touched nmm during this period the instrument access level returns to Locked PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME ACCESS TO THE PANEL SETUP PAGE sy 5 1 SUMMARY APPLN Press the menu key Pr ss men Sar E 2 Select SYSTEM Press SETUP 3 Select SETUP STARTUP COMMS CLOCK Press PANEL Panel Setup BACK LIGHT Brightness 7 02 Saver brightness 120 Timeout 0 minutes 4 Select PANEL The Panel setup page appears PAGE TIMEOUTS 5 ccess appears Home 0 minu only if the relevant Pop up 9 seco entry has been Data Entry 0 eec made in the text Access 4 amp minu dictionary SAVE CANCEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS To prolong backlight life it is recommended that the normal brightness be s
249. ities which are not currently required Chapter 2 HA029280 Page 2 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 4 THE PROGRAM PANE SAMPLE RUNNING SAMPLE RUNNING 14 18 23 1 14 18 23 Segment 1 Figure 2 4 A typical Program pane displays Located at the top left of the screen this area which varies in appearance according to instrument type and options fitted has two functions 1 display data about the status state of the program currently running if any 2 As a touch pad to call the Programmer menu directly 2 4 1 Displaying program status WITH NO PROGRAM LOADED When there is no program loaded the Program pane is white and blank except for the word RESET WITH A PROGRAM LOADED In the example shown in figure 2 4 the program pane reports the following 1 that a program called SAMPLE is loaded 2 that it is Running 3 that it is expected to complete at 14hr 18mins 23secs 4 thatthe name of the segment currently running is 1 Generally a loaded program can be in one of six states reported on the Program pane Run Hold Held Back Idle Complete and Error Alone among these Held Back is not under the control of the user Programs adopt the Held Back state automatically when a process value PV falls too far behind the setpoint SP value What happens is that the program holds the SP constant holds it back A constant SP is called a dwell With the program in Run state the Program pane is green
250. itor option it is not possible to edit any aspect of an account once the SAVE key has been operated It is therefore essential to ensure that all entries are correct before saving Account properties Figure 4 4 3c below shows a typical properties page called by operating the PROPERTIES key at the bottom of the screen Account Properties Min User Id Length 2 Min Password Length 0 Max Login Attempts 0 Password Expiry days User Timeout 0 minutes Figure 4 4 3c Properties page typical Note Please also refer to Chapter 6 if the Auditor Option is fitted Min User ID Length 2to8 Min Password Length 008 Max Login attempts 0 to 99 0 no limit Values greater than 0 show the number of attempts at logging in that may be made before the account is disabled Password Expiry Oto 180 0 password never expires For values greater than 0 the password will expire after the specified number of days have elapsed since the last time the value was edited User Timeout 010720 0 no timeout For values greater than 0 the user will be logged out after the speci fied number of minutes has elapsed since the previous screen activity HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 33 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 3 USER ID SYSTEM Cont Maintenance Operating the MAINT key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Account Maintenance screen to the display as depicted in figure 4 4 3d b
251. k Press SYSTEM 1 Press the Menu key 1 CLOCK SETUP PAGE ACCESS SUMMARY APPLN 2 Select SYSTEM from the pop up menu Q Press menu key SETUP CLONING 3 Select SETUP Press SETUP 4 Select CLOCK STARTUP COMMS 4 INTERNAT PANEL CLOCK RESET The date time setting page appears Date 06 04 0677 Time 14 51 3771 SET CANCEL Hr 1 Hr 1 CHANGING DATE AND TIME To increment or decrement the hours value press the Hr 1 or the Hr 1 key respectively The change takes place im mediately and changes the date if appropriate Notes 1 Operating the SET key enters the time and date displayed on the page These values are not updated in real time but show the values obtaining when the page was called to the screen As it is not possible to SET the date separately from the time it is recommended that the date be changed first then the time 2 The clock re starts when the SET key is pressed This happens after the time has been keyed in and after the Return key has been pressed It is therefore recommended that the keyed in time is at least 20 sec onds ahead of real time so that the SET key can subsequently be operated to start the clock when real time equals the keyed in time 3 For systems configured to have their clocks synchronised by another network node it is not possible to edit the
252. kes its value from the Offset given to the table via the table list The remaining read only addresses follow on according to the numbers of bits on each successive line of the table 1 8 or 16 This is the LIN database field to which the Modbus address is mapped or it can be left blank Select a field with the cursor and type in and enter a LIN function block name plus parameter and subfield if needed separated by full stops periods e g PV1 Alarms Software Notes 1 Ifan attempt is made to enter an analogue parameter into a digital table Field the entry is ignored Any type of parameter can however be typed into a register or diagnostic table 2 Ina digital table LIN database parameters cannot be entered or overwritten if to do so would force an entry lower down the table to change its address 029280 Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 8 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 5 TABLES Cont DP Format Width DB Write Register and diagnostic tables only This column can be used either to specify a decimal point position or to create a 32 bit register 1 Decimal point position DP can store a decimal point scaling factor that is used when converting floating point numbers to 16 bit Modbus registers For this purpose enter an integer from 0 to 4 the DP value represents the number of decimal places in the converted number 2 32 bit register Register tables only A 32 bit register is cre
253. ks starting at midnight Sequence Logs data in sequentially numbered continuous files File Name The operator specifies the first two letters and the remaining six are assigned automatically by the instrument starting at 000001 and incrementing each time a new file is started Column Titles This field appears if ASCIT is selected as File Type Pressing the currently displayed option causes a picklist to appear allowing the user to select Present column titles included in log or Absent column titles are not logged Date Format This field appears only if ASCII is selected as the file type and is used to select the format for the date time or duration stamp recorded in the file by means of a picklist containing the formats described in table 4 2 1 Compr Ratio Not supported by this release of software If Binary is selected as File Type then Compr ession Ratio replaces Column Titles and Date Format Compression ration can be selected from a pick list to be either Normal or High Normal provides an exact copy whilst High compresses the data more than Normal but with a slight loss of accuracy Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 16 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 2 1 LOG INITIATION Cont LOG CONFIGURATION Cont Once configuration is complete SAVE should be operated SAVE Saves the specifications for future logging MONITOR Calls the Logging Monitor pag
254. l iiU 4 16 cR 25 2 5 2 6 Arhive fil 4ranster ees 7 1 By user ID ea ate etch ee ce 2 15 Attributes column 4 4444 2041 4 32 n o i RARO HUNC RAD 4 27 Audit Trail rO 6 1 Display Pane sieneen 2 12 Filtering since af poe eei ats 6 2 levels iniuste n et BRI 6 11 B a eee 2 2 Standard ane eee 2 12 Bargraph display mode to configuration see 2 12 Horizontal bars 3 23 Account Properties 4 422 11 2 4 33 Vertical 3 22 Acknowledge 2 6 3 15 ADOTE iren t di dettes 3 32 2 11 3 15 Create ae nee 3 33 Action 6 11 Customising 2 3 31 Adding new users seen 4 33 Dictloriaky ioter 5 60 Admin only inet pee 4 32 5 61 trennen rns 5 46 S E 3 32 Alarm Initiation nitet 3 32 5 54 load 3 31 Alarm event customisation 5 26 Maintenance esee 4 56 Alarms acini e eee at ais 2 5 2 6 8 11 Monitoring td ie ea
255. laration it will default to the agent of numerically lowest Id in the Main pane ROOT PAGE DECLARATION The Root page is displayed when the Pop up menu key is pressed and it usually consists of a menu Syntax R lt Id gt Example R1000 This defines the Root agent With no Root declaration it will default to the lowest Id in the Pop up pane If there are no pop up agents then it will be set equal to the Home agent INITIAL PAGE DECLARATION The Initial page is displayed on start up only It offers the opportunity to have an introductory page that s different from the Home page Syntax I lt Id gt Example 11000 This defines the Initial agent HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 45 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 4 Agent types Table 5 7 4a sets out the types of agents used The Entry points column gives the number of entry points to each of the listed agents and the number of IDs allocated will be the number in this column starting at the specified ID This should be born in mind when assigning Ids to agents in order to avoid conflicts Table 1 3 1b give details of those parameters with multiple entry points For each agent the third column headed Invalid indicates under what circumstances if any the agent is not avail able A indicates that the agent is not available within an Application panel and indicates that it is not available within a Bare panel MNE
256. larm active Alarm cleared Alarm acknowledged Block event Block event with name System event System event with name Operator note lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Table 5 9 2a Alarm type identifiers System varisbie The name of the associated function block The date associated with the queue entry A name associated with an event e g SPP program name The priority asigned to the alarm or event The time associated with the queue entry The alarm or event type Table 5 9 2b Alarm system variables EXAMPLE The figures below show an example of a UYT file and a typical resulting appearance in the report respectively I1001 _ DATE 8 A TIME 8 BLOCK 8R A TYPE 8L ACTIVE A PRI 1 R L I1002 _A DATE 8 A TIME 8 _ BLOCK 8R A TYPE 8L Cleared R L Sample UYT file 23 01 07 10 07 08 Loopl HighAbs ACTIVE 7 23 01 07 10 13 22 Loopl HighAbs Cleared Typical UYT file printout Chapter 5 029280 5 54 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 10 RECIPE FILES For instruments supporting Recipes it is possible to create Recipe files on a PC using a text editor or spreadsheet that supports Comma separated variable CSV format files Each UYR file consists of three parts The first part is a 3 line header which describes in a fixed format the general information contai
257. lashing it has not been acknowledged In more detail Flashing red black means that there is at least one abnormal condition that requires attention and at least one active alarm has not been acknowledged Flashing white black means there has been at least one abnormal condition which has now returned to normal with out being acknowledged Steady red means there is at least one abnormal condition that requires attention all of which have been acknowl edged either manually or automatically Steady white means that there are no current active or inactive unacknowledged alarms 29280 Chapter 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 2 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 6 1 ALARM STATE INDICATION Cont The Alarm pane gives a summary of all alarms not information about a particular alarm For instance if the pane is flashing red it means that there is at least one current unacknowledged alarm which may or may not be the one dis played in the alarm pane In order to gain more details the alarm history display can be referred to section 2 6 2 ACTIVE MESSAGE DISPLAY In addition to the normal alarm displays described above a further alarm icon in the form of a question mark on a orange black flashing background may appear at the left side of the alarm pane as shown in figure 2 6 above If this indicator appears there are one or more messages to be acknowledged or reviewed Further details of these messages are to be found in section 3 5
258. ll start Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT SKIP SAMPLE IDLE Program Duration 03 55 00 Run From 007007007 Segment Name 1 Duration 00 05 00 Time Through 00 00 00 RUN 22 22 22 9 Press the yellowed Run From field In the left part of the display a numeric keyboard appears At the top a 8 confirmation bar shows the current Run From time as 00 00 00 5 hh mm ss with a cursor blinking under the first 0 2 10 From the keyboard key the required Run From time this exam 0 ple 01 45 00 4 11 Press the green Return arrow SAMPLE Program Duration 03 55 00 The keyboard disappears to reveal the full Run From page If the se Run From 01 45 00 lected time starts running the program from beyond the first segment CEDE the Name and Time Through fields will show different values 4 Duration 01 50 00 Time Through 00 15 00 RUN 12 Torun the program now press the RUN key The main display reverts to the Programmer menu Programmer The Program pane changes to green showing RUNNING the time of MONITOR scHEOULE completion and the segment number PREVIEW PRE PLOT RUN HOLD The program is now running from the specified point 2 RUN FROM SKIP 029
259. losed within double quotes literal text is printed out as typed in Special characters may be included as shown in table 5 9 1a below Any ASCII character can be included by typing nn where nn is the hex code for the required character If a colon followed by a number is included immediately after the text then this will define the width of the field E G temperature 20 would produce the text temperature followed by seven spaces Text is left justified unless otherwise specified as described below in Formatting attributes Entry Definition Hex L or N Line feed new line 0A P Form feed 0C R Carriage Return 00 T Horizontal tab 09 or Double quotes 22 Dollar symbol 24 Comma 2C Open curly bracket 7B Close curly bracket 7D Ascii Unicode Latin 1 charac nn character nn nn ter set codes Table 5 9 1a Special characters Any item from any of the dictionaries described in section 5 can be included in the report The syntax is dictionary ID entry number where the dictionary ID is as follows Error Text dictionary ID E Event Text dictionary ID V Programmer Text dictionary ID P System dictionary ID User Text dictionary ID U Thus an entry of U13 would cause item 13 of the User dictionary to be included in the report 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 5 5 51 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK
260. lows function blocks to Dyer be deleted from the database oor A further operation of the down arrow or cycle screens key calls the function block Connections page If the data base is stopped this page allows the adding deleting modifying of the function block Options lt lt 11 Relays In the case of subfields a number is displayed which is the number Run as of connections when the database is running or the number of con nectable bits when stopped Touching the field displays the details of all relevant bits Figure 4 3 8e Function block details 4 4 CONTROLLING ACCESS Note for instruments fitted with the Auditor option see also chapter 8 Access control consists of setting up and changing if necessary the passwords for each of the three types of users Operators Commissioning Engineers and Engineers Alternatively a User ID access system can be used as de scribed in section 4 4 3 below Section 2 8 1 above contains details of how the passwords User ID is used to gain access to various parts of the instrument configuration As described in section 4 5 5 it is possible to set a time period time out after which the access level returns to Locked HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 27 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 1 First time access LOCKED level For access to the LOCKED level at first
261. m Engineer level can passwords be changed The hierarchy of levels is LOCKED lowest OPERATOR next lowest COMMISSION middle ENGINEER highest You need a password to change up levels but not to change down No password is needed for Locked What follows are step by step instructions on how to navigate the menu system to get access to your level of facili ties The assumption is that you have your password ready Passwords are set and re set by the Engineer For first time access immediately after commissioning Section 4 4 Controlling Access should be referred to Chapter 2 HA029280 Page 2 12 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 8 1 GAINING ACCESS Cont Note This menu is context sensitive The actual display may differ from that STANDARD ACCESS Cont 1 With the instrument powered up press the menu key below the screen In the Main pane the restricted version of the pop up menu figure 2 3 appears 2 Press ACCESS The Security Access page appears 3 Press the field showing LOCKED on yellow opposite New Level In the left half of the screen a pick list of the access levels appears LOCKED OPERATOR COMMISSION ENGINEER 4 Select a level Operator for example The background highlights yellow confirming the choice 5 Press the Return key the green arrow 4 4 2 Press ACCESS key ACCESS SYSTEM az E mj Press menu key 2 2 RESET Eveo
262. mance 4 2 1 Log initiation 1 Press the Menu key then LOGGING then GROUPS The Logging Groups page appears showing data for a single group To scroll between groups press either the or keys can be used For any group the fields are as follows GROUP NAME This is an identifier given to each group of data To name a file or to change a file name first turn Logging to OFF see next paragraph then re enter the name LOGGING This shows ON OFF or TRIGGER What is shown depends upon whether logging is currently on off or set to start when an event is triggered The event is specified by the customer and is configured at the factory or by the OEM To change the current setting press the yellowed ACCESS PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME 2 Press LOGGING Press menu key Press GROUPS Logging MONITOR Logging Groups Group Name lgrpl Logging Configuration Archive Int 00 01 00 File Type ASCII Name Type Hourly File Name AA000017 ASC Column Titles Present Date Format Date Time Logging field and select ON OFF or TRIGGER as SAVE MONITOR LOG NOW required then press ENTER The Logging Groups page now shows the new setting against Logging HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 2 1 LOG INITIATION Cont LOG CONFIGURATION The r
263. me for example simple Press the Return key alsidi fi gji hyj iy kE nimi ud LX A C The keyboard disappears revealing the Properties window showing the SLEE new name Z Rate Minutes At End Indefinite Dwell Press DONE 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 7 CHANGING PROGRAM PROPERTIES Cont simple CHANGING RATE UNITS In the Properties window press the Rate Units field A pick list appears with Seconds Minutes Hours as selectable options Select say Seconds Press Return Properties W woe Rate Units Seconds At End IndefiniteyDwell The Properties window reappears with the Rate Units field showing Seconds Press DONE The Program Editor page reappears rate units are not shown CHOOSING END OF RUN ACTION In the Properties window press the yellowed At End field A pick list appears containing Indefinite Dwell and Starting Values Indefinite dwell This leaves all values as they are at the end of the program until new ac simple tion is taken to change them A program with an end condition of Indefi nite Dwell does not terminate but adopts the COMPLETE state until ABORTED Ending on an indefinite dwell is the only circumstance that puts a program into the Complete st
264. mmediately changes ramp direction and it is likely that the previously programmed peak or trough will not be reached It is also likely that the SP will reach the new target sooner than expected and in such a case unless a further Skip is performed the SP will dwell until the next segment starts From ramp to end Starting values Not bumpless Same effect as if the Program is aborted From ramp to complete infinite dwell Not bumpless Terminates the ramp and steps to the final target setpoint To ramp from any other type 1 Ramp at rate Rate is maintained 2 Time to target Duration is maintained 029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 2 HOLDING AND ABORTING A PROGRAM The Hold facility has two uses 1 for Operators to halt a program when a problem arises in the process under control and to hold the program at that point while attempts are made to fix the problem 2 for Engineers to make on line changes to a running program This chapter is for Operators and so the following deals with the first situation 3 2 1 Holding a program BIER ecrire 1 With a program running and the full Programmer menu displayed as at step 8 in 3 1 1 Running a program press HOLD PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT HOLD ABORT SKIP The Program pane changes to yellow and reports HELD The estimated time of completion starts incremen
265. n count is made less than Count for a particular table it takes more than one cycle to be updated but the overall polling cycle speeds up This may be required for Modbus devices with limited buffer sizes Master mode only This specifies the hexadecimal Slave number value of the instrument on the Modbus network in which the data registers or bits associated with this master table are located Each table of registers is assigned a Tick Rate a value between 0 and 65535 ms to define the frequency at which it is scanned The Tick Rate associated with each table can be configured If the LIN instrument does not support Tick Rates and or if the instrument is configured to operate in Slave mode the Tick Rate fields are disabled Chapter 8 Page 8 16 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 5 5 TABLES Cont TABLE MENUS Individual table menus are accessed from the tables list by highlighting of its table number in the first column headed Table followed by lt Enter gt To highlight fields the arrow cursor is moved around the table menu using the mouse or the PC s lt Home gt lt End gt and cursor keys can be used Table menus allow the mapping between the LIN database fields and the Modbus addresses to be configured Figure8 5 3b shows a typical default table menu for a register table Register Digital Field Note that table headings differ for register and digital tables but that some fiel
266. n those listed below to be empty NO CONTEXT TEXT FUNCTION 62 ALMMENU NOTE Entering of notes into alarm history 340 FILE MGR COPY ALL Copy all selected files 342 FILE MGR DEL ALL Delete all selected files 384 APP MGR LOAD Load a new application 385 APP MGR LD RUN Load and run a new application 386 APP MGR UNLOAD Unload current application 387 APP MGR SAVE Save application files 388 APP MGR SAVE AS Save application files to a new name 389 APP MGR DELETE Delete an application 390 APP MGR STOP Stop a running application 391 APP MGR START Start a loaded application 428 SPP RUN Running the currently loaded program 429 SPP HOLD Hold the currently running program 430 SPP ABORT Aborting programs 433 SPP LOAD Load a program 434 SPP SAVE Save a program 435 SPP SAVE AS Save program to a new name 436 SPP DELETE Delete a program 479 SPP MONITOR Menu button to call Monitor page 480 SPP PROGRAMS Menu button to call Programs page 481 SPP SCHEDULE Scheduling programs 482 SPP PREVIEW Preview of program 483 SPP PRE PLOT Live preview combined display of program 484 SPP EDIT Editing of programs 490 SPP RUN FROM Starting a program part way through 501 SPP NEW Create a new program 513 SPP INS SEG Insert a new segment 514 SPP DEL SEG Delete a segment 517 SPP LAYOUT Modify editor page layout 570 SPP SKIP Skipping the currently executing segment 712 LOGGRP File Type File type ASCII 725 LOGGRP Name Type Type of log file name
267. name of a program To change the rate units To choose an action to be taken at the end of each run To change the default number of iterations To save any new settings press the Option key at the bottom of the screen and then the SAVE button CHANGING PROGRAM NAMES Note A program name should be changed only if non file name characters are to be included If this is the case it should be remembered that the file name of the program takes the name of the program by default In other words the program name overrides the file name Therefore if a program is saved to a new file two programs of the same name will exist embedded within different files SAMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 In the Properties window press the current name displayed in the yellowed Name field A qwerty keyboard display with a cursor flashing under the first charac ter of the current name shown in a black confirmation bar above the key ud du ud gt lt 32 25 23 Key in the new name EE qiwi eliri thy vu 1 olp When the confirmation bar shows the correct new na
268. nary holds text that originates from the batch files wyb and any corresponding recipe files uyr It may not be initialised from a uyl file The text held by this dictionary changes whenever the uyb and or uyr files are loaded or modified from the front panel The dictionary is divided up into sections one for each batch controller each spanning a range of up to 1000 records The sections are allocated as follows 1001 1999 Batch number 1 2001 2999 Batch number 2 3001 3999 Batch number 3 4001 4999 Batch number 4 Also the section 1 999 represents the batch currently on view and is thus a duplicate of one of the other sections The following table indicates how the records are allocated for each batch To get the record from batch n add 1000 n For example to get the record of the user who last edited the batch 3 uyb file use record number 3014 Record Value 1 File name excluding ubr 11 Revisions number of uyb file 14 Name of user who last edited the uyb file 41 Custom title number 1 42 Custom title number 2 43 Custom title number 3 44 Custom title number 4 45 Custom title number 5 46 Custom title number 6 51 Custom variable number 1 52 Custom variable number 2 53 Custom variable number 3 54 Custom variable number 4 55 Custom variable number 5 56 Custom variable number 6 91 State of the batch 92 Name of recipe selected for batch 93 Name of current phase 101 to 120 Names of phase numbers 1 to 20 301 to 31
269. ncoming connections from other blocks are not specially indicated in a block overview OVERVIEW Block NoName Compound Mode PV SP OP SL FallBack TrimSP RemoteSP Track U AUTO AUTO 0 0 Eng 02 0 Eng 0 9 0 0 Eng 02 0 Eng 02 0 Eng 0 9 122 0 Eng 0 0 Eng 100 0 Eng Eng 122 0 0 9 100 0 0 9 Alarms HAA LAA HDA LDA XP TI TD Options SelMode ModeSel ModeAct FF PID FB OP 109 49 0 0 122 02 122 02 TimeBase Secs 122 02 0 0002 0 0002 00001100 000000090 000000090 000000090 50 0 0 0 Eng Eng Eng Eng oe oe oe Figure 8 4 1b Overview PID block Chapter 8 Page 8 4 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 1 MAKE Cont BLOCK OVERVIEW Cont Title bar Contains fields common to all overviews Block Type and Compound Block and Type have their usual LIN meanings Compound is equivalent to Dbase Please refer to the LIN Blocks Reference Manual in the LIN Product Manual for details of these fields A blank Compound field denotes that the block database is local Note that the block is not installed into the control strategy until at the minimum its Block field has been assigned a value i e tagname and the database has been restarted Overview data field entry To update a parameter field locate the
270. nctions are set to No by default The display column reflects the features set to Yes as shown in the table below The numbers are cumulative so for example if View only and FTP were both selected Yes and all other items No the attribute display would be 00001004 View only Admin only Display No No 00000000 No 00000004 Yes 00000010 No 00001000 No 00002000 Table 4 4 3 Attribute coding View only Users with this attribute set have Read Only permission Admin only This attribute appears only for users with Admin Access level and means that they can modify only ADMIN pages If View only is also set such users are denied all write permissions FTP Users with this permission may log in via FTP FTP users who are View only are prevented from file system modification and their logins are not recorded Remote If set this allows the user to log into terminal configurator via telnet if enabled The View Only attribute may be used to determine if the user has write modify permission If the Auditor option is enabled write permission for the terminal configurator is always disabled regardless of the View Only setting Reference column For use with user screens set up in Lin Blocks this allows individual users or groups of users allocated the same reference number to be identified as being logged on Deleting Retiring users To delete a user touch the required name in the Identity column
271. nding using the ALARM blocks As with alarms each event may be assigned a priority of 0 to 15 inclusive where priority 0 disables the event If such customisation is required the optional file SYSTEM UYE may be added to the system This is a text file containing a single line for each event requiring customisation The syntax is Event number gt lt Priority gt where the event number is obtained from the table above and Priority is 0 to 15 For example 41 0 42 0 would cause the events Database loaded and Database started to be disabled HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 33 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 5 5 6 THE USER TEXT DICTIONARY This dictionary initially empty is available for users who wish to enter their own texts for display on their Home page and User screens with additional files to hold versions in other languages if required The User text dictionary is used in conjunction with the User Screen Editor For more details refer to The User Screen Editor Handbook part no HA260749 U005 For every System file there may be an optional User file to go with it Filenames and record syntaxes follow the pattern of those for the _system uyl files Filenames are _user uyl for the file holding terms customised in English or other home language _user lt n gt uyl for files holding other language international versions with n taking integer values from 0 up to 9 one value for
272. ne Line 2 played figure 3 7 1d touch the yellowed Line field and Recipe Name Run Prog select a new line from the resulting pick list Alternatively the down arrow key at the bottom of the screen can be used to scroll through the available items The file can now be downloaded by pressing the DOWNLOAD key DOWNLOAD ABORT Figure 3 7 1d Status page for multi line recipes SELECTING A RECIPE Recipe Status If more than one recipe is present in a file then it is possi ble to select which recipe is to be the current one With the Id GasMixes Recipe Status page selected figure 3 7 1e a touch on the File name GASCONC recipe field will call a pick list from which the required Recipe Name Amarillo item can be selected The recipe can now be downloaded using the DOWNLOAD key DOWNLOAD ABORT Figure 3 7 1e Status page for recipe selection 3 7 2 Monitoring the recipe A recipe can be monitored from the Recipe Status screen and from the Recipe Monitor screen RECIPE STATUS PAGE The recipe status screen contains the File name and the Recipe name and any one or more of the following fields Set ID Line Status if downloaded Time date of last download Status can be any one of the following DOWNLOADING if a download is in progress COMPLETE if the latest download was completed successfully FAILED if the previous download was unsuccessful or abort
273. ned in the file The second part consists of a single Title Line The final part consists of a number of lines each describing a single variable Notes 1 No line may exceed 512 characters including line feed carriage return instructions 2 Spaces are counted as characters 3 String titles do not have to be unique 4 Trailing commas will be treated as illegal unless otherwise stated 5 Ifa string length is exceeded any extra characters are lost when saving the file 6 Commas double quotes single quotes and equals signs are all illegal in fields 7 Non printing characters excluding CR lt LF gt are not permitted anywhere within the file 5 10 1 Basic Recipe File FILE HEADER Line 1 Line 1 must contain UYR 1 only Line 2 Line two contains comma separated information about the current revision of the file e g 2 10 04 06 09 37 08 Fred Bloggs Where 2 is the revision level of the file 10 04 06 is the day month year that revision was carried out 09 37 08 is the hours minutes seconds that the revision was carried out Fred Bloggs is the name of the person who last modified the file Line 3 Line three defines the recipe set block to be used and recipe download timeout value in seconds lt Recipe Set Block gt lt Timeout gt e g SET1 30 The recipe Set Block is the name of the RCP_SET block to be used If left blank this field implies any RCP_SET block If the download time
274. nel T2550R unit EIA485 Master port RJ45 Using serial comms Visual supervisor rear panel T2550R Network Switch RSTP VO unit T2550R unit Ethernet port RJ45 cL erc T2550R I O unit Using Ethernet Figure 1 3 5a Visual Supervisor to O unit wiring examples simplex operation 29280 Chapter 1 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 1 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 1 3 5 WIRING THE VISUAL SUPERVISOR TO I O UNITS Cont Supervisory PC Visual supervisor rear panel Network Switch RSTP Network Switch RSTP T2550R unit Ethernet port RJ45 S T T2550R unit Figure 1 3 56 Visual Supervisor to unit wiring example redundant I O operation 1 3 6 Profibus wiring Refer to chapter 10 for details of the Profibus Master 9 way D Type connector Refer to the Modbus Profibus communications handbook HA028014 for Profibus network topology recommenda tions Chapter 1 029280 1 10 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED This chapter consists of the following sections 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Switch on and the opening display including the navigation keys The Main pane information entry
275. ng screen appears offering a selection of options numbered 0 to J 2 Type lt 2 gt to select the Enter Terminal Mode option The Terminal Emulator screen appears 3 Press Ctrl lt K gt to select Enter VT100 mode for T100 Configurator 7100718 the generic name of the configurator Note If the screen goes blank press lt Enter gt once or twice to continue 4 Type lt 1 gt for the ANSI CRT option A log in screen appears Once a valid user ID and password have been entered for a user with Remote attribute enabled the configurator Initial menu appears as depicted in figure 8 3 1 INIT Choose option gt DATABASE General configuration GATEWAY MODBUS configuration Figure 8 3 1 Configurator initial menu NOTE The appearance of the Initial or Main menus indicates that the CPU has entered configuration mode Locate the cursor gt at a menu item using the cursor keys then press Enter to display the next level in the menu hierarchy This is selecting an item In general to access the next lower level of the menu hierarchy press Enter To return to the next higher level menu or close a pop up options menu press the Escape key lt PageUp gt and lt PageDown gt access hidden pages in long tables For keyboards without cursor control keys equivalent control character combinations may be used as indicated in Table 8 3 1 To use these hold down the lt
276. nge in the value of the setpoint is referred to as a ramp even when the result of that change is zero This means that the six methods of controlling the value of the setpoint described above all result in types of ramp Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 3 CHANGING A SETPOINT Cont TO CHANGE THE TYPE OF RAMP Example for Analog Input 1 The following example describes how to change the ramp in Segment 2 from a time to target to a ramp to tar get In the Program Editor page the cell for Analog Input 1 Segment 2 shows R for Ramp and to 100 0 for the value indicating that it is currently a ramp to a specified value Press the cell A dialogue box appears displaying data about that cell Segment Press the yellowed Ramp field Setpoint Type to A pick list of ramp types appears with Ramp highlighted Press the required type in this case RampQ Dwell Step In 1 Ramp E xX E Ramp highlights yellow 00 35 00 Dwell Step In 1 Ramp Press the green Return key E 1 m The dialogue box reappears now showing Ramp in field s followed by an extra field Ramp at This field appears only when Ana Segment changing to a Ramp _ jjSetpoi
277. nly 1512 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Password HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 21 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1513 SIGN SIG_LEVEL 16 Signature 1514 SIGN SIG_LEVEL 16 Sign amp Authorise 1515 SIGN SIG_LEVEL 16 Action Disabled 1520 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 18 Field Changes 1521 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm priority Changes 1522 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 18 Units Changes 1523 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Wiring Changes 1524 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Field Changes 1525 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment Change 1526 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment Change held 1527 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Current Segment Change 1528 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 RUN edited 1529 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 ACK 6 10 1530 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 ACH 11 15 1531 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 User Password Change 1532 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 ModbusM TCP SAVE 1540 COMMS COMMS_PORT 5 ENETI 1541 COMMS COMMS PORT 5 ENET2 1542 COMMS COMMS PORT 5 ENET3 1543 COMMS COMMS PORT 3 ENET4 1544 COMMS COMMS_PORT 5 5 1550 5 COMMS_ITEM 8 ELIN 1551 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 FTP 1560 COMMS BUTTON TEXT 12 ETHERNET 1561 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 Comms Ethernet 1562 COMMS PARA 24 LIN Protocol Setup 1563 COMMS PARA 24 Local IP Setup 1564 COMMS PARA 24 Remote Subnet Node List 1565 COMMS SEPARATOR 1 1566 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Protocol Name 1567 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 All Subnet Enable 1569 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Address Assignment
278. nt In 1 Rampi Ramp at 0N0 m Press the yellowed Ramp at field currently showing 0 0 m standing Digi to 10070 for zero units per minute 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 3 CHANGING A SETPOINT Cont SAMPLE TO CHANGE THE TYPE OF RAMP Cont A numeric keyboard is displayed showing the current value of the ramp in a black confirmation bar at the top Key in the required ramp rate As soon as the first digit is entered the rest of the bar clears When the new entry is complete press Return m The dialogue box reappears displaying the new value for the ramp rate Setpoint In 1 Type Rampe Ramp at 1 0 m 10070 Press DONE A new Ramp to value is shown in the cell To save the new ramp type press the Option key at the bottom of the screen then press the SAVE but ton that appears on a bar at the bottom of the screen CHANGING SETPOINT VALUE Setpoint Ana In 1 Type Step In the Program Editor page select the analogue cell holding the value to be changed A dialogue box appears showing thesegment name or number 2 the setpoint name for that row 3 the setpoint type 4 the current target value for the setpoint in that cell To change the target value touch the value and enter the new value using the keyboard display which appears Press the
279. ntred on the cursor position PAN These controls allow a particular section of the trend history to be selected for display The length of this displayed section is determined by the zoom setting Use this PAN slider or the arrow keys to select that part of the time base to be viewed Down moves back in time Faceplate values are amount of time base displayed those at the Buttons have similar effect but cursor time provide step changes Zoom and date factor is shown below the display 17 02 0200 13 31 17 Cursor date Cursor time Zoom factor Back Live key Figure 3 6 3g Trend review controls Chapter 3 HA029820 Page 3 24 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont VERTICAL TREND FULL WIDTH This view fills the width of the screen with no faceplates displayed Review mode is as described above Figure 3 6 3h Vertical full width display mode HORIZONTAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE The horizontal trend displays are similar to the vertical trend displays The main difference apart from the length of data displayed and that the traces move from right to left is the swapping of the Pan and Zoom control locations in Trend review mode Latest data is the right hand edge of the screen Figure 3 6 3i Horizontal trend with faceplates HA029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 3 D
280. numbers to be entered Initially all these contain 0 although this value cannot be used Figure 6 1 3 k 029280 Chapter 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 6 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont Deploy Access Config Number of slave nodes 5 Slave nodes OK CLEAR FILL SORT Figure 6 1 3 Node number configuration Operation of the FILL key at this point will fill the node number configuration boxes with nodes 1 to n where n is the number of nodes selected If instead the first node is entered by the user say node 10 the FILL operation will automatically fill in the remain ing node numbers starting at 11 in this example If non consecutive node numbers are entered say nodes 17 3 9 103 and 14 then the SORT button can be used to reorder the nodes in ascending order 3 9 14 17 103 The CLEAR key is used to reset all the mode numbers to 0 Operation of the OK key returns to the previous page only this time the newly configured items appear Deploy Access Number of slave nodes 5 Slave nodes 3 Cy Gitte DEPLOY CONFIG USERS Figure 6 1 3k Completed configuration Operation of the DEPLOY key causes the deploy to be initiated once signed and authorized if necessary Figure 6 1 31 shows the confirmation page Chapter 6 HA029280 Page 6 8 Issue 5 Mar 08
281. o 12 characters Select Yes or no Protocol name All Subnet enable MAC ADDRESS This factory set address is unique to the instrument and is non editable Address Assignment Select one of Fixed DHCP BootP DHCP LL BootP LL Link Local IP Address May be edited only if Fixed selected as Address assignment Subnet Mask May be edited only if Fixed selected as Address assignment Default Gateway May be edited only if Fixed selected as Address assignment Number of nodes Node N Enter 0 to 50 This is the number of nodes in the remote subnet Allows the IP address of each remote node to be entered 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 4 Page 4 37 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK MODBUS TCP For each relevant slave node an entry must be made in the Modbus TCP mapping table figure 4 5 1c which is ac cessed by touching the MODBUS TCP key at the bottom of the Comms setup page figure 4 5 1 3 5 SED T800 BadBat MODBUS _1 TCP INSTRUMENT SLAVE ADDRESS HOST TCP PORT 149 121 128 234 502 141 121 128 231 502 Instrument No 7 OK CANCEL DELETE Figure 4 5 1c Modbus mapping table To edit the values for an existing slave touch the relevant field as shown above for Instrument and then touch the current value This causes a pop up keyboard to appear allowing the user to enter a new value Changes take place only after the SAVE key at the bottom left of the
282. ock to local block These are connections where the source block is a cached copy of a block in another instrument and the destination block is local to the CPU database All cached blocks in the database are tested at regular intervals and if a change in the block data is detected then all such connections out of the cached block into local blocks are evaluated The connections are not evaluated if the source data has not changed 8 4 2 COPY Creates duplicates of existing blocks Select COPY from the main menu to display all the blocks in the control strat egy in semi graphical format as shown in Figure 8 4 2 The blocks are displayed from left to right in order of crea tion Move the cursor gt to a block and press Enter The block is duplicated and added to the strategy and its Overview page automatically appears ready for parameterising The duplicate retains all the original parameter values except for the Block field which has the default tagname NoName Input connections are not copied nor are I O block site numbers COPY Select block Root SIM 1 100 PID 1 FIC 101 Figure 8 4 2 COPY display example Pressing Escape returns the COPY display where the copied block can be seen added to the list Press Escape again to return to the top level menu 8 4 3 DELETE Deletes blocks from the control strategy Note that the control database must be halted otherwise selecting
283. of this manual 2 6 2 Responding to alarms There are four possible responses to an alarm Do nothing 2 Get more information by bringing up the Alarm History page which is a list of past and current alarms and events 3 Acknowledge the alarm by bringing up the Alarm window and pressing a pane 4 Report and then remedy the abnormal condition DO NOTHING Doing nothing is acceptable when the light just shows steady white This indicates that a non serious abnormal condi tion did exist but it has now returned to normal and that it has been acknowledged Doing nothing is also acceptable with a steady red indication that is not the result of its having been manually ac knowledged In this case the alarm will have been triggered by an Auto Ack alarm which does not require active intervention but will give information about a slightly abnormal condition ALARM HISTORY PAGE Figures 2 6 2a and b show the alarm history page for XGA and 1 4VGA versions of the instrument respectively not drawn to the same scale The major difference is the ACK column which appears only in the XGA version Alarm History ACTIVE ENGINEER Log On 03 04 06 05 55 03 2550 7 Comms 03 04 06 05 08 51 Database Started 03 04 06 04 08 51 03 04 06 04 08 51 Database Loaded 03 04 06 05 08 51 Alarm History TYPE ACTIVE Access Comms Started Database Loaded Figure 2 6 2b Alarm history page 1 4 VGA Chapter 2 HA029280 Page 2 10 Issue 5 Mar 08
284. onc Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConc Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConc CrbMonOx 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConc Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConc iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 n Butane GasConc nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 i Pentane GasConc iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 n Pentane GasConc nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 n Hexane GasConc nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 1 Basic file example Chapter 5 029280 Page 5 56 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 10 2 More complex files MULTI LINE FILES Figure 5 10 2a below shows a 2 line version of the basic file described above The differences are In the Title line field number 2 is included and the lines have been named In each variable line a second field GasConc2 is included For the sake of consistency GasConc has been changed to GasConcl UYR 1 7 10 04 06 08 49 21 Richard 30 Setpoint Line 1 Setpoint Line 2 Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConcl Methane GasConc2 Methane 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen GasConcl Nitrogen GasConc2 Nitrogen 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConcl CrbDiOx GasConc2 CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConcl Ethane GasConc2 Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConcl Propane GasCon
285. ones in the Clock Setup page in the background or in memory press the C key the digits change to question marks To cancel the whole time change operation and return to the Clock Setup page press the red cross key When new time has been entered press the green Return key When the actual time is the same as the time just entered press the SET key to re start the clock 4 5 4 Changing language and date time formats A different language can be selected only if the instrument holds the appropriate language dictionary file See section 5 2 The System text dictionary Press SYSTEM Press the menu key m The Pop up menu appears PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME 2 Select SYSTEM The System Pages window appears 1 summary Press menu key SETUP CLONING 3 Select SETUP SETUP The Setup window appears 2 STARTUP COMMS CLOCK ress 4 Select INTERNAT NTERNAT eT EXE RESET Internationalise Language English Date Format DD MM YY Time Format 55 i i i DD HH MM SS TIT Internationalise page appears Duration Fmt CHANGE The following subsections describe each of the four yellowed fields displayed on the Internationalise page Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 42 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 4 CHANGING LANGUAGE DATE FORMAT Cont LANGUAGE I
286. oning the cursor under the first character and operating key Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 30 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 3 USER ID SYSTEM Cont USER ID MANAGEMENT Operation of the USERS key calls up a page which allows user identities passwords and access levels to be assigned The USERS key appears only for users logged in at ADMIN level Figure 4 4 3a below depicts the page Hidden columns are accessed by a scroll bar which hides the SAVE CANCEL NEW etc keys When required these keys are called to the display by operating the Option key one or more times 3 5 Eycon 20 BadBat Security access Name Access Attributes Identity ADMIN ADMIN ADMIN 00000000 Reference COMMISSI COMISSION COMMISSION ENGINEER ENGINEER ENGINEER 00000004 OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR NEW CANCEL PROPERTIES MAINT Figure 4 4 3a User ID Management page Use scroll bar not shown to show hid den parts of screen 7 Use option key to toggle between scroll bar and pushbuttons As is depicted above the opening display shows one user per access level In order to edit the Identity including password Name Access level etc it is necessary only to touch the relevant field highlights yellow and edit the entry as required IDENTITY CHANGE EXAMPLE Note This p
287. otherm instrument the LIN database is a set of software function blocks that constitutes its control strategy The manufacturer and or OEMs select particular function blocks from a library of LIN database function blocks to build a particular control strategy for that instrument The LIN database of an instrument forms part of its application See tion A log group is a set of points that are logged archived together onto removable media for review off line Same as Archiving Original Equipment Manufacturer I E any organisation that buys Visual Supervisors incorpo rates them into its own products and sells these products onto other customers under its own name A total power failure for a short time Process Variable Examples are temperature pressure or valve aperture A ramp is 1 a generic term for all types of programmed change in a setpoint value Can be a dwell no change at all a step an instantaneous change a ramp at a ramp to a servo to setpoint or a servo to PV all linear changes 2 two of the types mentioned above ramp at and ramp to Recording Recording is the process of saving the history of a set of data values in the instrument s non volatile memory The data can survive a power outage and can be replayed on the instrument Appendix C HA029280 Page C 2 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK C2 GLOSSARY Cont
288. out is exceeded the recipe download is assumed to have been unsuccessful and the recipe goes into a failed state 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 55 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 10 1 BASIC RECIPE FILE Cont TITLE LINE This line defines how many recipes there are in the file minimum one Setpoint Line Name gt lt Recipe 1 gt lt name gt where lt Line name gt defines the name of the recipe line not required for single line files lt Recipe N name gt is the name of the Nth recipe VARIABLE LINES For each variable in the recipe a line is required of the form lt Name gt lt Tag gt lt Value gt lt N gt where Name is the name of the variable Tag is the tag name in the database If the tag name is enclosed within braces the variable is considered to be non verifiable Value N is the value of the Nth recipe The number of values must correspond with the number of recipes BASIC FILE EXAMPLE Figure 5 10 1 is an example of a basic UYR file with three recipes UYR 1 6 10 04 06 08 45 54 Richard 30 Setpoint 1 Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConc Methane 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConc CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConc Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConc Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasC
289. played and to be selected one at a time for copying or deleting The range of files displayed can be limited by entering a display filter to limit the scroll list to certain file names or file types Size Shows the size of the selected file Free space Shows the remaining capacity of the drive selected HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 51 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 7 4 Reloading the application Operation of the menu key followed by the APP MGR button in the pop up menu returns to the Application Manager page which allows a file to be selected to be the application Once a file name has been selected operation of the LOAD key and then the START key or the LD RUN key returns the unit to normal operation Appl n Manager File 22222222 SUMMARY ACCESS APP lt q SETUP MAINT EVTLOG Press APP MGR LOAD LD FUN DELETE Press menu key Appl n Manager LOAD LD RUN DELETE Figure 4 7 4 Regaining the Application Manager Page 4 8 RECIPE MANAGEMENT 4 8 1 Creating recipe files A blank recipe file i e a recipe file with no values can be created from the recipe file page The recipe editor can then be used to add values 4 8 2 Recipe editing The recipe editor is called by pressing EDIT from the recipe menu Note For units fitted with the Auditor Option an edited recipe must be Saved before it can be downloaded
290. possible to exceed some of these values but if a n database with more resources than the default maximum is loaded No of libraries 50 max n 4 the maximum is set to the new value and there may then be insuffi of EDBs cient memory to load the entire database or allow on line reconfig No of FEATTs 512 max uration In such a case connections disappear first FEATTs are not No of TEATTs 128 subject to this problem as when a database is saved there are not No of servers 2 max normally any FEATTs present so the maximum cannot be exceeded No of connections 1024 2 Ifthe EDB maximum is exceeded some EDBs will malfunction affecting LINtools functionality Sequence control resources Sequence memory program data 112kBytes Sequence memory SFC resources 7 6kBytes Simultaneously active independent sequence tasks 10 SFC actions including root SFCs 100 Steps 320 Action Associations 1200 Actions 600 Transitions 450 Setpoint program resources No of simultaneously running programs max Profiled analogues max Profiled digitals max Segments per program 8 See table for resource distribution 16 segments 32 250 125 16 80 8 40 Appendix A Page A 2 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK Communications specification Ethernet Communications Type Protocols Cable Type Maximum length Termination Isolation RJ45
291. pping the application Figure 4 7 1 shows the keystrokes necessary to stop the application 4 7 2 Calling the file manager Once the application has been stopped it can be unloaded and the File Manager called from the Maintenance pop up as shown in figure 4 7 2 2 Press SYSTEM key 1 ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS Press menu key OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING SUMMARY APPLN m 3 SETUP CLONING Press APPLN key Application APP SUM APP MGR FB MGR Press APP MGR Appl n Manager File Colours State RUNNING so 5 Press STOP Figure 4 7 1 Application stop m SAVE SAVE AS STOP Appl n Manager File Colours State STOPPED Press UNLOAD Appl n Manager File 22222222 summary ACCESS APP MGR SETUP MAINT EVTLOG LOAD LD MAN DELETE 8 Press MAINT Press menu key 9 Maintenance Press FILE MGR CLONING FILE MGR SOFT OPTS BATCH MAINT Figure 4 7 2 Calling the file manager Chapter 4 Page 4 50 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 7 3 File Copy and Delete Operation of the FILE MGR button in the Maintenance pop up calls the File Manager page Once this page is display either an individual file name can be selecte
292. press lt Enter gt to display a Full Description page listing the parameter TRUE FALSE states and edit this list as described for Bitfields above 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 8 Page 8 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 1 MAKE Cont CONNECTION TYPES IN A CPU DATABASE There are three types of connection used in a CPU database local connections connections writing to a cached block and connections from a cached block to a local block The following explains how and when they are evalu ated 1 Local connections These are connections between two blocks that are both local to the CPU database The connection is always evaluated immediately prior to the execution of the destination block s update procedure regardless of whether the source data has changed between iterations With this sort of connection any attempt to write to the connection destination is immediately corrected by the next connection evaluation 2 Connections writing to cached block These are connections whose destination block is a cached copy of a block in another instrument The source of the connection can be either a local database block or another cached block Such connections are evaluated only if the source and destination data do not match All cached blocks in the database are processed at regular intervals and whenever a change is detected a single field write is per formed over the communications link 3 Connections from cached bl
293. quired for entry to this agent and is a digit from 1 to 4 The default is 1 WrAccess gives the security level for Write access within this agent The precise interpretation of this is agent specific The default is Access Pane is the pane in which the agent is to operate specified as a digit from 1 to 4 as follows 1 Status Pane 2 Pane 3 Popup Pane 4 Dialogue Pane If this parameter is omitted then the Main Pane is selected by default Only the Dialog agent operates in the Dialogue pane Continued 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 43 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 7 3 LINE TYPES Cont PANEL AGENT DECLARATION Cont Example A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 Any further parameters are agent specific in meaning They must be comma separated and each must be one of the following types 1 Positive decimal number from 0 to 2 1 2 number preceded by X with up to 8 digits 3 String within double quotes 4 Dictionary string using the format 5 123 where S for example is the dictionary identifier and 123 for exam ple is the index number See the User Screen Editor Handbook for more information For example for a Menu agent the first two specific arguments are the title and legend respectively which may be specified as either strings or dictionary strings Most other panel agents supply their own title and legend which may be customised if necessary by modifying the syst
294. r BaudRate The current Baud Rate MaxDev The maximum number of slaves which the master is cabable of communicating with ConfDev The number of configured slave devices ActvDev The number of active communicating slave devices IpMemUse The amount of cyclic input space currently in use OpMemUse The amount of cyclic output space currently in use ScanRate The time in us currently being taken to perform a single update cycle Tblrate The time in us currently being taken to update all the input and output tables of all the active slaves DiagRate The time in us currently being taken to update all extended diagnostics tables AcycRate The time in us currently being taken to update all the acyclic read write tables Chapter 10 HAO29280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 10 3 1 GWPROFM CON Cont HWState The current status of the Profibus Master Inactive The Master is in the Stop state the default at power up Loading Master is loading the binary configuration file Validating The Master is validating the loaded configuration file Searching The Master is searching the Profibus network for the devices defined in the configuration file Starting The Master is starting communications channels with the devices detected during the search Active The Master is actively communicating with all active configured slaves on the network Stopping The Master is closing communications channels with all active
295. r each recipe line an additional field must be included after each col umn in the title line and for each variable The title line entry should be an item called Monitor The field for the variable is the tag of the field to be monitored Monitor fields must be placed after capture fields if any Figure 5 10 2c shows a single line file with monitor and capture points See section 3 7 2 for details of Capture and Monitor UYR 1 9 10 04 06 09 00 24 Richard 30 Setpoint l1 Capture Monitor Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConc Methane GasConc Methane GasConc Methane 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConc CrbDiOx GasConc CrbDiOx GasConc CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConc Ethane GasConc Ethane GasConc Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConc Propane GasConc Propane GasConc Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasConc Water GasConc Water GasConc Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConc Hsulphid GasConc Hsulphid GasConc Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConc CrbMonOx GasConc CrbMonOx GasConc CrbMonOx 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConc Oxygen GasConc Oxygen GasConc Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConc iButane GasConc
296. racters 16 characters V196 Log Off FTP 8 characters 16 characters V197 LogFail FTP 8 characters 16 characters V198 Timeout FTP 8 characters 16 characters Note Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option Chapter 5 Page 5 32 HAO29280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 4 1 Editing Event Messages The Event dictionary supplied forms a part of the _system uyl file To customise it the principle is the same as for the System and Error text dictionaries 1 In the Event text dictionary find the text to be replaced 2 Note its reference number 3 Key in the reference number and then the replacement text related by V lt N gt lt text gt where lt N gt is the reference number of the record to be changed lt text gt is the replacement text For example V41 Appn loaded 5 4 2 Creating new language event text Any additional language dictionaries that are created must be named _system1 uyl _system2 uyl and so on up to _system9 uyl one dictionary for each language to be implemented PROCEDURE Using a standard text or spreadsheet editor 1 Write a first column of reference numbers from V1 to at least V116 2 Inthe second column write the message in the required language Files should be saved as CSV files 5 4 3 Event priorities All events are initially priority 1 It is possible to assign other priorities in order for example to filter events for printing logging or tre
297. rame 0 8 A Large frame 1Amp 10 A max 4 way connector No user replaceable fuses Battery Battery BR2330 Poly carbonmonofluoride lithium Part number PA261095 See also section 9 1 Data Logging Storage Disk Data format Data compression Log frequency Internal Flash memory ASCII or compressed data Proprietary 1 Hz HA029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Appendix A Page A 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK SPECIFICATION Cont Programmer Max no of concurrent programs Max no of segments Max no of analogue setpoints Max no of digital setpoints 250 16 32 Alarms and events Number of records in history History line format Acknowledgment 500 lines maximum Name Type Date Time Colour coded No of records in event log 1000 Recipes Max no of concurrent recipe sets files 8 Max no of production lines per set 8 Max no of recipes per set file 16 Max no variables per set 500 Batch Max no of concurrent batches files 8 Max no of phases per batch 20 Trends Max no of groups trends 16 Max no of points per group 16 Maximum frequency Maximum samples 1 sample per second 15 000 for 1 group of 16 points Continuous database resources Database size 128kBytes Notes No of function blocks 512 1 The maxima given here are defaults and are the recommended limits No of templates 100 max Subject to note 2 it is
298. rategies and how to configure their parameters The configurator program itself resides in the instrument s CPU and is accessed via any telnet client program The choice of serial or telnet communications must first be made in the comms setup page section 4 5 and the user ID access system must be enabled and a user set up with Remote attribute enabled section 4 4 3 8 2 PREPARATION 8 2 1 Configurator mode selection Set the ENETS port protocol to TERMCFG as described in section 4 5 1 8 2 2 Control efficiency selection The configurator can be run at the same time that the database is running However this affects the control effi ciency in a way that depends on how the Options CONFspd bit in the control strategy s header block has been set With CONFspd TRUE the CPU is allowed to spend up to 30 of its time updating blocks in the control strategy and the rest is available for serving the front panel and configurator task if running Thus if CONFspd is set TRUE the control strategy will not respond at full speed but the configurator can be run as often as needed without affecting performance With CONFspd FALSE the default state and the configurator not in use the CPU can spend up to 40 of its time updating blocks 029280 Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 8 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 3 RUNNING THE CONFIGURATOR 8 3 1 Initial menu access 1 Power up all components and run Hyperterminal The starti
299. rectly the file is ignored New password The required new password of up to eight characters If left blank the password remains unchanged Enable disable 0 IPRP disabled off 1 IPRP enabled on If left blank the setting remains unchanged For example to change the default password to Richard1 and enable IPRP the file content should be as follows OEM 1 OEM OEM Richard1 1 Note Space characters are included in the password Commas are not allowable as password characters HAO29280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 55 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 10 BATCH MAINTNEANCE Whenever a batch is loaded the instrument seeds the batch id with a sequence number starting from 00000001 to provide a unique batch ID This number increases throughout the life of the instrument to ensure the batch ID is unique within this instrument If it is ever required to modify this sequence number the BAT MAINT utility may be used to do this Possible reasons are replacement of existing instrument or to reset after a commissioning phase This utility is accessed as shown in figure 4 10 below Press menu key OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING 2 Press SYSTEM key SYSTEM ALARMS ACCESS The batch sequence number ID that was last used is displayed This may be modified to new value the next batch run will take this new value 1 The ID is edited by touc
300. replayed with an off line tool In this context archiving is the same as logging See also Logging and Log group A brown out is a transient power variation or partial power failure severe enough to provoke an automatic re set in the Visual Supervisor Configuration is the process of specifying the components of an application in order to deter mine the performance and behaviour of an instrument Configuration is usually carried out by the manufacturer or by an OEM See also Application and LIN database A configurator is a user interface or software tool that provides the editing capability to configure the instrument A configurer is any person who configures or who is responsible for configuring the instru ment Control of Substances Hazardous to Health This is the procedure by which a user can construct a Home page and sometimes other user screens See LIN database Dictionary files hold items of text for display on the screen Users can edit replace or delete many of the items Electromagnetic compliance The Home page is that which is displayed on power up and to which the display returns when no data has been entered during a specified time out period It can also be called up at any time The Home page will either stand on its own or be the root page of a hierarchy of user written pages LIN database stands for Local Instrument Network database a Eurotherm proprietary facility For any Eur
301. riables PVs setpoints and digital outputs and on the right the required target setpoint profile Enables Engineers to edit and Operators to view the setpoints of the current program dis played in a table Runs a program from the start or re starts a program after a Hold from the point where it paused Stops a program running and holds it paused at that point Switches a program from Hold state to Idle Starts or re starts a process from a specified time into program Terminates the current segment and proceeds immeditely to the next segment These are the functions most frequently used in normal operation Chapter 2 Page 2 8 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 6 THE ALARM PANE The Alarm pane appears at the top right hand corner of the screen and is used to display any alarm signals triggered by abnormal conditions detected in the process under control instrument alarms etc NNI lt Eycon 10 ZINN Figure 2 6 A typical Alarm pane display In this particular example BADBAT means that voltage delivered by the battery has fallen below its operational threshold In general there are four possible types of alarm annunciation as summarised in table 2 6 1 below The question mark symbol on a flashing orange black background means that there is a new message to be investigated as described in ACTIVE MESSAGE DISPLAY below Alarms can be set to b
302. rocedure is not possible if the unit is fitted with the Auditor option To change the Identity ENGINEER to Roger and assign Roger a password of 13 1 Touch the word ENGINEER in the Identity column 2 Touch the word ENGINEER in the Identity field of the resulting dialogue box figure 4 4 3b Enter Roger using the POP UP keyboard followed by Return Touch the yellow Password field and enter the number 13 using the keyboard PN Identity ENGINEER Password 98888 Confirm OK CANCEL DELETE DISABLE Figure 4 4 3b ID Edit page 5 Touch the yellow Confirm field and enter the number 13 using the keyboard and press OK If this entry differs from the first OK has no effect and the Confirm field remains highlighted To write the changes to the data base press the SAVE key first using the Option key to display it if necessary Oth erwise press CANCEL 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 4 4 31 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 3 USER ID SYSTEM Cont Editing other fields The editing of remaining fields is carried out in a similar manner except for the access level field which is selected from a pick list rather than being typed in as a keyboard entry Attributes column Touching this column allows the ADMIN level user to enable or disable the following functions for all other users View only Admin only FTP Remote User button User screen All fu
303. rogram loaded only PROGRAMS and SCHEDULE appear Programmer PROGRAMS SCHEDULE Figure 2 5a The Programmer menu display locked With the display unlocked and a program loaded the full menu appears Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT RUN RUN FROM Figure 2 5b The Programmer menu display unlocked Some of the buttons are greyed out because taking the example shown above where the program either has yet to be run or has just been aborted these keys are not currently required MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT RUN HOLD ABORT RUN FROM SKIP Displays text details of the program currently loaded Loads a new program from those available in the instrument s flash memory Runs a program at a future time and date repeating a specific number of times if necessary PREVIEW is a graphical version of EDIT below With a program loaded it displays its profile so that Engineers can check it before running it They can display the target values for the variables at any point in time by moving a vertical cursor along a horizontal time base PRE PLOT is a graphical version of MONITOR above but extended showing a plot of both target and actual variables A vertical cursor at the centre of the display marks the current time and the display moves from right to left past it showing on the left the actual values of the process va
304. rs have been retired For example 1 200 means that 1 user has been retired and that 199 further users may be retired Note Retiring the 201st user causes the 1st Retired user by time date to be removed from the list This results in Event 20 Purged user being set This user s data can now be re used 029280 Chapter 6 Page 6 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont REVISION Touching this key calls the configuration revision page as depicted in figure 6 1 3h below Revision Information Revision 0 Operational Changes 0 Revised On 10 04 06 10 23 25 Revised By Fred Reason FACTORY DEFAULTS Figure 6 1 3h Revision page DEPLOY A master access system can deploy its own access system to other Visual Supervisors across its ELIN network This Deployment is in three stages 1 Select the number of nodes initially 0 2 Enter the node numbers to be deployed to 3 Initiate the deployment The initial display page appears when the DEPLOY key is first pressed Figure 6 1 31 and shows that the number of nodes is zero Deploy Access Number of slave nodes 0 CONFIG USERS Figure 6 1 31 Initial Deploy configuration page Touching the CONFIG key allows the number of nodes to be deployed to to be entered The display shows one con figuration box each for the number of nodes selected to allow the required node
305. rument configuration The access levels Engineer Commis sion and Operator are retained but with an additional level Admin CHANGING TO THE USER ID SYSTEM Note Changing from the standard access level system to the user id system is not a reversible process i e it is not possible to return to the access level system from the user id system Press the Menu key and select ACCESS from the pop up menu If RESET asswords necessary change the access level to Engineer 2 Press PASSWDS then USERS OPERATOR 3 Confirm twice that the change is to be made COMMISSION jocis 4 Login at Admin level by ENGINEER a touching the Identity field and entering ADMIN must be in capi tals followed by Return then AGEL TER b touching the Password field and entering ADMIN must be in capitals followed by Return then c pressing LOG ON RESET Security access It is now necessary to create IDs and passwords for other users and assign Acess ADMINI access levels to them as described in USER ID MANAGEMENT below Name ADMINI Identity ADMINI LOG OFF PASSWD USERS Notes 1 For security reasons it is recommended that new ADMIN Id and password are entered before any other actions 2 When logging on it is recommended that the Identity field be cleared completely of any characters before entry of the new Identity This is be done by positi
306. ry 5 4 The Event text dictionary 5 12 The recipe dictionary 5 5 The User text dictionary 5 13 The batch dictionary 5 6 The Programmer text dictionary 5 14 Batch files 5 7 Panel navigation 5 15 Database change audit trailing 5 8 Database names INTRODUCTION 5 1 to 5 8 show how to replace the supplied screen displayed texts with ones more suited to a particular process in a different language and so on Each of these can involve either 1 replacing text items displayed by the instrument s Standard Interface and or 2 writing new text either for any other national language versions of the Standard Interface that might be required or for any so called User screens being developed 5 9 describes how to format reports 5 10 to 5 15 contain details of how to create or edit recipe batch and card reader files 5 1 1 The dictionaries Displayed texts are held in files called dictionaries covered in sections 5 2 to 5 6 and 5 11 to 5 13 There are specific customisable dictionary files for each of the following types of texts Standard Interface excluding the Error and Event messages Error messages Event messages The texts of any User pages the User screens Programmer texts Writeable modifiable texts for use with the batch system and in reports Recipe texts Batch texts O t The texts of the Standard Interface are held in the System text dictionary Error messages are held in the
307. s 16 characters V164 Logout Timeout 8 characters 16 characters V168 Access Upd Fail 16 Characters 16 Characters See Note V169 Reinstated 16 characters 16 characters See Note V170 Recover Enable 16 characters 16 characters V171 Recover Disable 16 characters 16 characters V172 Master Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V173 Slave Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V174 Bind Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note Note Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option 029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 5 31 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY Cont No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA XGA V175 Unbind Acces 16 characters 16 characters See Note V176 Access Bind Fail 16 characters 16 characters See Note V177 ForcNew on PwdEx 16 characters 16 characters See Note V178 Disable on PwdEx 16 characters 16 characters See Note V179 Deploy Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V180 Clock sync 16 characters 16 characters V181 Clock master 16 characters 16 characters V182 Clock slave 16 characters 16 characters V183 Clock isolated 16 characters 16 characters V185 Expired 16 characters 16 characters See Note V186 Invalid 8 characters 16 characters See Note V190 Log On Remote 8 characters 16 characters 191 Log Off remote 8 characters 16 characters V192 Log Fail Remote 8 characters 16 characters V193 Timeout Remote 8 characters 16 characters V195 Log On FTP 8 cha
308. s on view 1 Single message on view RECIPE 0 Recipe selection 1 Recipe status 2 Recipe Monitor 3 Recipe editor SPP 0 Monitor 1 Programs 2 Schedule 3 Preplot 4 Edit 5 Preview 6 Run From Table 5 7 4b Agent sub menus for entry points gt 1 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 5 Page 5 47 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 8 DATABASE NAMES The LIN database within any Visual Supervisor consists of a number of function blocks some of which are set by Instrument manufacturer and are common to all Visual Supervisors and some of which function block names alarm names and Enumerations are specified by the user for the process to be controlled Function block names are open to change using LINtools either by customers or by OEMs Enumerations are also editable but not via LinTools see section 5 8 3 These three types of names text items are held in Database Names files called uyn files These files are optional but where they exist there will be one per database application They take the name lt appname gt uyn 5 8 1 Function block names Function block names are displayed in two facilities Alarm History and Logging Groups and in addition are used in logging files where they are stored as ASCII The syntax for replacing an existing function block name is Block Alias Block Name where Block Alias is the replacement text and Block Name is the original LIN database name for the block
309. sation On any particular instrument the legends on the buttons can be different from those shown here indeed the buttons need not exist at all and in fact the whole architecture of the interface can differ Throughout this manual what is called the Standard Interface is described This is generated by the manufac turer before any customisation by the user This is not the same as the Minimum Interface which is generated by the minimum configuration necessary for the instrument to function The Minimum Interface Pop up menu consists of three panes ACCESS SYSTEM and ALARMS With the display Locked that is before a password is entered and access gained only ACCESS and SYSTEM are active However most users will operate the Standard Interface This features five more panes PROGRAMMER LOG GING OVERVIEW RECIPE and HOME USER SCREENS In this case with the display locked ACCESS SYS TEM OVERVIEW and HOME USER SCREENS will be active Other i e non active keys are distinguishable by having their text in white ACCESS SYSTEM OVERVIEW Figure 2 3 The Standard Pop up menu display locked From this menu without a password menu systems can be explored and information displayed The SYSTEM OVERVIEW and USER SCREENS displays are view only at this locked stage only ACCESS will respond fully to menu and key selections to grant access as described in Section 2 8 Gaining access The functions of each pane
310. set to YES the data is exported by touching the EXPORT key at the bottom of the page IMPORTING APPLICATION DATA From the Cloning page select IMPORT The same page as for exporting shown above appears with the same fields Notes 1 Imported user pages take immediate effect 2 pnlfiles need the application to be unloaded and reloaded to take effect 3 Imported Comms profiles need the application to be restarted to take effect 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 4 4 47 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 6 3 Cloning system instrument data SELECTING SYSTEM DATA From the Cloning page showing the pick list of System Application and All select System Press Return The Cloning page confirms the selection EXPORTING SYSTEM DATA Select EXPORT The System Data Cloning page appears with three fields as described below 1 Config Options IMPORT RESET EXPORT IMPORT RESET System Data Config Options NO Dictionaries NO User Pages NO 2 Dictionaries EXPORT CLEAR 3 User Pages Config Options These are startup strategy panel settings comms settings and current language Basically they are instrument operation preferences If the Auditor pack option is enabled Security Access if the unit is an Access System Master Network Audit Trail Setup
311. slaves on the network Stopped All communications including network maintenance have stopped Error The Master has experienced a fatal error and is no longer able to communicate with any slave s ResetCnt Resets the following error counters CIpFail The number of failed attempts to read cyclic process input data This failure is caused by the Profibus Master denying a slave s access to the process input data area Incremented each time access is denied to any slave COpFail The number of failed attempts to write cyclic process output data This failure is caused by the Profibus Master denying access to the process output data area Incremented each time access is denied to any slave AlpFail The number of failed attempts to read acyclic data The failure might be caused by the Master Profibus board or by rejection by a slave AOpFail The number of failed attempts to write acyclic data The failure might be caused by the Master Profibus board or by rejection by a slave SlaveAdd This user enterd value is the address of the slave for which Profibus diagnostics are to be displayed stdDiagl Byte 1 of the standard Profibus diagnostics for the slave defned in SlaveAdd above NonExist Slave did not respond last time NotReady Slave not ready for data transfer CfgFault Slave is reporting a configuration error ExtDiag Extended diagnostics data available and valid NotSupp Slave does not support a feature requested
312. t one block in each direction This enables the status of the comms link between the nodes to be monitored from both ends via the cached blocks software alarms Select NETWORK from the main menu to display the Network setup page initially blank Figure 8 4 5 shows the top part of an example page with several databases already assigned Network setup Alpha gt 01 Beta gt 02 dBase 1 gt 03 Figure 8 4 5 NETWORK setup page example To assign a new database name and address locate the underline cursor at the left hand column of a blank row type in a unique name 7 characters max and press Enter The name appears added to the list together with a default node address gt 00 Non unique or invalid names are beeped and not accepted Do not use OO or FF as node ad dresses Move the cursor to the default address and type in the required node address two hex digits Press lt En ter gt to complete the assignation To edit an existing name or address locate the cursor at a field type in the new value and press Enter Invalid entries are not accepted To delete a complete name and address entry edit its name field to a space character Configurations downloaded from LINtools or Eurotherm Network will have a Network page set up automatically 029280 Chapter 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 8 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 8 4 6 Utilities Allows program control I O calibration and filing
313. tches up The Holdback value is set by the Engineer For example if the setpoint is ramping up but the PV has fallen behind and is now falling below the pre set lower bound the program will automatically switch the setpoint profile to a dwell to give the PV a chance to catch up The dwell will continue until the PV climbs above the lower bound whose profile of course could now also be a dwell At this point the setpoint profile will switch back to a ramp up The result of this is that the overall process time extends by the length of time during which the PV was out of bounds which is the same as the length of the dwell The remainder of this section explains which type of limit or limits can be set and how to set the values After setting the new values they are saved by pressing the option key below the screen On the Option bar that ap pears at the bottom of the screen press the SAVE button a a Option key HA029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 1 6 CHANGING HOLDBACK PROPERTIES Cont SAMPLE 1 CHOOSING THE SETPOINT In the Program Editor choose the analog input for which the Hold Back properties are to be edited The cell highlights and a dialogue box appears CHANGING HOLD BACK MODE Press the Mode field yellowed Holdback A pick list ith None Low High High amp L h des pick list appears wi one Low High Hig ow s
314. ted by the Pre plot facility MONITOR displays text and numeric information about the program as a list PREPLOT displays a graphic profile of the target and actual process variables PVs Generally MONITOR is used when precise values are needed PREPLOT is used to provide an overview 3 3 1 The monitor facility With a program running and the Programmer menu displayed step 8 in section 3 1 1 Running a program now press MONITOR The Current Program page appears displaying the following information about the program as it is running most of the fields are self explanatory PROGRAM Name Program name Status Run Hold Held Back Idle Error Complete Duration Running time start to finish Completion Time of completion of current run assuming no interruptions Iteration Number of current run number of runs requested SEGMENT Name Segment name usually a number Time Remaining Time remaining to completion of the current segment decrementing second by second Current Program Program Segment Name Status Duration Completion Iteration Name Time Remaining SAMPLE RUNNING 03 55 00 17 06 34 1 00 02 43 RUN HOLD 04 04 06 ABORT 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 3 Page 3 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 3 2 The preplot facility 3 3 D25D04B Comms TANDARD DISPLAY MODE spx7m S S 41 9 With
315. ter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 53 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 8 2 RECIPE EDITING Cont SAVING RECIPES To save changes to the current file name operate the SAVE button To make a copy of the file press SAVE AS RECIPE FILE PROPERTIES Touching the RCP cell calls the Recipe File properties dialogue box to the display This gives the name of the recipe file and the line currently selected as well as details of the previous file edit The version field is incremented each time the file is saved Further to this there is an editable timeout field allowing a value to be entered to timeout a successful download of a recipe Id SET1 File Name GASCONIC Line SO Version 5 Edited by Fred At 11 50 57 23 11 00 Timeout 0 seconds OK INSERT Figure 4 8 2b Recipe File properties box 4 8 3 Capturing a Recipe With a recipe file loaded and a recipe selected it is possible to capture live values from the running application for display in the Recipe Monitor page either in the Capture column if available or in the SP Live column if not Operation of the CAPTURE button in the monitor page overwrites the existing values in the selected recipe CAP TURE AS creates a new recipe with the captured values Once values have been captured they can be modified as required in the Recipe edit page Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 54 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4
316. ter 4 HA029280 Page 4 28 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 2 EDITING PASSWORDS Cont reser Passwords 5 Key in the new password 6 Press the Return key The Security Access page reappears J Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level ENGINEER New Level ENGINEER Password CHANGE PASSWDS For Commissioning Engineer and Operator passwords the Security Access page reappears with either COMMIS SION or OPERATOR displayed against both Current Level and New Level depending upon the access level for which you were setting the password 7 Press OK For Engineer level passwords only a Confirm Password window appears prompting a repeat of the password entry procedure as follows in steps 8 9 and 10 8 Press the password field still asterisked 9 the new password again and press the Return key The Confirm Password window pops up again 10 Press OK After a short delay the Security Access page appears with ENGINEER displayed at both Current Level and New Level 029280 Chapter 4 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 4 29 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 4 3 User ID system The standard system of access described in section 4 4 2 above can be replaced by a system in which each individual user has a password and ident to allow access to the inst
317. the Programmer menu displayed and program running see step 8 57 34 in section 3 1 1 Running a program now press PREPLOT mm A display appears showing a profile of the target and the actual PVs moving slowly perhaps imperceptibly from right to left past a vertical EPECNKEN cursor at the centre of the screen OPEN 03 56 00 00 03 56 Figure 3 3 2a Note The trend resolution is such that short duration events in particular zero duration spikes will not be visible Preplot display program running EVA 25 4 Comms The cursor marks the current time The actual PVs SPs and digital outputs are to the left of the cursor and the target SPs are to the right With the same program loaded but not running Idle the display shown opposite appears showing the profiles programmed for the four vari ables Figure 3 3 2b Preplot display program idle REVIEW MODE Operation of the option key calls the Option bar which contains two keys VIEW and LIVE Operation of the VIEW key causes the page to re draw with zoom and pan controls as shown in figure 3 3 2c below This screen contains only the program traces not the target profile To enter Review Mode allowing the history of the program to be traced the pan zoom controls are adjusted or the trace is touched Once in Review Mode the traces on the screen are no longer updated
318. the first four letters of the file set and the instrument supplies the last four month day SEQUENCE With Sequence filenames only the first two characters are supplied by the user the remainder of the file name being automatically appended by the instrument as a six digit number starting at 000001 This number is incremented each time a new file of this form is created HA029280 Chapter 3 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 3 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 4 3 The Manage facility The MANAGE facility allows the export of files to a removable storage device ARCHIVE EXPORT The ability to export files to a Memory stick is provided from the Archive Manage page Exported copied files are not deleted from the internal archive UHH Export This pushbutton causes the currently displayed file to be File Type copied to the USB device as selected File Name AAUU0UUITUHH Export all This pushbutton causes all files in the internal archive to be File Size 4 kBytes copied to the USB device If the device becomes full Media Size 31206 kBytes during archive a message appears asking the user to fit a Free Space 21744 kBytes new memory device Free Time 368 08 06 EXPORT ALL MONITOR If a file to be exported has the same name as one already on the storage device the following occurs a Ifthe file is identical the file will not be exported but be marked as skipped b Ifthe new
319. thernet using Modbus TCP instead of one of EIA422 485 Chapter 4 HA029280 Page 4 36 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 4 5 1 EDITING COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS Cont ETHERNET The following applies only if the Ethernet option is fitted Notes 1 Before operating the ETHERNET button operate the SAVE button or all changes made so far will be lost 2 Before operating the COMMS button to return to the Comms setup page operate the SAVE button or all changes made in the Ethernet setup page will be lost 3 On the small frame 1 4 VGA version of the instrument the three buttons SAVE CANCEL and ETHERNET are hidden by a scroll bar The Option key is used to toggle between the scroll bar and these buttons Option key 4 The user must have suitable access permission in order to edit the Ethernet setup Ethernet setup is accessed by operating the Ethernet key at the bottom of the comms set up page Figure 4 5 1b shows the relevant fields To return to Comms setup operate the Comms button LIN Protocol setup Protocol Name All subnet Enable Local IP Setup MAC Address Address Assignment IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Remote Subnet Node List Number of Nodes EN ER Node 1 SAVE CANCEL COMMS Figure 4 5 1b Ethernet setup items Allows the user to enter a protocol name of up t
320. tilities 22 8 10 Defined Keys 2 3 Startup 5 4 39 Da cessi aeara R ia 2 15 STATS 4 34 6 6 ID COhttOl cn notet hear 6 3 SLOP iot iE nien ettet st ar ation cete beenden 4 4 ID management 4 31 UU 4 19 4 21 ID password system 4 30 Bits suni Al ani es 8 14 Magier oie re tee eee ty 6 4 Supply voltage Pages 4 47 Requirements ST per a THN CSI AR WIE QU 1 6 Properties 6 5 Wiring bau vy eee tee med ea eee 1 6 Text ice tete cere 5 34 SWITCH OTT rete inve a tede eun 2 1 utes AERE 6 5 Symbols used on labels 151 User defined Names 8 5 29280 Index Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK U Cont W 8 10 8 18 UYF files 5 51 Wild character ccccccccccccccccccccccccteeseeccecceecsenseee 8 11 WY RAINES c DENM 5 55 Wiring cete 5 54 Ethernet coccccccccccccccccccccccecceececececececttseteececccccsssaeses 1 8 Profibus Master
321. time or at any other time no password is required OPERATOR and COMMISSION Commissioning Engineer levels For first time access no password is required ENGINEER level For first time access immediately after the instrument has been commissioned the factory set default password for Engineer level access should be entered This password is lt spacekey gt default I E a space character followed immediately by default eight characters in all The space key on the screen keyboard is the blank key at bottom right above the C key Press ACCESS ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS PROGRAMMER LOGGING 1 Press the Menu key a The Pop up menu appears CD Press menu key RESET Security Access 2 Press ACCESS Enter required level and password then CHANGE 4 4 2 Editing the passwords To change the passwords carry out the following procedure The Security Access page appears displaying the current access level ENGINEER and two keys CHANGE and PASSWDS CER EniE ENGINEER New Level ENGINEER Password PASSWDS RESET Passwords 3 Press PASSWDS The Passwords page appears 4 Press the password field you want to change e g Operator OPERATOR COMMISSION 900998 ENGINEER eoe OK USER CANCEL A qwerty keyboard display appears ES Passwords Continued Chap
322. ting in seconds a Programmer PROGRAMS SCHEDULE Left of the page title is the current time To view the time into pro gram you should use the MONITOR facility section 3 3 below PREVIEW PRE PLOT For most processes there will now be time available for solving the problem before the pause itself starts causing new problems The time available will depend upon the process If the attempts to fix the problem are successful the pro gram is usually continued from that point using RUN see section 3 1 1 Running a program now If the attempts are unsuccessful the program is usually aborted as described in 3 2 2 below 3 2 2 Aborting a program Starting from the end of 3 2 1 Holding a program press ABORT The Program pane changes to white and reports IDLE The program is now idling which means that it is still loaded in short term memory but not being run At this point the same program can be run again from the start or a new program run see section 3 1 1 Running a program now SAMPLE IDLE 27 77 77 Programmer PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT ABORT Chapter 3 29820 Page 3 8 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 3 MONITORING A PROGRAM There are two ways of monitoring a program as it s running 1 Viewing a textual numeric display generated by the Monitor facility 2 Viewing a graphical display genera
323. tion Data Cloning page appears displaying the following fields SFCs NO described below Control Database Programs Recipes User pages Forms Comms Profiles ON Control Database SFCs Programs Recipes User pages Forms Comms Profiles SFCs Sequential Function Charts Application Data Control Database NO Programs Recipes NO User Pages Forms Comms Profiles NO EXPORT CLEAR This is the instrument s LIN database consisting of file types cpf dbf gwf run uya and Sequential Function Charts part of any special strategies software that may have written to support particular events circumstances or requirements They consist of sdb files Setpoint programs and or recipes that have typically have been created on this instrument and which the user now wishes to copy to another instrument Recipes and Programs consist of uys and uyr files and if Batch files are present uyb files Written by users to satisfy the control requirements of their particular process User pages may consist of a single Home page or a hierarchy of user pages with a Home page at its root They consist of ofl and pnl files Text files that determine how reports are generated Consist of uyt and uyf files Parameters that determine how the instrument communicates with other instruments Consist of uxm file Once the required fields have been
324. tions OPEN CLOSED 2 Syntax Block Name gt lt Block Field gt lt Block SubField gt lt gt lt gt For example digital Out Bitl OPEN CLOSED This replaces the existing enumerations in block field subfield digital out bitl with the new enumerations OPEN CLOSED TAGS Individual function block fields may be tagged so that whenever a modification to the block is made from the touch screen the modification is recorded in Event History Syntax Field Tag gt lt Block Name Field Name gt lt Bit number where field tag is the name that is used to identify the value when changed For example LowTemp PID SL BitO Note the maximum number of characters that may be used for a for a field tag is eight for small frame 1 4VGA units and sixteen for large frame XGA units HA029280 Chapter 5 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 5 49 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 5 9 FORM FILES The instrument uses two types of form file to configure output to printers one for the generation of reports the other for custom formatting of alarms e g text colour change 5 9 1 Report forms An application containing DR_REPRT blocks will reference report UYF files which feature Customised layout of information Detailed control of the formatting of data items Text optionally internationalised LIN database variables System variables e g current date and time An example of a UYF file is given in figur
325. toring of the instrument Engineer level of access to the instrument is required see section 2 8 1 gaining access This chapter consists of the following sections 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 Editing a program Logging groups of data Managing an application Controlling access Setting up and re setting the instrument Cloning an instrument File Manager Recipe management OEM features Batch Maintenance If at any point the display differs from what is expected the Menu key at the bottom of the screen on the right can be used to return to the Pop up menu from which the task can be repeated 4 1 EDITING A PROGRAM 4 1 1 INTRODUCTION Note If more than one programmer has been configured then the right left arrow keys do not scroll through the program but to the next previous programmer ID section 3 1 1 CREATING A PROGRAM The PC based Setpoint program editor supplied on CD as one of the components of the Eurotherm Project Studio is used to create programs For details see the Setpoint Program Editor Handbook part no HA261134U005 EDITING A PROGRAM Notes 1 Only two tasks changing setpoint value and changing segment duration can be performed while a program is running but on Hold for the duration of the task Whilst the current segment is in Hold mode its values are displayed in green instead of blue It is possible to edit this segment s duration only to times long
326. troller User Manual HAO28898 Modbus Profibus communications 028014 All registered unregistered trademarks are properties of their respective holders 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Contents Page VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CONTENTS Section Page SAFETY NOTES kt Pe dete edet Dahan 1 1 SYMBOLS USED ON THE EQUIPMENT LABELLING 1 1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE uer tete tenere Hte ERES 1 2 Chapter 1 5 5 11 3 WINPACKING Aedes 1 3 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 1 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ae eene e bend 1 6 1 3 1 Supply voltage 1 6 POWER REQUIREMENTS 1 6 123 2 BIAAB S connections eoe Dea ee 1 7 LEDAINDIGATORS Meena ete 1 7 1 3 3 ETHERNET 100 10 Base T Connector 2 2 1 8 PIAT USB Connectors ee at tree pr eO et p ee rr HEP Hn 1 8 1 3 5 Wiring the Visual Supervisor to units 2 2212 1 1 9 1 3 6 Profibus wiring 1 10 Chapter 2 GETTING STARTED 2 4 2 1 2 1 SWITCH ON
327. types in that segment will be changed to conform 2 segment may not ramp at less than 0 001 or greater than 9999 0 whether expressed explicitly in a Ramp At command or implicitly in a Ramp to command Values outside this range cause the segment to execute a step function Servo to setpoint SP The unit reads the current setpoint value and sets the setpoint to that value that is it does not change it Similar to Dwell except that the instrument carries out the instruction automatically without operator intervention As there is no change power output remains constant May be used only in the first segment Servo to process variable PV The instrument reads the current process value and sets the setpoint to that value Because the current process value normally differs from the current setpoint value this option usually results in a change in the power consumption of the process Note If the first segment is a Servo to PV or SP the instrument assumes that it starts from an SP of 0 0 This is unlikely to be the actual SP or PV Therefore the Preview profile displayed for the first segment will differ from the actual programmed profile For the same reason if the second segment is a ramp at rate the segment duration in Preview will differ from the actual duration and if the second segment is ramp to target then the slope in Preview will differ from the actual slope TERMINOLOGY In this document any cha
328. u only with no application loaded The page displays the alarms and events that have been output to trend displays printers or log files This data is lost on power cycling TWO LINE DISPLAY SUMMARY ACCESS APP MGR SET UP MAINT EVT LOG Press EVT LOG key Press menu key E ACT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 idis ids gt is gt iS gt gt gt is gt gt gt oOoooooooooo idis ids gt gt gt iS gt gt gt Ps HHHHHHHHHHH ifs dis idis idis iS iS IS IS IS OY lOn pBpBpBHBHHNUO 0 OH NMOO I 0000 Figure 3 5 6 Event log display single line display mode Event Log IVE S T hift REND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND The down arrow key can be used to toggle between single line and two line display The two line display adds a sec ond line to each event used to display text that would not fit onto the single line display 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 3 Page 3 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 6 AREA AND GROUP DISPLAYS 3 6 1 Overview As a part of configuration Lintools an area page can be defined which can contain up to sixteen groups Each group can contain up to 16 points where each point represents a function block The area page contains group faceplates which when any one is touched displays that group s first six point faceplates For the 1 4VGA unit if there are more than six
329. u 10 Bangar lill Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level LOCKED New Level LOCKED Password Week CHANGE ean Security Access el and password 029280 Issue 5 Mar 08 Chapter 2 2 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 2 8 1 GAINING ACCESS Cont STANDARD ACCESS Cont RESET ED BADBAT y E Security Access The pick list disappears revealing the full Security Access page again Se e showing the selected level OPERATOR COMMISSION or ENGI then CHANGE NEER in the New Level field on yellow Current Level LOCKED 6 Press the Password field shown as asterisks on pale yellow New Level OPERATOREN Password CHANGE A i fl EINER qwerty keyboard display appears with a cursor flashing under Security Access the first character space in the black confirmation bar at top left 7 If the password contains characters not visible on this display press the up arrow at bottom left to view others available A numeric symbol keyboard appears A further operation of the Up Arrow calls a keyboard of accented lower case letters A final operation returns the original keyboard to the display In entering the password as described in step 8 below the charac Caps lock ke t
330. ualified 8 characters 16 characters V10 Access change 16 characters 16 characters Log on 8 characters 16 characters V12 Log off 8 characters 16 characters V13 Log fail 8 characters 16 characters 14 Password change 8 characters 16 characters V15 Expired user 8 characters 16 characters V16 Disable user 8 characters 16 characters V17 Enabled user 8 characters 16 characters V18 Deleted user 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V19 Created user 8 characters 16 characters V20 Purged user N A 16 characters Note 1 V31 ITD mem full 16 characters 16 characters V33 Database Running N A 16 characters V34 Deleted file 8 characters 16 characters V35 Imported file 8 characters 16 characters V36 Deleted Database 8 characters 16 characters V37 Created Database 8 characters 16 characters V38 Renamed Block 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V39 Created Block 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V40 Deleted Block 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V41 Database Loaded 16 characters 16 characters V42 Database Started 16 characters 16 characters V44 Database Resumed 16 characters 16 characters V45 Database Restart 16 characters 16 characters V46 Database Stopped 16 characters 16 characters V47 Database Saved 16 characters 16 characters V48 Database Unload 16 characters 16 characters V49 Database Stop 16 characters 16 characters V50 Late 8 characters 16 characters 51 Loaded 8 characters 16 characters V52 No File 8 characters 16 characters V53 Too big 8 characters 16
331. udes the State of the batch its Started at and if appropriate Ended at time and date and phase information If a batch message is active an annunciator bar appears near the top of the page flashing orange black and a question mark with orange black flashing background appears at the left side of the alarm pane Touching the alarm pane allows review and ac knowledgement of the message D Batch Status Batch Message lt Batch message annunciator File Name BATCH Recipe Name Batch Id Order No Customer Contact State Started At Ended At d 50562985 060405 FishesRus C BASS COMPLETE 05 04 06 12 30 46 05 05 06 12 34 43 RESET Figure 3 8 5 Batch status page 3 8 6 Batch Hold With a batch running operating the HOLD key from either the BATCH menu or the Batch Status screen places the batch into hold mode The batch may be restarted as required by pressing RESTART 3 8 7 Batch Abort With a batch running or held operating the ABORT key from either the BATCH menu or the Batch Status screen immediately terminates the batch Chapter 3 Page 3 32 029820 Issue 5 Mar 08 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 3 8 8 Batch Create A new batch can be created by operating the CREATE key from the Load batch page described in section 3 8 1 above Operation of the CREATE key causes a pick list to appear allowing the user to define batch parameters
332. ue 5 Mar 08 Page 6 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 1 Modes The function can be programmed in the following ways 1 Isolated The instrument displays only its own alarms and events Alarms and events are not transmitted to any other node 2 Provider As Isolated except that the unit can also transmit its alarms and events to up to three other Audit Trail consumers 3 Consumer The instrument displays its own alarms and events plus those of up to eight other Visual Supervisors Alarms and events are not transmitted to any other node The node number of the provider is prefixed to the relevant line s in Alarm and Event Logs section 3 5 6 local Alarms and Events are prefixed with space char acters 6 1 2 Configuration Provider Configuration is in two parts selecting the E suite systems the Consumers to which the Audit Trail is to be trans mitted and if required disabling one or more alarm or event types so that only those items of interest are transmit ted CONSUMER SELECTION From mode enter the decimal node addresses of the E suite systems to which the Audit Trail is to be sent Once this has been done the SAVE key should be operated and power removed from the instrument for a few sec onds then reapplied AUDIT TRAIL FILTERING Again from Provider mode the various parameters associated with each node s Audit trail can be enabled set to Yes or disabled set to No P
333. us Master Configuration page in LINtools Details of recommended Profibus network wiring are to be found in the Modbus Profibus communications handbook 028014 Configuration of the Profibus network is carried out using the Profibus editor within LINtools To display the figuration page figure 10 1 1 Click on Add 2 In the pop up dialogue box that appears click on New LIN Profibus Master This adds the GWProfM_CON block section 10 3 to the database and creates a Profibus Network 3 Click on the Profibus master symbol in the Contents Pane to display the Profibus Master Editor page Once configuration is complete it should be saved The Save operation automatically generates gwf and upb files which are added to the download list The next Download operation transfers the download list contents to the Pro fibus Master instrument See the on line help file included with LINtools for further details Contents gt uf z M Prola Hazm Bie baee nee DE Total Dupuis bles esed lp ERO EH 1 2 OR Gener amp ders ke DeIDebsuk D8 T Ej Taso Vestes i By foros Figure 10 1 Profibus editor master configuration page example 10 2 INSTALLATION 10 2 1 Mechanical installation Figures 10 2 1a and 10 2 1b show the mechanical installation details for the small frame and large frame units respec tively See also c
334. vity 029280 Chapter 6 Issue 5 Mar 08 Page 6 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK 6 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont MAINTENANCE Operating the MAINT key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Account Maintenance screen to the display as depicted in figure 6 1 3f below Account Maintenance Recovery Account YES Master Access YES Edit Own Expired Password YES OK CANCEL Figure 6 1 3f Maintenance screen If recovery account is set to YES this enables a recovery in the event of all ADMIN accounts becoming unusable This requires a maintenance contract with the manufacturer Master Access Setting Master Access to NO means that the editing of Account systems is not possible Edit Own Expired Password If set to Yes the user will be forced to change password when attempting to log in If set to only a user with ADMIN permissions may enable a new pasword for a user whose password has expired Recovery Account STATISTICS Operating the STATS key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Statistics screen as depicted in figure 6 1 3g below Statistics Users 5 100 Retired Users 1 200 OK Figure 6 1 3g STATS window This window shows 1 How many users have been configured out of the total available For example Users 6 100 means that six of the 100 possible users have been configured 2 How many use
335. w 30 0 the word Cold is printed and if the value is above 90 0 the word Hot is printed It is possible to use alarm limits as the limit values and also to use dictionary entries for the limit text e g PID1 PV gt Pid LL_SP lt PID1 HL_SP U10 U11 U14 would print the text string held in item 11 of the User dictionary if the value of PID1 lies between the limits If the value lies below the lower limit the message held in U10 is printed and if the value lies above the upper limit the text held in U14 is printed For Boolean variables which are either false or true the format is Variable false text true text For example Pid7 mode Manual would cause the word Manual to be printed when Pid7 mode becomes True but nothing will be printed when the value becomes False System variables some of which are listed in table 5 9 1b can be used to include system information in the report In the example of Figure 5 9 1a the items TIME and _DATE are included to cause the system time and date to be included in the report As with other vari ables a suitable size must be allocated to the items for formatting purposes See the User Screen Editor handbook HA260749U005 for a complete list _ALM_ACT Number of currently active alarms integer DATE Current date in appropriately internationalised format string RCP NAME Name of current recipe string SPP NAME Name of current program string
336. y Password 9008 Confirm OK CANCEL RETIRE DISABLE Figure 6 1 3b Identity pop up RETIRE A retired user is permanently removed from the Security Access page and all access privileges are terminated Re tired users Identities Names and passwords may not be reused It is therefore recommended that a note is kept of all Retired users details DISABLE Users who are disabled Identity and Name in Red lose their access privileges in a non permanent way To reinstate a Disabled user the Identity cell is touched the User s password entered and confirmed and OK touched If the pass word is correct the User is re enabled and is shown in the normal blue colour on the screen The expiry date re mains as first set up for the user NAME Operating this button calls the Name pop up to the screen For new users whose details have not yet been Saved the name can be edited Otherwise as shown in figure 6 1 3c this is a View only function Name LinMan1 CANCEL Figure 6 1 3c Name pop up ATTRIBUTES Touching a particular user s Attributes cell calls the Attributes page This is used to define the users ability to sign and authorise changes and to define whether the user can modify the instruments operation Authorise YES View Only NO Admin Only NO The numbers which appear in the
337. y Alarms Events and Messages are all referred to as events in the following description As can be seen from figure 3 5 1 above the alarm history displays a list of events that have occurred since the data base was loaded giving the date and time of occurrence and where appropriate the time of clearing and for XGA units only time of acknowledgement Where more events have occurred than can be displayed on one page a page turn symbol appears at the top left of the page Table 3 5 1 below shows the various symbols which can appear Use right arrow key to view earlier events Use right arrow key to view earlier events or left arrow key to view later events Use left arrow key to view later events Table 3 5 1 Page turn symbol interpretation It is possible to limit filter the display of events in a number of ways so that only those items of current interest are included in the list To achieve this the Option key at the bottom of the display is pressed to cause the option bar to be displayed figure 3 5 1b This contains not only filter keys but also ARCHIVE and nowledge keys TREND Program Aborted TREND Run Prog PRINTER Amarillo Database Started 72550 7 GASCONIC SFC_CON2 TREND Eycon 20 Database Loaded ACTIVE 04 04 06 12 00 03 04 04 06 12 00 03 04 04 06 11 59 13 04 04
338. y result in imme diate account expiry 1308 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 REINSTATE 1309 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Password Expires In 1310 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Your password is due to expire Please change it 1311 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Expires 1312 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Attributes 1313 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 ENABLE 1314 ACCESS PAGE _TITLE 20 Security Access Retired 1315 ACCESS DIALOG_TITLE 28 Retire User 1316 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 RETIRE 1317 ACCESS DIALOG_TITLE 28 ACCESS ERROR 1318 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 Illegal Password 1319 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 Illegal User ID and or Name 1320 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 User ID and or Name Already In Use 1321 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Sign 1322 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Authorise 1323 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 View Only 1325 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Admin Only 1333 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 FTP 1334 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Remote 1353 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 STATS 1354 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Statistics 1355 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Users 1356 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Retired Users 1357 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 New Users 1359 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 MAINT 1360 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Account Maintenance 1361 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Recovery Account 1362 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Master Access 1363 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Edit Own Expired Password 1393 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Insuffcient Administrator Accounts 1394 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 RECOVER 1395 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Administration Recovery 1396 ACCESS INTRO 64 Please report the key date an

Visual Supervisor Handbook - Eurotherm by Schneider Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents